g GE Healthcare

Centricity* PACS Workstation

Installation and Service Manual

PACS 4.0 Release

2063534-001
Rev 2

Published—June 7, 2012

Do not duplicate.
Copyright © 2001-2012
by General Electric Co.
* Trademark of General Electric Co.
 Copyright Information

All Licensed Software is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and by
applicable international treaties. No rights under copyrights are transferred to Customer,
except as specifically provided in the License Grant.

Trademark Information

GE, the GE Monogram, and Centricity are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
General Electric Company. All other product names and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Confidentiality and Proprietary Rights

This document is the confidential property of GE and/or its affiliated entities. It is furnished
to, and may only be used by, customers and their employees under a written agreement
with GE and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that agreement. The
access and use of this document is restricted to customers and their employees. The user
of this document agrees to protect the confidentiality of the information contained herein
and GE’s proprietary rights as expressed herein and not permit access to this document
by any person for any purpose other than as an aid in the use of the GE software. In no
case may this document or any portion hereof be accessed, made available, examined, or
copied for the purpose of developing, marketing, or supporting any system or computer
program similar to the GE software. No part of this document may be copied without the
prior written permission of GE. The information in this document is subject to change by
GE without notice.

Inquiries regarding permission for use of material contained in this document should be
addressed to:

GE Healthcare ATTN: General Counsel, 540 W. Northwest Highway, Barrington, IL 60010

CE Marking Information

Compliance

The Centricity PACS bears CE mark "CE-0459," indicating its conformity with the
provisions of the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices and fulfilling
the essential requirements of Annex I of this directive.

The standards the product complies to are listed in the General Information and
Certifications sections of the Centricity PACS Servers Service Manual for this release.

The country of manufacture can be found on the equipment labeling.

The safety and effectiveness of this device has been verified against previously distributed
devices. Although all standards applicable to presently marketed devices may not be
appropriate for prior devices (i.e. electromagnetic compatibility standards), this device will
not impair the safe and effective use of those previously distributed devices.

2063534-001 Rev 2 2
 General Definitions of Symbols

The following table defines symbols used throughout this document and the product
software:

Symbol Definition

This symbol indicates the AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE IN THE

EUROPEAN COMMUNITY of the product.

This symbol indicates the MANUFACTURER of the product.

This symbol indicates the DATE OF MANUFACTURE of the product.

This symbol indicates that the operator should CONSULT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE for further information.

This symbol indicates the manufacturers BATCH CODE, or lot number

of the product.

The symbol for CAUTION highlights the fact that there are specific
warnings or precautions associated with the device.

The product bears CE mark indicating its conformity with the provisions
of the Council Directive 93/42/EEC, concerning medical device and
fulfills the essential requirements of Annex I of this directive.
0459
The WEEE symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic
equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must
be collected separately.

For products distributed in the US, the symbol for “Rx Only” indicates:
Rx Only Caution: Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a
licensed healthcare practitioner.

2063534-001 Rev 2 3
Table of Contents

Chapter 1 About this Manual 20

About the Centricity Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Contacting GE Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Contacting the ROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Applications Support and Service Support (Asia Regions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Applications Support Using iCenter, Applications Answerline, Customer Center . . 21
Contact Information for GE Healthcare Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Screen Captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Scenarios 26

Installing a Workstation from the Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Installing Workstation On Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Chapter 3 Introduction 28
Centricity Workstation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Radiologist Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Technologist Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Clinician Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Workstation Standard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Software Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Hardware Requirements for RA1000 Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Recommended Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Minimum Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Monitor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Service Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Chapter 4 Gather Site Data 35

Completing Data Sheet Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Required Data Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2063534-001 Rev 2 4
 Workstation Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Example Site Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Chapter 5 Installing Video Cards 39

Installing Graphics Controllers in HP Z600 and Z400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installing the 5MP2FH Graphics Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Chapter 6 Connecting the Workstation Equipment 44

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Microphone Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Connecting Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Connecting Two B and 1 C Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Connecting Four B and One C Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
NEC Display 2080UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 7 Installing the Operating System 47

Installing the Windows Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Disabling File and Printer Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Configuring Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Activating Windows With Microsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Chapter 8 Configuring Video Drivers 49

Chapter 9 Installing the Workstation Application Software 50

Installing the Workstation License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Installing a Feature License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Mammography Workflow Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installing the Workstation Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Required Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Support for Centricity Precision Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installing the Centricity Workstation Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Changing the User Account Control Settings (Windows 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Changing the Data Execution Prevention (Windows XP 32bit and Server 200x) .
52
Uninstall the Workstation Prior to Version 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Installing the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Configuring the Workstation in the IMS Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Installing the Workstation Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

2063534-001 Rev 2 5
 Chapter 10 Monitor Configuration for Mixed Monitor Systems 57
Mixed Monitor Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Supported Monitor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Configuring Mixed Monitor Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring Hardware Properties Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Adjusting the C Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Chapter 11 Verifying Configuration 61

Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Logging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Verifying the Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Locking the Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Enabling IIS Auto Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting the User Taskbar Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Checking the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Chapter 12 Customer Turnover 65

Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Turnover Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration 68

STAT Exams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Enabling STAT Exam Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Configuring Highlighting for STAT Exams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Enabling Confidential Patient Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Enabling Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Configuring Retention Period for Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Enabling and Configuring Mammography Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Enabling Exam Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Configuring E-Mail Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Configuring Image Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Enabling Image Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Configuring Save Images Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Saving Images to Local Machine/Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Optimizing Exam Saving Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configuring Image Export Options in the Properties File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

2063534-001 Rev 2 6
 Common Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
EMAIL Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
FTP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Using the image_export_config Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Enabling DICOM Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuring DICOM Send with a RadWorks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Enabling Image Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Enabling Cancelled Exam Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Sitewide setting for Enabling Cancelled Exam Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Setting the Cancelled Exam Filtering User Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Enabling Spine Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Enabling Lock Mouse Tool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Configuring DICOM Query Retrieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
DICOM Query Retrieve Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Enabling the DICOM Query Retrieve Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Configuring Workstation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Setting the Workstation SCU AE Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Setting the Maximum Number of AE Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Configuring Query SCP or Query Location Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Enabling the Retrieve Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setting the Move Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Configuring a 3rd Party DICOM Application System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuring the Centricity DICOM Application Server (DAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuring Study Info Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuring the Series Hot Zone and the Comp Hot Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Configuring the Series and Comp Hot Zone Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing the Number of Exams Displayed in the Hot Zone Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setting the Hot Zone Buttons as Left- or Right-Justified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Updating the Comp Hot Zone Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Suppressing Cancelled, Zero Image, and Offline Exams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Obsolete Platinum Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Disabling the Show All Historical Exams Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuring Index Color LUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Creating a New LUT Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Adding a LUT Identifier to a Modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Adding a Preset to a Modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Adding a LUT to a Procedure Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Testing Non-linear Modality LUT Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Changing Magnification Values Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

2063534-001 Rev 2 7
 Configuring Cross-Reference Line Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Configuring Cross-Reference Line Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Conference Display Protocols (CDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Configuring CDPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Deleting CDPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Automatically Deleting CDPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Configuring the Retention Period for CDPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Default Display Protocols (DDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
DDP Layout Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
IGscore Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Grouping Parameters for Different Modalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Configuring System DDPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
System DDP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Enabling Overwrite of a DDP Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Configuring Procedure_Ckey in a DDP Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Important Information About This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Backing Up DDPs and DDP Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Important Information About This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Configuring Procedure_Ckey in a DDP Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Deleting Temporary Database Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Enabling Users to Save Site DDPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Configuring the All Images Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Configuring a Remote Reading Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Configuring the Third Party Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Adding Applications to the Third Party Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Configuring URLs to Web Applications (“Open API”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configuring Image Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Configuring Supported and Unsupported SOP Class UID Checking . . . . . . . . . . 117
Configuring Default Window Level Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Configuring Workstation for Fuji CR Image Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Configuring Display Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Enabling the Right-Click Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Enabling Thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Enabling Spatial Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Enabling Auto Zoom of GE Mammo Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Display Support for Additional Modalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Modality Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

2063534-001 Rev 2 8
 Adding Modality Codes to the Worklist Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Disabling the Modality Code Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Configuring Cine Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Disabling the Scroll Cine Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Disabling Manual Cine Tick Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Configuring Manual Cine Tick Mark Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Disabling Cine Tools and Image Navigation in Full Screen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Configuring Region of Interest (ROI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Enabling Region of Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Configuring ROI Behavior for Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Configuring Mark Significant Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Configuring Image Overlay Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adding New Image Overlay Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Configuring Image Overlays for Unsupported Modalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Configuring Image Stepping for the Mammography Tile Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Configuring Attributes of the Image Count Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Configuring the Location of the Image Count Indicator when Viewing MG Images
in Essential Overlay Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Property for the Image Count Indicator for the MG ESSENTIAL Overlay . . . . 131
Property for the Image Count Indicator for the MG FULL Overlay . . . . . . . . . 132
Configuring the Font Size of the Image Count Indicator when Viewing MG Images
132
Configuring the ERMF Adjusted Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Configuring Presentation States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configuring the Presentation State Quick Save Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configuring Shutter Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Retrieving Pixel Spacing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Setting Presentation State Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Configuring the Saving of User-Calibrated Pixel Spacing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Preconfigured Rules for ERMF Adjustment of Mammography Images . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Property that Specifies the Number of ERMF Adjustment Rules Used . . . . . . . . . 136
Rule that Conditionally Applies ERMF Adjustment to MagView MG Images from GE
Senographe Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Rule that Conditionally Applies ERMF Adjustment to Non-GE MG Images . . . . . 137
Configuring Sound Clip Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Configuring the Case Insensitive Sorting Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Changing the Units in which to Display Reconstruction Diameter Value . . . . . . . . . . 138
Configuring F12 Behavior When Utilities Palette Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Configuring Showing Hidden Images When Presentation State Applied . . . . . . . . . . 139

2063534-001 Rev 2 9
 Configuring Image Grouping Preferences for Open Exams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Configuring Writing of PET Image Rescale Slope/Intercept Information . . . . . . . . . . 140
Platinum Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Additional Platinum Properties Related to 3.0.5.1 and Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Additional Platinum Properties Related to 3.0.5.3 and Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fixed Properties (effective 3.1.1.2 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Variable Properties (effective 3.1.1.2 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Additional Platinum Properties (effective 3.2 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Properties Controlling Image Orientation Marker Display for CR and DX Images
144
Properties Controlling the Characters Used for “No Image Orientation in DICOM
Header” for OT and SC Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Platinum Property Controlling the modalWaitDialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Property for Illegal Characters in DDP Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Property for Configuring the Autofilter Delay for the Worklist Table . . . . . . . . 146
Unsupported Platinum Property (effective 3.2 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Additional Platinum Properties (effective 3.2.2 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configuring Sending of Event Messages to a Third-Party Application (when
Generic Extends is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configuring the Amount of Image that Remains in the Viewport when Zooming or
Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Property for RA1000 with AW Server Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Additional Platinum Properties (Effective with Release 3.2.2.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Property Allowing Auto Saving of Comparison Exams when the Primary Exam is
Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Properties Allowing Control Over Shutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Property Controlling “always on top” Dialog Display Behavior for Third-Party Appli-
cations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
RA1000 with AW Server Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Optional Property for Configuring “Return to AWS” Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Configuring Workstation Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
New Images Notification While Viewing an Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Customizing the Arrangement of Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Rearranging the Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Mapping Function Buttons to Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Changing the Number of Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Enabling the Idle Time Out Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Reconfiguring the Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Unassigning a Shortcut Key for a Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Configuring the Relative Zoom Shortcut Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

2063534-001 Rev 2 10
 CAD Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Hiding the NO CAD Marker Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
CAD Markers in a Mammo Stepped Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Enabling the Repeat CAD Marker Navigation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Enabling the Show CAD Marker Navigation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Support for TE and PV Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Enabling the Process Type Indicator and “Missing” Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Controlling the Location of the Processing Type Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Handling Unavailable Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Non-GE Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Raw Images as a Fallback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Seno Advantage Keypad Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Connecting the Seno Advantage Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Controlling the Contrast and Brightness of the Keypad Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Configuring Archiving on Configurable Exam Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Enabling and Configuring Rejected Image Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuring Hardware Properties for Size Synchronization with Mixed Monitors . . . . 173
Migrating to and Configuring PACS Sites with RIS-IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Migrating RIS Data to RIS-IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Configuring PACS Sites with RIS and RIS-IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Configuring the Association Worklist Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configuring the Availability of Stack Sync Options on the Utilities Palette . . . . . . . . . 179
Configuring Server Selection for the Utilities Palette Exam Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Default Configuration (no action necessary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Non-Standard Configuration for Server Selection for Utilities Palette Exam Manager
181
Enabling the NBSS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Configuring PACS for NBSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Configuring the Overall Mode for Displaying Out of Date MG Image Information
Pop-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Configuring the Delay after Mouse Hover before the Information Pop-up Displays
183
Configuring the Size and Position of the Image Out of Date Message . . . . . . 184
Property for the Image Out of Date Overlay for MG ESSENTIAL Overlay . . . 184
Property for the Image Out of Date Overlay for MG FULL Overlay . . . . . . . . . 184
CLIWrapper Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Configuring the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Configuring the Navigator Auto-Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
defaultLaunchOn1stPinnedMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
defaultLaunchOnCMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

2063534-001 Rev 2 11
 Configuring the Double-right Click Display Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuring the Navigator Default Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuring the Default Size of Navigator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuring the Default Values for the Navigator User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Changing the Default Monitor Region Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Showing or Hiding the Dynamic Image Grouping Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Configuring the Navigator to Receive New Image Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Precision Reporting Properties (Informational Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Property for IDR Simplified Design (informational only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Property for ICAPI Worklist Selection (informational only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration 193

Installing the Accession Number Dialer Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
System Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Connecting a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Installing Accession Number Dialer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Configuring the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Disabling Dial Tone Recognition for the Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Troubleshooting Dial Tone Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Testing the Dictation Accession Number Dialer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Testing Modem Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Testing Software Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Disabling Dial Tone Recognition for the Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Testing the Dictation Accession Number Dialer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Testing Modem Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Testing Software Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Integrating the Lanier Dictation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Integrating the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Installing the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Configuring the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Testing Software Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Integrating the Dictation System with XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Integrating the Dictation System with the XML File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
End User Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Connecting a Microphone to the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation 210

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

2063534-001 Rev 2 12
 Integrating Dragon with Centricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Creating a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Training a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Adapting to your Writing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Configuring the VCD Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Adding New Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Using the Dragon Command Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Exporting Commands into a Deployable Format (.xml or .dat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Importing Commands from a Deployable Format (.xml or .dat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Dragon Deployment with Centricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Activating Dragon SR Engine with Centricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Roaming Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Implemented Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Using the VCD Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Chapter 16 Language Configuration 219

Workstation Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring International Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Configuring the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Configuring Language Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Setting Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Setting the System Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Configuring Right-Justified Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Chapter 17 Memory Configuration 224

Configuring Hardware Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Installing Additional RAM on a Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Installing the Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Configuring Operating System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Configuring Virtual Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Configuring Windows to Support 3GB User Address Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Configuring AWE Image Cache for Windows with >2GB of RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Configuring the Workstation to Support Image Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Important Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Configuring Workstation Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Changing the Java Object Heap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Overriding the default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Changing Image Buffer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

2063534-001 Rev 2 13
 Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration 231
Enabling SPINE Authentication on the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Configuring SPINE Authentication on Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Using SPINE Authentication on the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configuring a Persistent Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
For Frame Relay Connection to the ROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
For VPN Connection to the ROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Using TimbuktuPro with a Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Installing TimbuktuPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Installing TimbuktuPro with the Ghost CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Installing TimbuktuPro with the Workstation Tools CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Configuring TimbuktuPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Using TimbuktuPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Starting and Stopping TimbuktuPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Opening and Closing the TimbuktuPro Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
TimbuktuPro Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Connecting to Remote Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Creating Registered Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Creating the Same User on Multiple Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Pre-configured Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Allowing External Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Chapter 19 Centricity Exam Manager Configuration 243

Patient Merge and Exam Merge Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Enabling a Link to Web-Based CEM to Appear in the Utilities Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Launching Web-Based CEM from the Utilities Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Chapter 20 Workstation Security Configuration 245

Configuring Workstation in Secure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Configuring for SSL Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Configuring Workstation in Non-Secure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Configuring for SSL Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Working with Security Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance 249

Saving System Information to Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Saving the System Information to Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Restoring System Information Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Restoring Application Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

2063534-001 Rev 2 14
 Removing the Centricity Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Removing the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Removing CommServer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Removing the CommServer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Configuring Auto-Reboot in Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Configuring Auto-Reboot in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Removing Old Exam Locks from the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Using the Default Display Protocol Push Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Verifying the DDPuser Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Creating a ddpadmin User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Creating a Desktop Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
User Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Push DDP(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Export DDP(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Copy DDP(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Delete DDP(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Validate DDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Clean Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Tools Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Launching the Tools Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Using The Tools Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Pull-down Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
String Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Properties Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Setting a Site-wide Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Configuring the IMS Server Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Changing the Desktop Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Applying OS Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Mammography Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting 271

Troubleshooting Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Monitoring Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Network Transfer Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Setting the Detail Level of the Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Setting the Level of Message Output to the Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Applications Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

2063534-001 Rev 2 15
 Display Commserver Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
GUI-Based Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Command Line-Based Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Web-Based Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Error Starting CommServer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Resetting Firmware to Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Displaying Workstation Application Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Displaying Application Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
GUI Based Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Command Line Based Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Workstation Version Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Third-Party Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Cerner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Dragon Naturally Speaking Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Dragon Shifting the Workstation Application to the Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Dragon Buffer Filling up While Voice Uttering Continues in the Background . 282
Dictation Tool not Recognizing Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
AW Server Integration Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
AWS Client Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Chapter 23 Functional Checks 285

Auditing the Workstation Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Workstation Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Workstation Software Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Workstation Support Software Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Workstation High Resolution Display Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Image Buffer Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Verifying/Modifying Additional Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Verifying if the "JAVAW" Program Priority is Set to High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Verifying Virtual Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Appendix A Advanced Security Configuration 289

Enabling OS Hardening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Providing Folder Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
User Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Appendix B Enabling NTP on the Workstation 292

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Enabling NTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

2063534-001 Rev 2 16
 Appendix C Extends Installation 294
AW Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Installing the Extend AW Suite Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Loading the Extend AW Suite Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Installing the Volume Viewer Plus Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Loading Volume Viewer Plus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Installing AW Suite Software Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Installing the License Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Installing License Servers on Multiple IMSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Changing Optional Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Running Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Running Configuration Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Testing Image Subset Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Testing Unverify Exam State with DAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
AW Server Client Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Troubleshooting AWS Client Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Invalid Certificate window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Display Error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Extends IDX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Installing IDX Integration Vendor Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
IDX Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
HIPAA Password Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Password Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Extends Cerner Radnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Extends OrthoView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Installing Extend OrthoView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Installing OrthoView Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Registering OrthoView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
E-Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Extends PowerScribe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Extend Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Talk Technology Integration Vendor Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
HIPAA Password Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Configuring Desktop Fonts For Talk Technology TalkStation User Interface . . 307
Creating geservice User on TalkStation Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
“C” Workstation Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Extends IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

2063534-001 Rev 2 17
 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Completing the IDR Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
General Extends Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Unbound Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Multiple Extends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Removing General Extends Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Updating General Extends Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
EITestClient.exe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
isExtendPresent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Centricity Application Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Multiple Extends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
"Unknown Error" Occurred During Setup Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Appendix D Configuring a Performance Monitoring Workstation 315

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Using Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Performance Monitoring Solution for LSP Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Performance Monitoring User Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Transaction Types Logged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Appendix E Windows 7 Support 321

Hardware and Software Requirements for Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Overview: Converting from Windows XP to Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Windows and RA1000 Upgrade, During Servers Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Windows Upgrade and RA1000 Workstation Upgrade, if Servers are not PACS 4.0 . 323
Windows Upgrade and RA1000 Workstation Upgrade, if Servers are PACS 4.0 . . . . 324
Windows Upgrade for RA1000 4.0, if Servers are not PACS 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Windows Upgrade, if RA1000 Workstation and Servers are PACS 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Appendix F Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0 328

Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

2063534-001 Rev 2 18
g GE Healthcare

Introduction

This section contains the following chapters:

 Chapter 1 About this Manual

 Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Scenarios

 Chapter 3 Introduction
Chapter 1 About this Manual

This chapter includes:

Section 1: About the Centricity Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Section 2: Contacting GE Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Section 3: Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Section 4: Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Section 5: Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Section 6: Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Section 1: About the Centricity* Workstation

This manual describes the installation, configuration, and maintenance procedures for the
Centricity Workstation.

For information on the entire Centricity PACS system, see the Centricity PACS System
Overview Manual.

This manual is intended for Service Engineers for advanced configuration, maintenance,
and troubleshooting of Centricity PACS 4.0 and its subsystems.

Section 2: Contacting GE Support

2-1: Contacting the ROC

Table 1-1 Lists the contact information for the ROC (Remote Online Center).

Table 1-1: Online Center Contact Information

OLC/USA OLC/Europe OLD/ANZ

1-800-321-7937 (US/Canada) +33 (0) 30 831300 61-2-316-3700

1-262-524-5300 (elsewhere)

*Trademark of General Electric Co.

2063534-001 Rev 2 20
Chapter 1 About this Manual

2-2: Applications Support and Service Support (Asia Regions)

To request applications support or service support for the Asia regions, refer to the
following phone numbers.

Table 1-2: Applications Support and Service Support (Asia Regions)

Country Support Phone Number

Australia 1800659465

China 8008108188

Hong Kong 21006288

India 1800114567

Japan 0120055919

Korea 15446119

Malaysia 1800883911

New Zealand 0800659465

Singapore 63880932

Taiwan 0800021770

2-3: Applications Support Using iCenter, Applications Answerline,

Customer Center

To request applications support, English-speaking customers may open a support request

in GE Healthcare iCenter. Other customers should contact their GE Field Engineers or
support personnel.

With GE Healthcare iCenter™, customers can:

 Initiate requests for service and applications support from the web.

 Get rapid, online access to the Remote Operation Center (ROC) where expert service
engineers review and respond to service requests quickly.

 View status of open service requests.

 View service history and reports about your systems, including uptime, remote fix and
service call trends, and other service delivery metrics.

If you do not have access to iCenter, contact your Director of Service or Service Engineer
to open an iCenter account. English-speaking customers can also use the following
resources:

 GE PACS Applications Answerline 1 (800) 682-5327, Option 8 (available for US and

Canadian customers)

2063534-001 Rev 2 21
Chapter 1 About this Manual

 [email protected]

 GE Healthcare Centricity PACS Customer Center (http://supportcentral.ge.com and

select GE Healthcare - Global Centricity PACS Customer Center). Use this web portal
to access documents, FAQs, exchange documents, and participate in forums with
other GE PACS customers.

To register for access to this resource, complete the Support Central Community
Subscriber Application.

2-4: Contact Information for GE Healthcare Offices

Addresses and phone numbers for GE Healthcare offices are listed below.

Corporate Headquarters

GE Healthcare
540 W Northwest Highway
Barrington, IL 60010 USA
Tel: +1 847 277-5000 or +1 800-437-1171 or +1 800-682-5327
Fax: +1 847 277-5240

Authorized European Representative

GE Medical Systems SCS

283 rue de la Minière
78530 BUC, France

Asia Headquarters

GE Healthcare
1 BLD-3F
No. 1 Hua Tuo Road, Zhang Jiang Hi-Tech Park
Shanghai 201203 China
Tel: 8621-38777888
Fax: 8621-38777499

Section 3: Documentation Conventions

3-1: Text

Table 1-3 lists the text conventions used in this manual.

2063534-001 Rev 2 22
Chapter 1 About this Manual

Table 1-3: Text Convention Descriptions

Convention Description

Text represented as a screen This typeface represents displays that appear on

display. your terminal screen, for example:

lom>

Text represented as menu or sub- This typeface represents all menu and sub-menu
menu names. names in procedures, for example:
On the File menu, click New.

3-2: Screen Captures

The example screens in this manual may not represent what you see on your monitor; use
them only as guidelines.

Section 4: Safety

For safety information regarding Centricity PACS, refer to the Centricity PACS RA1000
Workstation and Exam Manager Operator Manual and the Centricity PACS Servers
Service Manual.

Warning: Information about MediCal Pro software appears in this manual for sites using
MediCal Pro with certain models of Barco monitors.

If your monitor is a Barco monitor, refer to the Barco document, “Quality

Assurance Solutions for Barco Displays” to determine if MediCal Pro is the
correct product to use with your monitor hardware and the clinical application
for which the monitor is to be used. This Barco document can be found at the
following URL:

ftp://GEHealth:[email protected]

For all other models of monitors, directly consult the OEM for your monitor to
determine the correct procedures, software, and documentation to use with
your monitor.

2063534-001 Rev 2 23
Chapter 1 About this Manual

Section 5: Acronyms and Abbreviations

Table 1-4 lists and defines the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.

Table 1-4: Acronyms and Abbreviations used in this Manual

Term Definition

AE Application Entity

AWE Address Window Extension

CAT Centricity Administration Tool

CDPs Conference Display Protocols

CDPS Centricity DICOM Print Server

CIFS Common Internet File System

CWS Centricity Workstation

DAS DICOM Application Server

DDP Default Display Protocol

DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine

DPMS Display Power Management Systems

DSN Database Source Name

DTD Document Type Definition

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

ESD Electrostatic Discharge

FMI Field Modification Instruction

GSPS Gray Scale Presentation State

HIPAA Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act

HIS Hospital Information System

IO Intra-Oral Modality Image Support

IMS Information Management System

ISU Information Storage Unit

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LSP Local Service Provider

2063534-001 Rev 2 24
Chapter 1 About this Manual

Table 1-4: Acronyms and Abbreviations used in this Manual (Continued)

Term Definition

LUT Look Up Table

MRN Medical Record Number

NTP Network Time Protocol

OSD On-Screen Display

PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect

PMS Performance Monitoring Solution

ROC Remote Online Center

ROI Region of Interest

RIS Radiology Information System

SCP Service Class Provider

SCU Service Class User

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers

SR Speech Recognition

SSL Secure Socket Layer

VCD Voice Command and Dictate

VIP Virtual IP

VPN Virtual Private Network

Section 6: Revision History

Table 1-5: Revision History

Revision Date Reason For Change Author

1 April 2012 Initial release for Centricity PACS 4.0 Don Frankel

2 June 2012 Clarified “PACS Only mode” and “Centricity Claudia Brandon
RIS mode” when installing the workstation
application.

2063534-001 Rev 2 25
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Scenarios

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Installing a Workstation from the Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Section 2: Installing Workstation On Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Note: If you are installing Centricity Workstation by downloading the files from the web, See
“Installing and Configuring Web Download” on page 270.

Section 1: Installing a Workstation from the Factory

This section includes the procedure for completing the Centricity 4.0 Workstation
installation, where the workstation is configured as per the factory settings and the
operating system software is installed.

To install and setup a workstation from the factory:

 “Gather Site Data” on page 35

 “Connecting the Workstation Equipment” on page 44

 “Connecting Monitors” on page 44

 “Configuring Network Connections” on page 48

 “Installing Barco MediCal Pro Calibration Software” on page 105

 “Monitor Configuration for Mixed Monitor Systems” on page 57 (Optional)

 “Installing the Workstation Application Software” on page 50

 “Enabling NTP on the Workstation” on page 292 (Optional)

 “Verifying Configuration” on page 61

 “Customer Turnover” on page 65

Section 2: Installing Workstation On Site

This section includes the order for completing the Centricity 4.0 Workstation installation.

Use this section if you are reconfiguring or upgrading the workstation.

To install and set up a workstation on site:

 “Gather Site Data” on page 35

 “Connecting the Workstation Equipment” on page 44

2063534-001 Rev 2 26
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Scenarios

 “Connecting Monitors” on page 44

 Installing the Operating System:

 “Installing the Windows Operating System” on page 47

 “Configuring Network Connections” on page 48

 “Configuring Video Drivers” on page 49

 “Installing Barco MediCal Pro Calibration Software” on page 105

 “Monitor Configuration for Mixed Monitor Systems” on page 57 (Optional)

 “Installing the Workstation Application Software” on page 50

 “Enabling NTP on the Workstation” on page 292 (Optional)

 “Verifying Configuration” on page 61

 “Customer Turnover” on page 65

2063534-001 Rev 2 27
Chapter 3 Introduction

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Centricity Workstation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Section 2: Workstation Standard Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Section 3: Hardware Requirements for RA1000 Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Section 4: Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

The Centricity Workstation is part of a family of scalable1 high performance, radiology

reading review products.

Section 1: Centricity Workstation Types

The Centricity Workstation allows the user to access new and historical exams and
reports. The workstation has a local cache option that allows the user to download images
from a server to their remote workstation and read the images offline. For more
information on remote workstation operation, refer the workstation online help.

There are three types of workstations:

 Radiologists

 Technologists

 Clinicians

1-1: Radiologist Workstation

Radiologist Workstation contains all the functions of the Centricity Workstation including
controlling user privileges. Refer to Table 3-1 on page 29 for more information.

1-2: Technologist Workstation

Technologist Workstation contains all the functions of the Centricity Workstation. However,
the Technologist Workstation supports only the 1C (1280 x 1024) monitor configuration.
Refer to Table 3-1 on page 29 for more information.

1-3: Clinician Workstation

Clinician Workstation has been simplified for easy use by clinicians. The Clinical view of
RA1000 is the same application and Graphic User Interface (GUI) as the other
workstations, but it contains only the functionality that is commonly used by clinicians.

Table 3-1 is a summary of the differences between the different types of workstations.

1. Scalable = refers to the total number of devices that can be connected to the workstation.

2063534-001 Rev 2 28
Chapter 3 Introduction

Table 3-1: Workstation Feature Comparison

Feature Radiologist Technologist Clinician

Workstation Workstation Workstation

Supported Monitors 1, 2, and 4 1 1, 2, and 4

(Excluding mixed
monitors)

Monitor Resolution 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024

1200 x 1600 1200 x 1600
1536 x 2048 1536 x 2048
1600 x 900 1600 x 900
1728 x 2304 1728 x 2304
2048 x 2560 2048 x 2560

Tools All standard tools All standard tools All standard tools

Printing CDPS CDPS No printing of film via CDPS (image

export enables local print)

Reporting View, print, dictate, edit, View, print, dictate, edit, View and print only.
approve, status change, approve, status change,
save, close, and next save, close, and next

Default Display Yes Yes No DDP creation, only use of pre-

Protocol (DDP) configured (GE pre-set or site-wide)

Save changes Yes Yes Yes

Worklists No restrictions No restrictions No worklist selector - drop down menu

populated with all worklists that user has
privilege to see - then the user can
program buttons.

Exam Status Verify, unverify, and Verify, unverify, and No exam status feature capabilities. This
mark dictated mark dictated workstation allows the viewing of the
capabilities capabilities exam status, but cannot make
modifications to it.

E-mail and export Yes Yes Yes

image support

Work modes Ability to configure Ability to configure All menus and toolbars displayed
toolbars and display. toolbars and display. permanently

Tool Palette Mode Docked or Undocked Docked or Undocked Docked only

Utilities Access to all utilities Access to all utilities Access to all utilities

All workstation types have the following utilities:

 Change password

 Image display order

2063534-001 Rev 2 29
Chapter 3 Introduction

 Cross reference settings

 Significant image settings

 Cobb angle

 Image grouping

 Cine options

 Magic glass settings

 Font Control

 Window Level (W/L) options

 W/L presets

 W/L decision path

 Tool Preference

Section 2: Workstation Standard Configuration

The standard Centricity Workstation configuration consists of:

 A computer, mouse, keyboard, and associated cabling.

 One of the following combinations of high resolution diagnostic portrait monitors (A+,
A, B+ or B models) and/or clinical landscape monitors (C models):

 Two portrait monitors, plus one or two landscape monitors

 Four portrait monitors, plus one or two landscape monitors

 One or two landscape monitors

 A color service monitor for specialized maintenance tasks.

See “Supported Monitor Configurations” on page 57 for a detailed list of supported monitor
configurations.

2-1: Software Support

The Centricity PACS 4.0 Workstation uses the following software:

 Operating system:

 Windows XP Professional, either 32-bit or 64-bit

 Windows 7 Ultimate

2063534-001 Rev 2 30
Chapter 3 Introduction

Note: Windows Vista is not supported.

 Internet Explorer 6, 7, or 8

 Java runtime environment version jre1.6.0_20

To use Centricity Workstation with Windows XP, you must have administrator privileges.

Section 3: Hardware Requirements for RA1000 Workstation

3-1: Recommended Hardware Requirements

The Centricity PACS RA1000 workstation hardware must meet the recommended
requirements listed in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2: Recommended Hardware Requirements for RA1000 Workstation

CPU Type CPU Cores Disk Space RAM

x86-64 2 74 GB 3 GB

3-2: Minimum Hardware Requirements

The Centricity PACS RA1000 workstation hardware must meet the minimum requirements
listed in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3: Minimum Hardware Requirements for RA1000 Workstation

CPU Type CPU Cores Disk Space RAM

x86 2 74 GB 1 GB

3-3: Minimum System Requirements

The PACS 4.0 workstation requires at least:

 A dual-core processor running at 2GHz

 1 GB of RAM

 Gigabit ethernet

Recommended workstation hardware includes at least:

 A quad-core processor running at 2.5GHz

 2 GB of RAM

 Gigabit ethernet

2063534-001 Rev 2 31
Chapter 3 Introduction

If the system will be running a RIS-IC/PACS integrated workstation, then it requires at

least:

 A dual-core processor running at 2.66GHz

 1 GB of RAM

 Gigabit ethernet

 One color monitor

If the system will be running a RIS-IC/PACS integrated workstation with Extends, then it
requires at least:

 Two dual-core processors running at 2.66GHz

 2 GB of RAM

 Gigabit ethernet

 One color monitor

PACS 4.0 supports the following workstations:

 Dell 490

 Dell T5400

 Dell T5500

 HP xw6200

 HP xw6400

 HP xw6600

 HP xw8200

 HP Z400

 HP Z600

3-4: Monitor Configurations

The RA1000 workstation supports LCD monitors.

Refer to the manufacturers’ documentation for information on monitor configuration.

3-5: Service Monitor

The service monitor is used to run diagnostic tests on the A+, B+, and B model
workstations. The service monitor is a color monitor with at least 1024x768 resolution.

2063534-001 Rev 2 32
Chapter 3 Introduction

Note: You can use a C monitor connected to your workstation as a temporary service
monitor, if you follow the above specifications.

Section 4: Safety Precautions

System Alert: When removing and replacing circuit cards, be sure to use the recommended
wrist-grounding strap to eliminate static electricity from destroying components.

Warning: To ensure proper operation, the maximum magnetic field allowable for installing
the Centricity Workstation is 1 gauss.

Warning: Do not place this equipment in a patient care area.

2063534-001 Rev 2 33
g GE Healthcare

Installation and Initial Configuration

This section contains the following chapters:

 Chapter 4 Gather Site Data

 Chapter 5 Installing Video Cards

 Chapter 6 Connecting the Workstation Equipment

 Chapter 7 Installing the Operating System

 Chapter 8 Configuring Video Drivers

 Chapter 9 Installing the Workstation Application Software

 Chapter 10 Monitor Configuration for Mixed Monitor Systems

 Chapter 11 Verifying Configuration

 Chapter 12 Customer Turnover

Chapter 4 Gather Site Data

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Completing Data Sheet Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Section 2: Required Data Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Section 3: Workstation Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Section 4: Example Site Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

This chapter aids you in determining what customer site specific data is necessary to
configure the Centricity Workstation.

Section 1: Completing Data Sheet Information

Complete Section 3: Workstation Installation Worksheet and Section 4: Example Site Data
Sheet, and leave it attached in the site’s installation manual. Update these forms for each
new option or software release installation.

Note: Photocopy the forms for use on all workstations as required.

Section 2: Required Data Definitions

A blank and an example site data sheet are at the end of this chapter. Complete a site
data sheet as per the example site data sheet.

Table 4-1: Required Workstation Data

Required Information Answers To OS Configuration Questions

Hostname Operator configurable - Normally supplied by the network administrator. Limit

this to 10 characters.

IP Address As supplied - Normally supplied by the network administrator.

Subnet mask (netmask) As supplied - Normally supplied by the network administrator.

Default Gateway As supplied - Normally supplied by the network administrator.

IMS IP Address As supplied - Normally supplied by the network administrator.

Time zone Select as applicable - Double-click on task bar clock to change settings.

Date and time Select as applicable - Double-click on task bar clock to change settings.

Root Password As set by GE Field Service.

2063534-001 Rev 2 35
Chapter 4 Gather Site Data

Note: ‘Unless the site is on Virtual Private Network(VPN), please collect the following
information for the Insite2 agent to communicate with GE Insite2 backend server: In
case the site has VPN connection to ROC, use 150.2.1.251 as proxy server, 8002 as
port number, and no authentication.

 Proxy Server IP

 Proxy Server Port

 Proxy Server Authentication Username (if applicable)

 Proxy Server Authentication Password (If applicable)

Section 3: Workstation Installation Worksheet

Table 4-2: Workstation Installation Sheet

Component Input

Machine Type Intel CPU

Serial Number

System ID

Internet Address

Netmask: (subnet)

Root Password

Hospital Name

User’s Interface Language

Application Support Telephone

Miscellaneous:

Initial Software Revision

Software Upgrade Revision

Miscellaneous:

Software Upgrade Revision

Miscellaneous:

Software Upgrade Revision

Miscellaneous:

2063534-001 Rev 2 36
Chapter 4 Gather Site Data

Table 4-2: Workstation Installation Sheet (Continued)

Component Input

Software Upgrade Revision

Miscellaneous:

Software Upgrade Revision

Miscellaneous:

Software Upgrade Revision

Miscellaneous:

Software Upgrade Revision

Miscellaneous:

Software Upgrade Revision

Miscellaneous:

2063534-001 Rev 2 37
Chapter 4 Gather Site Data

Section 4: Example Site Data Sheet

Hospital Name: Phone: ___- F.D.O.:____-______

___-____
Your Name: Phone: ___- Ext.: ____ Aspen:
___-____ _____
Hospital Network Administrator: Phone: ___- InSite Mdm Ph: ___-___-
___-____ ____
***Complete a separate sheet for each workstation on the FDO ***
Workstation configuration Example Definition
information:
Station location View Room Description/local identifier/room number for
2106 this system
Hostname SCD132 Hostname: (Maximum of 10 letters &
numbers)
Workgroup geworkgroup Do Not
Change
IP Address 10.28.75.132 Internet (IP) address: Assigned unique
number that identifies this station in a
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.2 Netmask: A number used by software to
(Netmask) 52 identify the subnet field of a network
Default Route 10.28.75.3 Default route: a route (IP address) that is
used to communicate to a unknown subset.
IMS IP Address 10.28.75.100 Internet (IP) address: Assigned unique
number that identifies the IMS server in a
This station Options. (Required on a multi-station FDO): Passwords

Display Type A+,A,B,C Administrator CANal1

Password:
Number Of 1,2,4 iis Password: iis
Monitors
Proxy Server IP 150.2.1.251 Proxy Server 8002
Port
Proxy Server Proxy Server
Authentication Authentication
Username Password

2063534-001 Rev 2 38
Chapter 5 Installing Video Cards

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Installing Graphics Controllers in HP Z600 and Z400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Section 2: Installing the 5MP2FH Graphics Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Use the manufacturer’s documentation to install and configure the various video drivers
for the workstation.

System Alert: Follow the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) procedures and cautions. Also, follow
the steps to remove all cables and the power cord before removing the side cover.

Section 1: Installing Graphics Controllers in HP Z600 and Z400

HP Z600 and Z400 workstations may use a variety of graphics controllers for diagnostic
monitors. This is a PCIe card that will be installed in a PCI-E x16 slot.

 If the system uses only one diagnostic monitor video card, the clinical monitor video
card can stay in its original slot 2 (PCIe x16), and the diagnostic monitor video card
can be installed in slot 4 (PCIe x16).

 If the system uses two diagnostic monitor video cards, the clinical monitor video card
can be moved to slot 1 or 3 (PCIe x8) and two diagnostic monitor video cards can be
installed slots 2 and 4 (PCIe x16).

Illustration 5-1:Example of placement of video card in a PCIe x16 slot

2063534-001 Rev 2 39
Chapter 5 Installing Video Cards

Illustration 5-2:Example of placement of video card in a PCIe x8 slot

Note that slots 1 and 3 are open on the ends, and a video card with a connector that is
longer than the slot will still fit in the slot, as shown in Illustration 5-2. The video card will
still work correctly.

Illustration 5-3 shows the layout of expansion card slots on both the Z600 and the Z400,
and <cross reference>Table 5-1 shows options for installing video cards.

Illustration 5-3:Diagram of expansion card slots in HP Z600 and Z400

2063534-001 Rev 2 40
Chapter 5 Installing Video Cards

Table 5-1: Expansion card slots in the HP Z600 or Z400

Slot Type One diagnostic Two diagnostic Two diagnostic

video card video cards, no video cards with
mammo card mammo card

1 PCIe2 - x8(4) Clinical monitor Clinical monitor video

video carda card

2b PCIe2 - x16 Clinical monitor Diagnostic monitor Diagnostic monitor

video card video card video card

3 PCIe - x8(4) Mammo card Clinical monitor Mammo card

open-ended (optional) video carda

4c PCIe2 - x16 Diagnostic monitor Diagnostic monitor Diagnostic monitor

video card video card video card

5 PCI 32/33

6 PCI 32/33

a. The clinical monitor video card can be used in slot 1 or slot 3.

b. This is the primary graphics slot.
c. This is the secondary graphics slot.

In all cases, VGA is disabled, with jumper J-1 set to the bottom two pins, as shown in
Illustration 5-4.

Illustration 5-4:Video card jumper settings to disable VGA

Refer to the HP Z600 Workstation Maintenance and Service Guide or HP Z400

Workstation Maintenance and Service Guide for more details.

2063534-001 Rev 2 41
Chapter 5 Installing Video Cards

Section 2: Installing the 5MP2FH Graphics Controller

Use this procedure to install the 5MP2FH graphics controller card for the B+ Flat panel
monitors.

Before installing the board(s) in the workstation, take a few minutes to familiarize yourself
with both the board and the video card slots in the workstation.

There are four switches located at SW 1 on the card. Table 5-2 on page 42 lists their
locations and briefly describes their functions and default states.

Table 5-2: 5MP2FH Switch Functions

Switch Function

VGA EN Enables VGA on the Primary Head (default is ON)

BIOS EN Allows the system BIOS to read the Video BIOS (default is ON)

NORMAL Controls Board State (default is ON)

INT CLK Internal Clock (default is ON)

The switches are in the ON position when the white slider switch is positioned towards the
top of the board

 Verify that all equipment is powered off.

Check the settings on the VGA switches on the graphics board. If installing two
boards, the second board should have VGA EN and BIOS EN set to OFF. The first
board should always have VGA EN and BIOS EN set to ON.

System Alert: The components used in the workstation are static sensitive; observe static
precautions when performing this procedure.

To install graphics controller card in the B+ flat panel monitors:

1. Turn off power to the workstation and disconnect the power cord.

2. Remove the chassis cover according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Install the first card in the third slot from the bottom.

4. Install the second card in the bottom slot.

5. Secure the card to the chassis with the mounting screw.

6. Replace the chassis cover.

7. Connect the primary display (left most display in linear configuration, top most in a
vertical configuration) to the uppermost connector on the card (the output farthest
from the motherboard - VID 1) using the provided DVI cable.

8. Connect the secondary display to the other connector on the board in the same
manner used for the primary display.

2063534-001 Rev 2 42
Chapter 5 Installing Video Cards

9. Reconnect the power cord.

10. Turn on the power to the workstation.

11. Restart the system.

2063534-001 Rev 2 43
Chapter 6 Connecting the Workstation Equipment

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Section 2: Microphone Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Section 3: Connecting Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

System Alert: Follow the ESD procedures and cautions.

Warning: To ensure proper operation, the maximum magnetic field allowable for installing
the Centricity Workstation is 1 gauss.

Section 1: Requirements

Prepare the site for installation of the workstation. Refer to the Centricity Servers
Installation and Upgrade Manual for detailed information.

 Appropriate line voltage, line frequency, and power supply line cords.

 Ethernet connection.

 Appropriate furniture for the workstation (i.e., desk, chair, etc.).

 Manufacturers’ documentation for the workstation hardware and any accessories.

Set up the hardware according to the manufacturers’ instructions.

Section 2: Microphone Connections

Connect the microphone to the computer housing. For microphone specifications refer
“Microphone Specifications” on page 209.

Note: If your site uses the Voice Commands feature that works with bookmarks, you need to
connect a microphone to the workstation.

Section 3: Connecting Monitors

Connect the monitors as shown in appropriate cabling illustrations in the following

sections.

3-1: Connecting Two B and 1 C Monitor

Note: You must connect the color monitor as the primary (left-most) monitor.

2063534-001 Rev 2 44
Chapter 6 Connecting the Workstation Equipment

Illustration 6-1:Two B and 1 C Monitor Connections

3-2: Connecting Four B and One C Monitors

Note: You must connect the color monitor as the primary (left-most) monitor.

For additional information on how to adjust contrast, brightness, clock, and phase, refer to
the unit User’s Manual.

3-2-1: NEC Display 2080UX

 DVI-I Connector supports digital and analog (VGA).

 DVI-D Connector supports digital ONLY.

 Verify that NEC display is set to:

 DVI Selection = Analog

 Video Input = 1 DVI Analog

 Video card switch settings:

 1st card in slot 4 = All ON

 2nd card in slot 5 = 1-2=OFF and 3-4 ON

2063534-001 Rev 2 45
Chapter 6 Connecting the Workstation Equipment

 To rotate the NEC 2080UX display, for portrait mode of 1200x1600@60Hz:

1. Right click on Desktop.

2. Select Properties > Settings > Advanced.

3. Select Quadro4 200/400 NVS tab.

4. Select NVRotate > Portrait (90 degree rotation).

Illustration 6-2:Four B and One C Monitors Connections

2063534-001 Rev 2 46
Chapter 7 Installing the Operating System

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Installing the Windows Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Section 2: Configuring Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Section 3: Activating Windows With Microsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Note: The use of third-party applications simultaneously with the workstation software
affects the available resource for all applications. If you are working with large image
sets, there will be a memory conflict, which slows system response.

Note: Load only approved third-party software on the workstation platform. Loading non-
approved third-party software on the workstation can cause system degradation.

Section 1: Installing the Windows Operating System

Refer to the Microsoft documentation for details on how to install the operating system.

http://windows.microsoft.com/en-US/windows/help

Note: During the installation use CANal1, the Administrator password, if the new
password fields are blank.

When it reboots, log on to the workstation as Administrator.

Note: Windows XP SP2 ghost has popup blocker enabled. With this enabled, users cannot
log on to CAT. To disable the popup blocker, open Internet Explorer and click Tools >
Popup Blocker > Turn Off Pop up Blocker.

1-1: Disabling File and Printer Sharing

To disable file and printer sharing:

1. Right-click on My Network Places located on the desktop and choose Properties.

2. Click on the entry for the LAN card and choose Properties.

3. Uncheck the option for File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks.

4. Click OK.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each LAN card installed.

6. Click OK to close the My Network Places console.

2063534-001 Rev 2 47
Chapter 7 Installing the Operating System

Section 2: Configuring Network Connections

To configure the network connections:

1. Set up TCP/IP connections.

a. On the Control Panel, open Network and Dial Up Connections.

b. Open the TCP/IP Properties and change the following according to your site’s
configuration:

 IP Address

 Subnet Mask

 Default Gateway

2. Configure the hostname.

a. On the Control Panel, open the System folder.

b. On the Network Identification tab, click Properties and change the computer
name according to your site’s specifications.

3. Verify the date, time, and time zone settings on your workstation.

4. OPTIONAL: If you are using a language other than English, set the language and
locale for your system.

Note: Refer to the “Configuring Language Settings” on page 221 for additional
information on setting language and locales.

5. Reboot the workstation.

To continue with the installation and configuration, refer to “Installation and Setup
Scenarios” on page 26.

Section 3: Activating Windows With Microsoft

Failure to activate Windows will make the workstation unusable after 30 days from
installation date. Users will not be able to log on to the OS until activation is performed.
For details, go to http://windows.microsoft.com/en-US/windows/help

2063534-001 Rev 2 48
Chapter 8 Configuring Video Drivers

Use the manufacturer’s documentation to install and configure the various video drivers
for the workstation.

Note: If you received the Centricity Workstation from the factory, your video drivers are
preinstalled.

Refer to “Monitor Configurations” on page 32 for additional configuration information.

2063534-001 Rev 2 49
Chapter 9 Installing the Workstation Application Software

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Installing the Workstation License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Section 2: Installing a Feature License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Section 3: Installing the Workstation Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Section 4: Configuring the Workstation in the IMS Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Section 5: Installing the Workstation Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Note: Centricity Workstation versions 4.0 and later use the Windows XP and Windows 7
operating systems. Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows Vista are not
supported.

Note: Refer to Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance for the procedures on uninstalling
the Workstation application.

Section 1: Installing the Workstation License

Note: Install the license once for each site before installing any Centricity Workstation
Application.

1. Insert the Centricity Workstation License media in the Workstation or any PC that is
on the LAN with the ISU, with the JDK (Java Development Kit) installed.

2. Open the \start_license_installer.bat file.

Result: A screen displays.

3. Enter database URL, username and password. The database URL looks like:
a.b.c.d:20000/ims

4. Click Install License and select the license file.

The license is installed on the database you entered.

Note: If you are using this procedure to install a Mammography Workflow license, the
Mammography Workflow feature must also be enabled and configured. See the
Workstation Feature Configuration chapter in the Workstation Service Manual.

1-1: Troubleshooting

 If the program does not start, check if the JAVA_HOME is defined.

 Also verify %JAVA_HOME%\bin\java.exe exists.To set JAVA_HOME enter:

2063534-001 Rev 2 50
Chapter 9 Installing the Workstation Application Software

Set JAVA_HOME=path to jre home

Example: If C:\jre is the jre home then command is:

Set JAVA_HOME=c:\jre

Section 2: Installing a Feature License

2-1: Mammography Workflow Feature

If you are installing the mammography workflow feature, refer to “Installing the Workstation
License” on page 50. The procedure for installing a feature license is the same as
installing the Workstation license.

The license type of ‘MWFF’ refers to the mammography workflow feature.

Note: After installing a Mammography Workflow license, the Mammography Workflow

feature must be enabled and configured. See “Enabling and Configuring
Mammography Workflow” on page 73.

Note that “installing mammography” on a Centricity PACS RA1000 Workstation does not
require installation of any workstation-specific software. Rather, The feature license for
mammography workflow feature is installed (information in this section), after which the
mammography workflow feature is enabled and configured (see “Enabling and
Configuring Mammography Workflow” on page 73).

Section 3: Installing the Workstation Application Software

3-1: Required Media

Verify that you have the following items available:

 Centricity 1.0 Workstation Application PACS Only CD

 Centricity Workstation License Disk

 Complete Table 4-2: Workstation Installation Sheet, on page 36.

3-1-1: Support for Centricity Precision Reporting

Workstation support is available for Centricity Precision Reporting. Precision Reporting is

a comprehensive dictation system that uses speech recognition technology and flexible
workflows to create structured diagnostic reports.

Note: Centricity PACS supports the integration of Precision Reporting with the Workstation.
This PACS release does not include the installation and configuration of Precision
Reporting.

2063534-001 Rev 2 51
Chapter 9 Installing the Workstation Application Software

If you plan to integrate Precision Reporting with the Workstation, keep in mind that
Precision Reporting must be installed and configured at your site before you can
integrate it with the Workstation. This process involves considerable setup time.
Contact your GE Service Representative for more information.

3-2: Installing the Centricity Workstation Application

3-2-1: Changing the User Account Control Settings (Windows 7)

If you use Windows 7, you must change the User Account Control Settings before you
install the Centricity Workstation Application.

1. Go to Start > Control Panel > User Accounts and select Change User Account
Control settings.

2. Slide the bar to Never notify.

3. Reboot the computer to update the control settings.

3-2-2: Changing the Data Execution Prevention (Windows XP 32bit and Server
200x)

If you install RA1000 and any Extend on a Windows XP 32bit machine or Windows 200x
server, you must change the Data Execution Prevention (DEP).

Note: If you won’t install any Extend(s), disregard this procedure.

Note: For any other operating system, Microsoft does not allow the user to change the DEP
setting. During the installation, you will receive a popup screen(s) that indicates the
windows installer has stopped working. Click Close the Program to continue the
installation.

1. Right click My Computer and select Properties.

2. Click the Advanced tab. Under Performance, select Settings.

3. Click the Data Execution Prevention tab.

4. Select Turn on DEP for all programs and services except those I select. Click
Add and select:

 explorer.exe in c:\windows for Windows Explorer

 msiexec.exe in c:\windows\system32 for Windows Installer

5. Reboot the computer to update the settings.

2063534-001 Rev 2 52
Chapter 9 Installing the Workstation Application Software

3-2-3: Uninstall the Workstation Prior to Version 4.0

Prerequisites:If you have changed either the user account control settings or DEP,
reboot the computer before you proceed.

If your installed workstation is prior to version 4.0, you must first uninstall the workstation.

1. On the workstation media, double-click uninstall_RA1000_InstallShield.exe.

Note: If the RunDLL legacy error message displays, click OK to continue the uninstall.

2. Proceed to 3-2-4: Installing the Application to install the workstation.

3-2-4: Installing the Application

1. Insert the Centricity Workstation Application media. Navigate to the <CD

Drive>:\ra1000installer.msi file and double-click the file.

Note: After the workstation was uninstalled, customizations saved in the

Platinum_custom.properties and Hardware.properties files were copied to
C:\TEMP.

Note: After the workstation was uninstalled, the Extend.properties file (if applicable) was
copied to C:\TEMP.

Result: The Preparing to Install and This will install GE Centricity. Do you wish to
proceed? screens display.

2. Click Yes.

Result: The Welcome screen displays.

3. Click Next once.

Result: The End-User License Agreement screen displays.

4. Read the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the License Agreement,
and then click Next.

Result: The Destination Folder screen displays.

5. Choose the folder in which you want to install the software and select Show
Advanced Options.

a. Select Create Transform to bypass the workstation-level validations. This can be

used when creating a transform on a machine that does not meet the minimum
hardware specifications of an RA1000.

b. Select Ignore Extend Validations if you want to allow more Extends choices (see
step 12).

c. Use Log Level to select the level of data you want to see in the log.

Note: The default level, Error, Warning, and Information, is recommended.

2063534-001 Rev 2 53
Chapter 9 Installing the Workstation Application Software

6. Click Next.

Result: The Workstation ID screen displays.

7. The Workstation ID is the machine’s hostname, which the user cannot change. Click
Next.

Result: The Setup Type screen displays.

8. Select the Setup Type:

 The default type is PACS Only mode

 Use Centricity RIS mode for sites that will use Centricity RIS to drive the
workflow.

9. Click Next.

Result: The Workstation Type screen displays.

10. Select the appropriate type of workstation for the user and then click Next:

Note: Refer to “Centricity Workstation Types” on page 28 for more information.

Note: If Centricity RIS mode was selected in step 8, the Ris MT IP Address
Configuration screen displays. Enter the IP address of the RIS middle tier and
then click Next.

Result: The IMS Configuration Dialog screen displays.

11. In the IMS Configuration Dialog screen,

a. Enter the host name of the local PACS IMS server In the Server Name field.

b. Enter the IP address of the IMS in the IMS IP field.

Note: For systems with Database Replication, use the Virtual IP (VIP) address of the
Database Virtual Server for the IMS IP field.

c. Enter the IP address of the middle tier in the Middle Tier IP field.

The Middle Tier IP address is the IP address of the server where the Middle Tier
software is installed.

Note: For most sites the PACS IMS server is the Middle Tier server, so the IP address is
the same.

Note: For systems with Database Replication, use the Virtual IP (VIP) address of the
Middle-Tier Virtual Server for the Middle Tier IP field.

d. If necessary, click Add to add a remote server and follow the sub-steps listed
below.

Result: The Remote Server Configuration screen displays.

i. Enter the name of the remote server in the Server Name field.

2063534-001 Rev 2 54
Chapter 9 Installing the Workstation Application Software

ii. Enter the remote server’s IIMS P address in the IMS IP field.

iii. Enter the remote server’s Middle Tier IP address. The Middle Tier IP address
is the IP address of the ISU server where the Middle Tier software is installed.

iv. Click Save to return to the IMS Configuration Dialog screen.

v. Click Next.

Result: The Choose Extends screen displays.

12. Select any additional external software that connects to PACS (for example,
Powerscribe or IDR).

13. Click Next.

Result: The Extends configuration screen displays when AW Suite, Talk,

Powerscribe 4-6, and/or RIS-IC are selected.

14. On the left side of the screen, select the check box of the Extend you chose in step 12.
On the right side of the screen, enter the applicable value(s).

Note: The right side of the screen changes according to the Extend you select.

Note: If you chose multiple Extends in step 12, select the check box of one Extend and
enter the applicable value(s). Then, select the check box of the next Extend and
enter the applicable value(s).

15. When you’ve entered the applicable values for all of the Extends chosen in step 12,
click Next.

Result: The Language Configuration screen displays.

16. Select the proper language and click Next. On the Ready to Install Centricity
Workstation screen click Install.

Result: A progress screen displays indicating the copying of the application files.

Note: If you selected any Extend software to be installed (from step 12), the installation
for that software begins. For information on the selected Extend installation, refer
to “Extends Installation” on page 294.

17. The prompt, This will get the previous Hardware.properties and
Platinum_custom.properties. Do you wish to proceed? displays. Click Yes to copy
the files.

Note: If you select Yes, the Platinum_custom.properties and Hardware.properties files

saved in C:\TEMP will be copied to the current RA1000. The Extend.properties
saved in C:\TEMP will remain in C:\TEMP.

Result: The Completed the Centricity Workstation Setup Wizard screen displays.

18. Click Finish.

Result: The RA1000 software is installed on the workstation hardware.

2063534-001 Rev 2 55
Chapter 9 Installing the Workstation Application Software

19. .You will be prompted to restart your system for the configuration changes to take
effect. Click Yes.

Note: If Extends options are chosen during installation, the workstation may display error
messages if it is started before the Extends are installed. For example, if the AW
Server option is chosen, but the AW Server client is not installed, the workstation
displays the error message:

Generic error on AW initialization, please contact your

administrator.

Section 4: Configuring the Workstation in the IMS Database

Use the Centricity Administrator Tool (CAT) and the CAT online help to configure the
Centricity Workstation in the IMS database.

Section 5: Installing the Workstation Online Help

The online help files need to be installed onto the middle tier server after the PACS system
installation/upgrade is complete. The PACS system installation/upgrade process inserts a
placeholder for the online help files. During the online help file installation, the placeholder
is removed and replaced with the appropriate online help files.

Note: For most PACS systems, the middle tier server is the IMS server. For LSP systems in
the United Kingdom, the middle tier server is a separate server (not the IMS server).

See the Servers Installation and Upgrade Manual for details.

2063534-001 Rev 2 56
Chapter 10 Monitor Configuration for Mixed Monitor Systems

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Mixed Monitor Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Section 2: Supported Monitor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Section 3: Configuring Mixed Monitor Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Section 4: Configuring Hardware Properties Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Section 5: Adjusting the C Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Section 1: Mixed Monitor Configuration Overview

The mixed monitor configuration consists of one or two clinical monitors (C monitors)
attached to one or more high resolution diagnostic monitors (A+, B+, or B monitors) for
displaying images. The high resolution monitors typically display the images and
workstation application palettes. If you are using a mixed monitor system, you have
several options to view images across the monitors.You can:

 Integrate one or both of the C monitors into the application and use them to display
images and the workstation palettes.

 Exclude the C monitors from the application and use them exclusively for other
applications. In this situation, you can still move the palettes across all of the monitors
(including the C monitors).

Section 2: Supported Monitor Configurations

The following mixed monitor configurations are supported. Refer to “Monitor

Configurations” on page 32 for additional information.

 1 A+ Monitor and 1 C Monitor

 2 A+ Monitors and 1 C Monitor

 4 A+ Monitors and 1 C Monitor

 2 A+ Monitors and 2 C Monitors

 4 A+ Monitors and 2 C Monitors

 1 B+ Monitor and 1 C Monitor

 2 B+ Monitors and 1 C Monitor

 4 B+ Monitors and 1 C Monitor

 1 B+ Monitor and 2 C Monitor

 2 B+ Monitors and 2 C Monitors

2063534-001 Rev 2 57
Chapter 10 Monitor Configuration for Mixed Monitor Systems

 4 B+ Monitors and 2 C Monitors

 1 B Monitor and 1 C Monitor

 2 B Monitors and 1 C Monitor

 4 B Monitors and 1 C Monitor

 1 B Monitor and 2 C Monitors

 2 B Monitors and 2 C Monitors

 4 B Monitors and 2 C Monitors

 2 C Monitors

Section 3: Configuring Mixed Monitor Support

Before you begin:

 Cable the monitors according to the manufacturers’ instructions.

Note: Due to limitations with Java and Windows, the C Monitor(s) must be set up as the left
monitor(s).

 Place the C monitors as the left monitors and connect them to the system.

 Complete the OS image install.

 Install and configure the necessary drivers for your video cards according to the
manufacturers’ instructions.

Section 4: Configuring Hardware Properties Manually

The workstation automatically detects the number and type of monitors, including color
monitors. You can override these settings by adjusting the Hardware.properties file to
enable you to manually configure the monitor properties.

Note: As of PACS 3.3, the Hardware.properties file includes support for zero to two color
monitors and zero, one, two, or four high-resolution diagnostic monitors.

To manually configure the monitor properties:

1. Open the Hardware.properties file and locate the following entry.

com.ge.med.platinum.view.DisplayHeadManager.readFromProperties=false

2. Set the value to true and adjust the monitor configurations to your site’s needs.

3. Save the Hardware.properties file.

2063534-001 Rev 2 58
Chapter 10 Monitor Configuration for Mixed Monitor Systems

Section 5: Adjusting the C Monitor Settings

To configure C monitor:

1. Right-click the Desktop and select Properties. The Properties dialog box displays.

2. Click the Settings tab. On the Settings tab, the monitors display.

3. Set up the C monitor according to specifications in “Monitor Configurations” on

page 32.

4. Check the Extend my desktop with Monitor box and click Apply.

5. Check the Use this device as the primary Monitor box.

6. In the confirmation box, click OK.

7. Set up the high resolution monitors according to specifications in “Monitor

Configurations” on page 32.

Note: You must set up each high resolution monitor for your system.

8. Check the Extend my desktop with Monitor box and click Apply.

9. All monitors must be aligned at their top edges.

 Hover the mouse over all the non-primary monitors and verify that the Y-
coordinate of each monitor is 0 (as shown in Illustration 10-1: Mixed Monitor
Display Settings).

 If the Y-coordinate is not 0, drag the box representing each incorrectly aligned
monitor up or down until it is correctly aligned.

Illustration 10-1:Mixed Monitor Display Settings

2063534-001 Rev 2 59
Chapter 10 Monitor Configuration for Mixed Monitor Systems

For more information on Mixed Monitor, refer to the “Monitor Configuration” on page 56

2063534-001 Rev 2 60
Chapter 11 Verifying Configuration

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Section 2: Logging On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Section 3: Verifying the Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Section 4: Locking the Desktop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Section 5: Enabling IIS Auto Log On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Section 6: Changing the Administrator Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Section 7: Setting the User Taskbar Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Section 8: Checking the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

This chapter finishes the required system configurations before turnover to the customer.
In this chapter you will:

 Setup the workstation to auto log on and launch the application software. Running this
script causes the computer to automatically log on as IIS user and start the
applications software without user interaction.

 Test to verify valid network connections.

 Set the administrator password (Optional).

Section 1: Prerequisites

 Workstation integration completed.

 Workstation operating system software installed and configured.

 Workstation application software installed and configured.

 Monitors calibrated.

 Verify proper ISU software version.

Section 2: Logging On

Log on as Administrator.

Login: administrator

Password: CANal1

2063534-001 Rev 2 61
Chapter 11 Verifying Configuration

Section 3: Verifying the Ethernet Connection

To verify the ethernet connection:

1. Open a Command Prompt.

2. Execute the ping command with the IP address of the ISU by entering:

ping 192.28.75.100 [Enter]

You should see a response from the ping if the Ethernet connection is good.

Output of the ping command:

Pinging 192.28.75.100 with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.28.75.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255

Reply from 192.28.75.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255

Reply from 192.28.75.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255

Reply from 192.28.75.100: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255

The command should not time-out with no response is indicated from the ISU.

Section 4: Locking the Desktop

Use the Lock Desktop feature to remove all functionality except Centricity from the
system. To lock the desktop:

1. Set the user preferences to make the IIS user an Administrator.

2. Log on as the IIS User.

Username: IIS

Password: iis

3. On the Start Menu, click Programs > Lock Desktop > IIS Desktop.

4. Press N to lock the desktop.

5. Set the user preferences to make the IIS user a Restricted User.

6. Restart the computer and log on as IIS User again.

2063534-001 Rev 2 62
Chapter 11 Verifying Configuration

Section 5: Enabling IIS Auto Log On

Setup the workstation to auto log on and launch the application software. Running this
script causes the computer to automatically log on to the workstation as IIS user and start
the application software without User interaction upon subsequent reboots.

To return to the normal log on prompt at a latter time: Hold the Shift key down while
logging off from the system. To renew auto log on after disabling it, either re-run the
procedure below or simply change the User back to iis and Password to iis.

To enable IIS Auto Log on:

1. From the command prompt, change directory to %PLAT_HOME%\service\config by

entering:

cd %PLAT_HOME%\service\config

2. Execute the autologin.cmd file by entering:

autologin.cmd

3. Exit DOS.

Section 6: Changing the Administrator Password

To change the administrator password:

1. Press Ctrl - Alt - Delete.

2. Select Change Password.

3. Enter a new password in the New Password field and Confirm Password fields.

4. Click OK, and then click Cancel.

5. Select Start > Shutdown > Close all programs and log on as a different user.

6. Click OK.

Section 7: Setting the User Taskbar Preferences

Use this procedure to configure the user preferences for the Taskbar. This procedure
hides the Taskbar, and displays the clock.

1. Select Start > Settings > Taskbar.

2. Uncheck Always on top.

3. Check Auto hide.

2063534-001 Rev 2 63
Chapter 11 Verifying Configuration

4. Uncheck Show small icons in Start menu.

5. Check Show Clock.

6. Click Apply, then click OK.

Section 8: Checking the Application Software

The system should automatically start up as IIS User and launch the applications.

To check the application software:

1. Restart the computer, if necessary.

2. Log on to the database with the correct username and password.

3. Select and double-click to display an image.

2063534-001 Rev 2 64
Chapter 12 Customer Turnover

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Section 2: Turnover Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Use this chapter to ensure that the installation of the workstation is complete and ready to
turn over to the customer.

Section 1: Prerequisites

 Workstation integration completed.

 Workstation operating system software installed and configured as appropriate with

site-specific data.

 Workstation application software installed and configured as appropriate with site-

specific data.

 All calibrations completed as appropriate.

 All configurations are verified.

Section 2: Turnover Checklist

Perform all tasks on the following checklist before turning the workstation over to the
customer.

Note: Photocopy this data sheet for use on all workstations as required.

Table 12-1: Customer Turnover Checklist

Task Complete Task Completed

Ensure fans and other devices are clear of foreign objects and functional.

Confirm images display on the GUI from the IMS.

Monitor(s) calibrated per procedure.

If applicable verify that default route information is added.

If applicable verify that images sent to the printer(s) print correctly.

If applicable, verify Insite entitlement has been completed.

The workstation configuration data has been backed up to the diskette and stored away.

2063534-001 Rev 2 65
Chapter 12 Customer Turnover

Table 12-1: Customer Turnover Checklist (Continued)

Task Complete Task Completed

Ethernet pings performed.

Auto-log on for IIS user is enabled.

Administrator password is set.

ISU is successfully upgraded to the correct version to support the Centricity™ Workstations.

Customer turnover completed by:___________________

Date Completed: __________________

2063534-001 Rev 2 66
g GE Healthcare

Configuration

This section contains the following chapters:

 Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

 Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

 Chapter 16 Language Configuration

 Chapter 17 Memory Configuration

 Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

 Chapter 19 Centricity Exam Manager Configuration

 Chapter 20 Workstation Security Configuration

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

This chapter includes:

Section 1: STAT Exams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Section 2: Enabling Confidential Patient Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Section 3: Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Section 4: Enabling and Configuring Mammography Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Section 5: Enabling Exam Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Section 6: Configuring E-Mail Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Section 7: Configuring Image Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Section 8: Enabling DICOM Send. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Section 9: Enabling Image Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Section 10: Enabling Cancelled Exam Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Section 11: Enabling Spine Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Section 12: Enabling Lock Mouse Tool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Section 13: Configuring DICOM Query Retrieve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Section 14: Configuring Study Info Display Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Section 15: Configuring the Series Hot Zone and the Comp Hot Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Section 16: Configuring Index Color LUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Section 17: Changing Magnification Values Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Section 18: Configuring Cross-Reference Line Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Section 19: Conference Display Protocols (CDP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Section 20: Default Display Protocols (DDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Section 21: Configuring the All Images Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Section 22: Configuring a Remote Reading Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Section 23: Configuring the Third Party Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Section 24: Configuring Image Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Section 25: Configuring Display Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Section 26: Enabling the Right-Click Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Section 27: Enabling Thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Section 28: Enabling Spatial Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Section 29: Enabling Auto Zoom of GE Mammo Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Section 30: Display Support for Additional Modalities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Section 31: Adding Modality Codes to the Worklist Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Section 32: Disabling the Modality Code Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Section 33: Configuring Cine Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Section 34: Configuring Region of Interest (ROI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Section 35: Configuring Mark Significant Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Section 36: Configuring Image Overlay Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Section 37: Configuring Image Stepping for the Mammography Tile Feature. . . . . . . . 130
Section 38: Configuring Presentation States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Section 39: Configuring the Saving of User-Calibrated Pixel Spacing Information . . . . 135
Section 40: Preconfigured Rules for ERMF Adjustment of Mammography Images . . . 135
Section 41: Configuring Sound Clip Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

2063534-001 Rev 2 68
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 42: Configuring the Case Insensitive Sorting Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Section 43: Changing the Units in which to Display Reconstruction Diameter Value . . 138
Section 44: Configuring F12 Behavior When Utilities Palette Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Section 45: Configuring Showing Hidden Images When Presentation State Applied . . 139
Section 46: Configuring Image Grouping Preferences for Open Exams. . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Section 47: Configuring Writing of PET Image Rescale Slope/Intercept Information . . 140
Section 48: Platinum Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Section 49: RA1000 with AW Server Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Section 50: Configuring Workstation Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Section 51: New Images Notification While Viewing an Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Section 52: Customizing the Arrangement of Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Section 53: Enabling the Idle Time Out Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Section 54: Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Section 55: CAD Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Section 56: Support for TE and PV Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Section 57: Seno Advantage Keypad Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Section 58: Configuring Archiving on Configurable Exam Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Section 59: Enabling and Configuring Rejected Image Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Section 60: Configuring Hardware Properties for Size Synchronization with Mixed
Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Section 61: Migrating to and Configuring PACS Sites with RIS-IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Section 62: Configuring the Association Worklist Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Section 63: Configuring the Availability of Stack Sync Options on the Utilities Palette . 179
Section 64: Configuring Server Selection for the Utilities Palette Exam Manager . . . . 180
Section 65: Enabling the NBSS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Section 66: Configuring the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Section 67: Precision Reporting Properties (Informational Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Note: For the properties mentioned in this chapter, you can add the property to the
platinum_custom.properties file for some or all workstations or set it as a system-level
preference using the Tools Editor.

Section 1: STAT Exams

1-1: Enabling STAT Exam Support

Exams that require immediate attention are classified as STAT exams. The workstation
now includes a feature to support STAT exams. This feature is enabled through CAT.

When using a workstation with STAT Exam enabled, the workflow for the user changes.
When the user clicks Next Exam the STAT exams with the highest priority are displayed
regardless of the original list of exams and the current exam selection.

To enable the STAT Exam feature:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2063534-001 Rev 2 69
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the StatExamMacroSupport row and click it.

4. Set the value of the property to Y.

5. Click Save.

To disable STAT Exam, set the property value to N.

When the STAT Exam support is disabled, the STAT column is not displayed in the
Workmode and Patient Jacket palettes, and the STAT exams are not opened
automatically while working in the Dictate Macro mode.

1-2: Configuring Highlighting for STAT Exams

The highlighting of STAT exams and highlighting color can be configured based on status
of STAT exams or all STAT exams. By default, the STAT exam are highlighted with red
color. The highlighting is configurable or defined using the following property:

com.ge.med.bean.worklisttable.WorklistTablePanel.STATEnableColor

The value for the above property must be configured using Hexadecimal number for
configuring the different color.

Example: Hexadecimal numbers for some of the colors are:

 White—”#FFFFFF”

 Red—”#FF0000”

 Green—”#00FF00”

 Blue—”#0000FF”

 Yellow—”#FFFF00”

 Aqua—"#00FFFF"

 Lime—"#00FF00"

One of value specified in Table 13-1 on page 70 can be configured for the following
property to have the resulting configuration for highlighting of STAT exams:

com.ge.med.bean.worklisttable.WorklistTablePanel.STATEnableColor

Table 13-1: Significance of values to configure highlighting of STAT exams

Value Resulting Configuration

Null Exam status at which stat exam highlight color should not be used
anymore

-1 All stat exams should be highlighted by the defined color

2063534-001 Rev 2 70
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-1: Significance of values to configure highlighting of STAT exams (Continued)

Value Resulting Configuration

0 None of STAT exams should be highlighted with the defined color

60 Only exams with exam status below 60 (dictated macro mode) should
be highlighted with the defined color. It is used as the default value.

Section 2: Enabling Confidential Patient Support

Centricity Workstation includes the Confidential Patient feature. Users with the necessary
privileges can mark a patient as confidential and restrict the availability of the patient’s
data—studies, images, and reports—only to the users and nodes having the necessary
permissions.

To be able to DICOM Send, merge, and print confidential patient information, the user
must have the privilege to view confidential patient information.

To enable Confidential Patient support:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the ConfidentialPatient row and click it.

4. Set the value of the property to Y.

5. Click Save.

To disable Confidential Patient, set the property value to N.

Section 3: Bookmarks

3-1: Enabling Bookmarks

Bookmarks allow a user to capture the Display State of an exam and reapply the same
display. A bookmark restores the reading session from where the user left off.

Note: If you save more than 15 bookmarks per exam, the additional bookmarks will display
in the More Bookmarks dialog box.

The new bookmark worklists include:

 All Bookmarked Exam—A worklist with all exams that currently have at least one
bookmark defined for them.

2063534-001 Rev 2 71
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 My Bookmarked Exams—A worklist with all exams that currently have at least one
bookmark created by the currently logged on user.

To enable Bookmarking options:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the Bookmarking row and click it.

4. Change the value of the property to Y. (To disable Bookmarking, set the value to N.)

5. Click Save.

3-2: Configuring Retention Period for Bookmarks

To configure the retention period for bookmarks:

1. Log in to CAT as the Administrator.

2. In the Navigation panel, under Administration, click Sys. Configuration.

Note: The Sys.Configuration option is available to you only if you have the
CATViewSysConfiguration privilege.

3. In the Select list, select PACS Configuration.

The PACS Configuration window displays a list of available PACS configurations.

4. Find the Bookmark Object Keep Alive configuration.

The selected configuration’s details are displayed in the System Config section.

a. Edit the configuration’s details as needed.

Note: When modifying configurations, modifications are only possible for the fields
containing black text. Fields with light gray text cannot be changed.

Bookmark Object Keep Alive The number of days that a bookmark exists on the system without any updates
made to it, after which the IMS Daemon deletes the bookmark from the system.
Default is 366 days. To configure bookmarks to never be deleted, set this value
to a high number, such as 500 years (182500).

b. Click Save.

Note: The Save button is enabled only if you have the CATPACSSysConfigUpdate
privilege.

Note: For non-U.S. sites, System Locale Country, System Locale Language, and
Translated Text Encoding Format have to match the site.

5. Restart the Middle Tier.

2063534-001 Rev 2 72
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 4: Enabling and Configuring Mammography Workflow

The Mammography Workflow simplifies reading MG exam procedures. It standardizes the

workflow so the radiologist is able to view the exams and images from the View Position
perspective. The Mammography Workflow feature includes an extended user interface,
image grouping and display protocol support for MG exams that allows radiologists to
cycle through these perspectives with one mouse-click or one keystroke.

In addition to installing a Mammography Workflow license, the Mammography Workflow

feature also must be enabled and configured.

Note that “installing mammography” on a Centricity PACS RA1000 Workstation does not
require installation of any workstation-specific software. Rather, the feature license for
mammography workflow feature is installed (see “Installing a Feature License” on
page 51), after which the procedure in this section is done to enable and configure the
mammography workflow.

To enable and configure Mammography Workflow:

1. One or more mammography workflow feature licenses must be installed in the

database. To install the feature license(s) for Mammography Workflow, see “Installing
a Feature License” on page 51. The license type of "MWFF" refers to the
mammography workflow feature.

2. The user or the group the user belongs to must have the ReadMammo privilege
assigned to them using CAT. For detailed information on where to change the
ReadMammo privilege, see the “IMS Function Privileges System” section of “Users,
Groups, and Functions” chapter in System Administrator Online Help Manual.

3. For sites that have GE Mammography units, do the following to enable the
mammography lookup tables (LUTs).

c. Log into CAT as Administrator.

d. On the Navigation panel, click Administration > Client Config.

e. Click the MammoLUT row.

f. Set the value field to Y to enable MammoLUT.

g. Click Save.

h. Exit CAT.

4. Start the workstation, open an MG exam, and access and use the Mammography
Feature Bar to verify that the Mammography Workflow feature is available. To use the
Mammography Feature Bar, see the Workstation Online Help.

5. View mammography images on GE PACS to demonstrate that mammography images

display correctly / with appropriate image quality.

Note: For specific details on using the Mammography Workflow feature, refer to the
Workstation online help.

2063534-001 Rev 2 73
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 5: Enabling Exam Notes

Exam Notes help facilitate communication between the modality technician and the
radiologist or between the radiologist and the referring physician. The radiologist creates
and views exam notes for an exam study. Then, the clinician can use these notes when
diagnosing the exam study.

For more information on using Exam Notes, refer to the Workstation Online help.

To enable Exam Notes options:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the ExamNotes row and click it.

4. Change the value of the property to Y.

5. Click Save.

To disable Exam Notes, set the property value to N.

Exam notes allows you to set the functionality of some of its features. They are as follows:

 Auto hides the dialog—allows the Exam Notes dialog to be a non-modal dialog.
When the user clicks anywhere outside the Exam Notes dialog, the dialog disappears
from view and the exam note text is saved temporarily. To turn off this function, set the
following property to false:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.ui.examnotes.gui.ViewExamNotesDialog.autoHideDi
alog=false

 Auto display Exam Notes—Open an Exam Note window for exams that do NOT
have any notes when opening an exam. To turn on this function, set the following
property to true:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.ui.examnotes.controller.ExamNotesController.aut
oDisplayCreateExamNote=true

Section 6: Configuring E-Mail Option

This section describes how to configure the E-Mail option on the workstation. You must
configure this option if the user expects to export images to e-mail.

To configure E-mail options:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2. Find the following property and set it to false:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExportController.readSenderEmailIDFrom
Database

2063534-001 Rev 2 74
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

3. Set the following properties to make the email feature work correctly:

com.ge.med.platinum.util.SimpleEmailClient.emailHostName=

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.GlobalGUIController.senderEmail
=

The value must be a valid email account on the server that the workstation uses to
send the email from.

4. Edit the file based on the options in the following table:

Table 13-2: Email Options

Property Name Property Description Valid Values Property

Type

com.ge.med.platinum.util.Simple With this property, the user can configure which host Any server String
EmailClient.emailHostName is used to send the email containing the exported address
images.
Values: Any valid server address.
Default value is amermsx.med.ge.com.

com.ge.med.platinum.util.Simple With this property, the user can specify the title label Any string String
EmailClient.emailClientTitle displayed at the top of the Email Tool GUI.
Values: Any string.
Default value is workstation Email.

com.ge.med.platinum.util.Simple This property controls what font is used in the body String
EmailClient.contentFont of the email.
Default value is ARIAL - plain - 12.

com.ge.med.platinum.util.Simple This property controls what font is used for the String
EmailClient.labelFont buttons and the labels beside each user input area.
Default value is ARIAL - bold - 11.

com.ge.med.platinum.util.Simple This property controls what font is used in the To: String
EmailClient.textFieldFont and Subject: text fields in the Email Tool header.
Default value is ARIAL - plain - 12.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image. With this property, the user can configure what String
controller.GlobalGUIController. default target email address displays on the GUI.
referringPhysicianEmail The user is able to edit this value before sending the
email.
Values: Any valid email address.
Default value is “blank”.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image. With this property, the user can configure what the String
controller.GlobalGUIController. subject field contains by default. The user is able to
mySubject edit this value before sending the email.
Default value is “blank”.

5. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2063534-001 Rev 2 75
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 7: Configuring Image Export Options

This section includes a signature form which MUST BE SIGNED by the customer in order
for the save images/email/FTP image options to be turned on.

After completing this signature form, the FE should use the procedure in 7-2: Configuring
Save Images Option to configure the save images/email options.

Warning: The PACS Workstation can be configured to allow sending of images that may
be lossy compressed. If an external DICOM client is unable to process the
DICOM lossy compressed tag, then users of the external DICOM client may be
unaware that they are viewing images that are lossy compressed.

Note: For CR and DX images with image orientation markers suppressed from displaying on
RA1000, GE does not modify the information in the image headers when the DICOM
image is sent outside of the PACS. PACS passes any DICOM information in the
DICOM header as sent by the modality. Images viewed outside of RA1000 using other
DICOM viewers might display incorrect information that was passed through PACS.
Using lead markers during image acquisition is another way to indicate image
orientation.

2063534-001 Rev 2 76
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

To have these options turned on, the customer or their authorized representative must
sign this agreement and fax the signed copy to GEHC IITS Regulatory Affairs department,
Barrington, IL at 847-277-5240.

Only a GE Field Support engineer can disable/enable the options.

1. The Institution named below acknowledges the information noted in this section,
which the authorized and medically trained representatives of the Institution have read
carefully.

2. The Institution hereby instructs you to enable the save images/email options as
Signature Form

indicated by the signature.

___________________________________________________

PRINTED AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE/TITLE SIGNATURE

___________________________________________________

INSTITUTION DATE

2063534-001 Rev 2 77
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

7-1: Enabling Image Export

Image Export can be configured to allow the export of images to an FTP server, a disk
(Hard disk or mapped network drive), or as an Email attachment.

To enable and disable Image Export options:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the ImageExport row and click it.

4. Set the value field to your desired configuration. You can use any combination of the
following:

 FTP server

Note: FTP applies only to the Solaris operating system.

 Disk (Hard disk or mapped network drive)

 Email as attachment

5. Click Save.

Note: By default, all export options are enabled.

Example:

 To enable ONLY FTP, set the value to F.

 To enable FTP and EMAIL, set the value to F, E.

 To enable ALL levels (FTP, EMAIL, AND SAVE TO DISK, set the value to F, E, S.

FTP Options

The image are stored under the logged on user name directory under the root directory of
the server.

Example: If user is logged on as “TEST” then the images are in the directory “TEST.” The
“TEST” directory is created under the root directory of the server.

7-2: Configuring Save Images Option

This procedure describes how to configure the Save Images option on the workstation.
You must configure this option if the user expects to export images to a saved file.

2063534-001 Rev 2 78
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

7-2-1: Saving Images to Local Machine/Hard Drive

The user can automatically save images to directories on the local machine/hard drive. To
save images to directories on a networked Windows workstation, the drive must be
mapped onto the Windows workstation. To map a drive:

1. Launch Windows Explorer.

2. From the Tools menu, select Map Network Drive....

3. Select a letter for the drive.

4. Enter the full path or find the drive by using the hierarchy of machines available in the
panel below.

5. If needed, specify the user and password needed to connect to the machine.

6. Check the Reconnect at Login check box to have this drive available all the time.

For more information on the mapping function, click Help.

7-3: Optimizing Exam Saving Performance

The information from the first image in a series can be used to save an exam or create an
external Gray Scale Presentation State (GSPS) object, when an image header has not
been read in, by setting the following property to true.

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.useFirstSeriesImageEnabled=true

This feature can be enabled/disabled modality wise. Use the following property configured
for CT as an example to disable this feature for other modalities:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.useFirstSeriesImageFor.CT=false

Note: To disable this feature for other modalities, replace CT with the appropriate modality
code as listed in Table 13-11: Modality Code Descriptions.

You can disable the exam saving performance optimization when any of the following
DICOM tags are different for images present in the same series but obtained from different
modalities, manufacturer, and models:

 Pixel Representation (0028,0103)

 Rescale Intercept (0028,1052)

 Rescale Slope (0028,1053)

 Rescale Type (0028,1054)

 Window Width (0028,1050)

 Window Center (0028,1051)

 Photometric Interpretation (0028,0004)

2063534-001 Rev 2 79
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 DICOM 6000 overlays

 Shutter Shape (0018,1600)

Use the following examples to override this feature for individual manufacturers or models
of a modality:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.useFirstSeriesImageFor.CT.gemedicalsystems
=false

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.useFirstSeriesImageFor.CT.gemedicalsystems
.lightspeed16=true

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.useFirstSeriesImageFor.CT.GEMEDICALSYSTEMS
.LightSpeedQX/i=true

Note: The manufacturer and model name strings must not contain white spaces, and they
must either match the case exactly as they are stored in image headers, or both
names should be in lowercase.

Note: In addition to white spaces (which includes spaces as well as tab characters), the
following characters should not be used for the manufacturer and model names and
therefore should not be in the property name:!@#$%^&*()<>?.,

Note: This feature can be disabled modality wise and overridden for individual
manufacturers or models only when the property
com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.useFirstSeriesImageEnabled is set to true.

7-4: Configuring Image Export Options in the Properties File

To configure Image Export options with the properties files:

1. Find the appropriate property in the Platinum.properties file.

2. Copy the property to the Platinum_custom.properties file.

3. Set the property and save the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2063534-001 Rev 2 80
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

7-4-1: Common Properties

Table 13-3: Image Export Common Properties

Property Name Property Description Valid Values Property

Type

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExportControl To configure the path of temp a valid directory String

ler.convertImageBufferPath= directory to hold images name
temporarily before FTPing & C:\\exportedImag
sending as email. Also this path es_SaveToDisk
would be the default location of
Image export to the disk: C:\\exportedImag
es_SaveToDisk
(default)

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExportControl This (true / false) property true = attach Boolean

ler.isAttachDescription=false determines if the description false = do not
entered while exporting the attach (default)
images is appended to the
exported file names.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExportControl This property determines if a true = show the Boolean

ler.isConfirm=true confirmation dialog is shown dialog (default)
after images are exported to the false = don't show
specified destination. the dialog;

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExportControl This property controls the MM = month String

ler.timeStampFormat=__MMddhhmmss timestamp format as attached to dd = day
the exported file names. hh = hours
mm = minutes
The timestamp is in numeric ss = sec.
form.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExportControl This property controls the de- BLANK (default) String

ler.patientDeidentificationType=BLANK identification to be used, when it or
is not available from the DB ASTERISK

7-4-2: EMAIL Properties

Table 13-4: Image Export Email Properties

Property Name Property Description Valid Values Property

Type

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.Ima This property controls the reading of the sender's true (default) Boolean
geExportController.readSenderE emailID. false
mailIDFromDatabase=true true = always read the sender's email Id from the DB
(from users table of ris DB, as configured by CAT)
false = always read the sender's email ID from the
property value

2063534-001 Rev 2 81
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-4: Image Export Email Properties (Continued)

Property Name Property Description Valid Values Property

Type

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image. If the readSenderEmailIDFromDatabase property is valid sender String

controller.GlobalGUIController.se set to false the sender's email id is read from this email ID at
nderEmail= property. the specified
email host

com.ge.med.platinum.util.Simple With this property, the user can configure which host Any server String
EmailClient.emailHostName=am is used to send the email containing the exported address
ermsx.med.ge.com images.
Values: Any valid server address.
Default value is amermsx.med.ge.com.

7-4-3: FTP Properties

Note: FTP applies only to the Solaris operating system.

Table 13-5: Image Export FTP Configurations

Property Name Property Description Valid Values Property

Type

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExport Lists the FTP Server’s IP address. FTP server ip. String
Controller.ftpServerIP=(FTP server ip. Format:
Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExport Lists the FTP Server’s Port. FTP server port. Number
Controller.ftpServerPort=(FTP server port. Usual Value= 21
Default: 21)

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExport Lists the user login ID to be used on the Valid user login String
Controller.ftpServerUser= FTP Server. ID on the FTP
Server

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExport Lists the password to be used to log on Valid password String

Controller.ftpServerPassword= to the FTP server. on the FTP
Server.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ImageExport Lists the Transfer mode. Usual Value= blank String

Controller.ftpServerImageTransferMode= BINARY. BINARY
ASCII

7-5: Using the image_export_config Script

This section explains how to run the image_export_config script to configure an FTP
server that workstation users can access to export images. This script configures the
export destination server and appends the information to the platinum_custom. properties
file.

2063534-001 Rev 2 82
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Note: The customer must have an FTP server running that can receive images.

To use the image_export_config script:

1. Log on to the workstation as Administrator.

User: Administrator

Password: <admin_password>

2. Open Windows Explorer.

3. Double-click the following file to run the script.

%PLAT_HOME%\service\config\image_export_config.pl

4. Enter the IP address of the FTP destination server.

5. Enter the FTP destination server’s port number. This is usually 21.

6. Enter the user name for the FTP destination server.

7. Enter the password used to access the FTP destination server.

8. Enter the transfer mode that will be used to transfer the images (BINARY or ASCII).
This will almost always be BINARY.

Section 8: Enabling DICOM Send

The FE can now enable or disable DICOM Send at various levels. The four levels are:

 Exam

 Series

 Image

 Significant Image

 Presentation State

 Key Image Notes

Note: This parameter is set to Exam only (E) as the default.

Warning: The PACS Workstation can be configured to allow sending of images that may
be lossy compressed. If an external DICOM client is unable to process the
DICOM lossy compressed tag, then users of the external DICOM client may be
unaware that they are viewing images that are lossy compressed.

Note: For CR and DX images with image orientation markers suppressed from displaying on
RA1000, GE does not modify the information in the image headers when the DICOM
image is sent outside of the PACS. PACS passes any DICOM information in the

2063534-001 Rev 2 83
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

DICOM header as sent by the modality. Images viewed outside of RA1000 using other
DICOM viewers might display incorrect information that was passed through PACS.
Using lead markers during image acquisition is another way to indicate image
orientation.

To enable and disable DICOM send options:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the DicomSend row and click it.

4. Set the value field to your desired configuration. You can use any combination of the
following:

 S—series

 SI—significant images

 I—images

 P—Presentation States

 K—Key Image Notes

5. Click Save.

Example:

 To enable Image and Series level DICOM Send, set the value to I, S.

 To enable Significant Image, Series, and Image level, set the value to SI, S, I.

 To enable Presentation State and Key Image Notes, set the value to P, K.

 To enable ALL levels, set the value to E, S, SI, I, P, K.

 To turn off DICOM Send completely, leave the field blank.

8-1: Configuring DICOM Send with a RadWorks

To configure DICOM Send to work with RadWorks:

1. Use the CAT to configure the Send Destination and Destination Address for the
Radworks. For detailed information, see “Destination Addresses” section of
“Configuration” chapter in System Administrator Online Help.

2. Configure the DAS to recognize the Radworks as a Send Destination. Set the
Radworks as a Node in the DAS. Refer to the DAS documentation for specific
procedures on setting Nodes.

3. Configure the DAS as a Send Server. Refer to the DAS documentation for specific
procedures.

2063534-001 Rev 2 84
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

4. Configure the Radworks to recognize the DAS. Refer to the RadWorks documentation
for specific procedures.

5. Verify the configurations by sending an exam to the RadWorks.

If this fails:

a. Telnet to the ISU and log on as sybase user.

Note: Telnet applies only to the Solaris operating system.

b. Enter select* from send_queue.

c. Verify that the exam was sent to the send_queue table.

If the exam was sent, verify that the client_id field in the send_queue table is
populated. The DAS that is pinging the send_queue table, populates the client_id
field with an entry.

If the client_id field is empty, you must reconfigure the DAS as the Send Server.

Section 9: Enabling Image Filters

The workstation includes several new enhancement filters to aid radiological needs.
These filters include:

 1 Lung filter

 3 Edge filters

 3 Smooth filters

These image filters also correspond with the filters that are included with the GE CT
Scanners. For more information, on using Image Filters, refer to the Workstation Online
help.

To enable Image Filters:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the CTBoneFiltering row and click on it.

4. Set the value field to Y to enable Image Filters.

5. Click Save.

2063534-001 Rev 2 85
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 10: Enabling Cancelled Exam Filtering

10-1: Sitewide setting for Enabling Cancelled Exam Filtering

You can configure workstations at a site to filter out cancelled exams that have no images
or PACS reports from the exam list on the Patient Jacket palette.

Note: The default value for the site is “2” and the workstations is “on,” so cancelled exams
with no images or PACS reports are omitted from the Patient Jacket palette.

To set the cancelled exam filtering behavior for the entire site:

1. Open the Tools Editor and find the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.isu.WorklistTransaction.removeCancelledExam
sSiteUserConfiguration

2. Set the value to one of the following:

Value Description

0 Disables cancelled exam filtering for all workstations at the site.

Cancelled exams are always listed in the Patent Jacket palette.

1 Enables cancelled exam filtering for all workstations at the site.

Cancelled exams with no images or PACS reports are always
hidden in the Patient Jacket palette.

2 Allows the workstation operator to enable or disable cancelled

exam filtering.

10-2: Setting the Cancelled Exam Filtering User Preference

You can configure a property so that workstation users can control when to enable or
disable cancelled exam filtering with a user preference that displays on the Utilities
palette.

The default setting of this property is shown below:

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.WorkstationPreferencePanel.RemoveCancell
edExams=true

Where:

true — the user preference for remove cancelled exam filtering displays on the Utilities
palette.

false — the user preference for remove cancelled exam filtering does not display on the
Utilities palette.

2063534-001 Rev 2 86
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 11: Enabling Spine Labeling

Note: The site must have all workstations upgraded to at least Centricity 2.0 before this
feature can be turned on.

To enable Spine Labeling:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the Spine Labeling row and click on it.

4. Set the value field to Y to enable Spine Labeling.

5. Click Save.

Note: LSPSiteFlag parameter must be configured to enable Local Service Provider (LSP)
authentication in Workstation. For detailed information, see PACS Configuration
section of System Configuration chapter in System Administration Online Help
Manual.

Section 12: Enabling Lock Mouse Tool Button

To remove the Lock Mouse Tool button:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the LockMouseCine row and click on it.

4. Set the value field to Y to enable the Lock Mouse Tool Button. Set the value field to N
to disable the Lock Mouse Tool Button.

5. Click Save.

Section 13: Configuring DICOM Query Retrieve

This feature provides the ability to interactively query and retrieve from multiple DICOM
applications from the workstation. The workstation uses the most widely defined Q/R
Information Model, the Study Root Information Model. This model begins at study level
query.

Warning: The PACS Workstation can be configured to allow sending of images that may
be lossy compressed. If an external DICOM client is unable to process the
DICOM lossy compressed tag, then users of the external DICOM client may be
unaware that they are viewing images that are lossy compressed.

2063534-001 Rev 2 87
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

13-1: DICOM Query Retrieve Overview

The users can interactively query multiple DICOM applications. From the query results
obtained, users can retrieve selected studies or series into the Centricity system through
the DICOM Application Services (DAS) that is connected to the Database to which the
workstation is connected.

The retrieved studies or series are not stored on the workstation hard drive. Users can
view the images from the retrieved studies and series on the workstation similar to viewing
other images in the acquired into system. These retrieved studies or series show up as
exams in the usual Worklists on the workstations.

Illustration : shows the workflow for this feature. The steps below explain the workflow
process.

Illustration 13-1:DICOM Query Retrieve Workflow

1. The user selects the 3rd Party DICOM Application System query location in the
workstation user interface and enters a valid query. The workstation sends the query
to the 3rd Party DICOM Application System (an SCP Application).

2. The 3rd Party DICOM Application System sends the Query Response back to the
workstation.

3. The user selects the resulting study or series and clicks Retrieve in the workstation
application.

4. The 3rd Party DICOM Application System sends/stores the selected study or series to
the DAS.

5. The retrieved study or series are populated as exams in the database.

6. The retrieved study or series display as exams in the workstation’s usual Worklist (in
the Work Modes palette) and the corresponding images can be displayed.

Table 13-6 lists the information that each component needs to know from the other
components in the system.

2063534-001 Rev 2 88
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-6: Necessary Inputs for DICOM Query Retrieve

Component Necessary Information

Workstation Needs the following information from the 3rd Party DICOM Application (RadWorks):
 Hostname (Name)
 AETitle
 IP Address
 Port Number

3rd Party DICOM Needs the following information from the Centricity Workstation:
Application System  Hostname (Name)
(RadWorks)  AETitle
 IP Address
 Port Number

Needs the following information from the DAS:

 Hostname (Name)
 AETitle
 IP Address
 Port Number

DAS Needs the following information from the 3rd Party DICOM Application (RadWorks):
 Hostname (Name)
 AETitle
 IP Address
 Port Number

The DICOM Query Retrieve feature is enabled and configured using four parts.

1. “Enabling the DICOM Query Retrieve Icon” on page 89

2. “Configuring Workstation Properties” on page 90

 Setting the Workstation SCU AE Title

 Setting the Maximum Number of AE Titles

 Configuring Query SCP or Query Location Options

 Enabling the Retrieve Button

 Setting the Move Destination

3. “Configuring a 3rd Party DICOM Application System” on page 93

4. “Configuring the Centricity DICOM Application Server (DAS)” on page 93

13-2: Enabling the DICOM Query Retrieve Icon

Use the CAT to enable the DICOM Query Retrieve icon by configuring the client_config
table in the database. To enable DICOM Query Retrieve icon:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2063534-001 Rev 2 89
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the DICOMQueryRetrieve row and click on it.

4. Set the value field to Y to enable DICOM Query Retrieve.

5. Click Save.

When the application restarts, the DICOM Query Retrieve feature is enabled.

Verify that the DICOM Query Retrieve button is available in the application.

13-3: Configuring Workstation Properties

Use this section to configure the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file.

13-3-1: Setting the Workstation SCU AE Title

To set the workstation SCU AE title:

1. Open the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file and find the DICOM Query Retrieve
SCU AE TITLE property.

2. Set this value to accommodate your site’s needs.

The default for this property is CWS-SCU. Use a unique AE Title, such as the client
ID_SCU.

Example: If the workstation’s client ID is cws, set the AE Title to CWS_SCU.

# DICOM Query Retrieve SCU AE TITLE

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.DICOMQuery.SCU_AETi
tle=CWS_SCU

3. Save the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file.

Note: The port number for all workstation DICOM Query Retrieve SCUs are set to 104.

13-3-2: Setting the Maximum Number of AE Titles

By default the maximum number of query locations is set to 5. If the site requires more
than 5 locations, you can increase the locations with the procedure below.

1. Open the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file and find the DICOM Query

Maximum Number of AETitles property.

This value is set to 5 as the default.

# DICOM Query Maximum Number of AETitles

2063534-001 Rev 2 90
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.DICOMQuery.maxNumbe
rofAETitles=5

2. Set this value to accommodate your needs.

Note: This property must be set to at least 1 to enable the workstation to perform queries.

3. Save the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file.

13-3-3: Configuring Query SCP or Query Location Options

Note: The Query Service Class Provider (SCP), or Query Location, is the 3rd Party DICOM
Application System (Radworks).

Set one configuration for each query location as described below:

1. Open the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file and find the QUERY SCP or QUERY
LOCATIONS CONFIGURATIONS properties.

2. Set the location for Configuration 1. Edit the following properties:

 Hostname (Name)

 AE Title

 IP Address

 Port Number

Note: When setting the DICOM Query Locations, you must use valid values. The values
shown below are only examples.

# DICOM Query Location configuration‐1

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.QueryRetrieveDialog.SCP
_HostName1=EA_ARCHIVE

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.DICOMQuery.SCP_AETitle1
=AE_EAVNV

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.DICOMQuery.SCP_IPAddres
s1=3.28.74.119

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.DICOMQuery.SCP_portNum1
=104

3. Set any additional configurations. Number these configurations appropriately.

2063534-001 Rev 2 91
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

# DICOM Query Location configuration‐ 2

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.QueryRetrieveDialog.SCP
_HostName2=RADWORKS

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.DICOMQuery.SCP_AETitle2
=AE_RAD4B

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.DICOMQuery.SCP_IPAddres
s2=3.28.79.22

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.DICOMQuery.SCP_portNum2
=3140

4. Save the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file.

13-3-4: Enabling the Retrieve Button

To enable the retrieve button:

1. Open the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file and find the DICOM Query Retrieve
button property.

#DICOM Query Retrieve button

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.QueryRetrieveDialog.ret
rieveButtonEnabled=false

2. Set this value to true to enable the button.

3. Save the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file.

13-3-5: Setting the Move Destination

To set the move destination:

1. Open the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file and find the DICOM Retrieve Move
Destination property.

# DICOM Retrieve Move Destination

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.queryretrieve.RetrieveCMoveJdtSCU.mov
eDestination=GEPACS

2. Set the destination to move the files to the AE title of the DAS that is connected to
your workstation’s database.

3. Save the DICOMQueryRetrieve.properties file.

2063534-001 Rev 2 92
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

13-4: Configuring a 3rd Party DICOM Application System

The 3rd Party DICOM Application System can be any DICOM Q/R SCP application, such
as a Radworks or Enterprise Archive. If necessary, configure these systems with the
DICOM information, such as AE Title, IP Address, and Port Number of the workstation.

You should also configure the Centricity DAS DICOM information to send the study/series
information when a retrieve is performed.

Refer to the documentation for your DICOM Application System for specific configuration
procedures.

13-5: Configuring the Centricity DICOM Application Server (DAS)

Configure the DAS to accept studies and series from the 3rd Party DICOM Applications.

Refer to the Servers Service Manual for specific procedures for configuring DAS options.

Section 14: Configuring Study Info Display Format

This section describes how to configure the study information displayed in the Image View
Area of the workstation. The configuration applies to the value that displays between the
patient name and the study date on the layout title bar. You must configure this option if
the user wants to view different data on the layout title bar.

To configure study info display format:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file:

2. The following properties must be set for the configurable layout title bar feature to
work correctly:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.BaseLayoutButtonToolbar.
ConfigurableToolbarText=RISID

3. Edit the file based on the options in Table 13-7.

With these properties, the user can configure which value displays on the layout title
bar between the patient name and the study date. The default value is RISID.

Table 13-7: Study Info Display Format

Valid Values Property Description Example of Layout Title Bar

RISID Patient ID (or Medical Record Number) Smith, John (85470123) Sep 28, 2001 19:42:00

LASTFOUR Last four characters of Patient ID Smith, John (0123) Sep 28, 2001 19:42:00

DATEOFBIRTH Date of birth Smith, John (02-05-1981) Sep 28, 2001 19:42:00

SEX Patient’s sex Smith, John (Male) Sep 28, 2001 19:42:00

2063534-001 Rev 2 93
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-7: Study Info Display Format (Continued)

Valid Values Property Description Example of Layout Title Bar

ORDERNUMBER Order or Accesssion Number Smith, John (156456) Sep 28, 2001 19:42:00

BLANK Only displays Patient name and Exam date Smith, John Sep 28, 2001 19:42:00

4. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

Section 15: Configuring the Series Hot Zone and the Comp Hot Zone

This topic includes the following tasks:

 Configuring the Series and Comp Hot Zone Display

 Changing the Number of Exams Displayed in the Hot Zone Menu

 Setting the Hot Zone Buttons as Left- or Right-Justified

 Updating the Comp Hot Zone Menu

15-1: Configuring the Series and Comp Hot Zone Display

You can configure the Series and Comp hot zones to stop displaying when you click an
area of the screen outside of the hot zone, or when you move the cursor outside of the hot
zone.

To configure the Series and Comp hot zone display:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2. Add the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.picasso.HotZone.hideDropdownMenuOnceMouseIsO
utOfMenuArea=false

3. Enter one of the following values:

 false—The hot zone stops displaying when you click an area of the screen
outside of the hot zone. This is the default for the property.

 true—The hot zone stops displaying when you move the cursor outside of the hot
zone.

4. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

15-2: Changing the Number of Exams Displayed in the Hot Zone Menu

The default maximum number of series that can be displayed in the Series hot zone is 20.
You can configure this to meet your site’s needs.

2063534-001 Rev 2 94
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

To change the number of exams that can display in the Series hot zone menu:

1. Open Tools Editor and find the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.BaseLayoutButtonToolbar.max
NumSeriesInSeriesHotzone=20

2. Change the value from 20 to another desired value.

The default maximum number of comparison exams that can be displayed in the Comp
hot zone is 20. You can configure this to meet your site’s needs.

To change the number of exams that can display in the Comp hot zone menu:

1. Open Tools Editor and find the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.BaseLayoutButtonToolbar.max
NumExamsInCompHotzone=20

2. Change the value from 20 to another desired value.

Note: For more information on using the Centricity Tools Editor, refer to “Tools Editor” on
page 263.

15-3: Setting the Hot Zone Buttons as Left- or Right-Justified

The Series hot zone button and the Comp hot zone button are left-justified, and the
navigation buttons (<<, <, >, >>) are on the right-hand side of the hot zone buttons.

The property that controls whether the Series and Comp hot zone buttons are right-
justified or left-justified, with its default value of true, is as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.BaseLayoutButtonToolbar.Lef
tAdjustedToolbar=true

If you set the property to false as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.BaseLayoutButtonToolbar.Lef
tAdjustedToolbar=false

then the Series and Comp hot zone buttons will be right-justified, and the navigation
buttons will appear on the left-hand side of the hot zone buttons.

15-4: Updating the Comp Hot Zone Menu

15-4-1: Suppressing Cancelled, Zero Image, and Offline Exams

To suppress exams from the Comp hot zone menu:

1. Using the Tools Editor, follow Table 13-8 to determine which combination of exams to
suppress:

2063534-001 Rev 2 95
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-8: Suppressing Exams from the Comp Hot Zone Menu

To suppress these exams: Set this platinum property value to false:

Cancelled exams com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeCancell

Zero image exams edZeroImagedOfflineExams=false
Offline exams

Cancelled exams com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeCancell

Zero image exams edZeroImagedOnlineExams=false
Online exams

Cancelled exams com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeCancell

Exams with images edWithImagesOfflineExams=false
Offline exams

Cancelled exams com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeCancell

Exams with images edWithImagesOnlineExams=false
Online exams

Non-cancelled exams com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeNonCa

Zero image exams ncelledZeroImagedOfflineExams=false
Offline exams

Non-cancelled exams com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeNonCa

Zero image exams ncelledZeroImagedOnlineExams=false
Online exams

Non-cancelled exams com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeNonCa

Exams with images ncelledWithImagesOfflineExams=false
Offline exams

15-4-2: Obsolete Platinum Properties

The platinum properties defined in Table 13-8 have made the following three platinum
properties obsolete:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeZe
roImageComp

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeCa
ncelledComp

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ExamLayoutManager.includeOf
flineComp

15-4-3: Disabling the Show All Historical Exams Option

To disable the Show All Historical Exams option on the Comp hot zone menu:

1. Using the Tools Editor, set the following property to false:

2063534-001 Rev 2 96
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.BaseLayoutButtonToolbar.ena
bleShowCompFeature=false

Section 16: Configuring Index Color LUT

Default index color LUTs are defined in the platinum.properties file. You can, however,
create new LUT identifiers, apply a LUT identifier to a modality, apply presets, or apply
default or user-defined LUT identifiers to a procedure code.

The index color LUTs are typically applied to NM and PT exam types. However, you can
apply configuration settings to any exam type. When a “preset” is defined, these preset
LUTs are displayed in the Image menu when an exam for that modality is viewed. The
user can also apply a LUT to a selected image using the Ctrl+Alt+# key shortcut.

When you create user-defined index LUTs, the LUT itself is contained in a file in the
IndexColorLUTManager.lutDirectory=%PLAT_HOME%\support\luts directory.

Default LUTs are used for modalities, presets, and procedure codes unless another LUT is
assigned, as described below.

A LUT Identifier refers to index color LUTs in the properties file. It consists of the following:

 Identifier—any unique string. It is generally some descriptive term for the LUT, for
example hotiron

 Label—the locale-specific name of the LUT that is visible to the user in the application
in menu labels

 Filename—a reference to the actual file that contains the LUT data

To localize the LUTs, only the Label needs to be changed. The Identifier and Filename can
remain constant.

When a LUT Identifier is defined, it is then available for use in the property file wherever a
LUT needs to be specified.

16-1: Creating a New LUT Identifier

To create a new LUT identifier:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file:

2. Enter the following commands and press [Enter]:

IndexColorLUTManager.lutidentifier.Label=labelname

IndexColorLUTManager.lutidentifier.Filename=lutFileName.txt

2063534-001 Rev 2 97
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Where lutidentifier is the LUT Identifier you are defining, labelname is the locale-
specific name of the LUT, and lutFileName.txt is the name as the file that contains the
LUT data.

Example: If you want to create a new label called testcolor", with Label "Test
Color" and Filename "testcolor.txt" enter the commands as follows:

IndexColorLUTManager.testcolor.Label=Test Color

IndexColorLUTManager.testcolor.Filename=testcolor.txt

When you create your LUT identifier text file, it is saved in the
IndexColorLUTManager.lutDirectory=%PLAT_HOME%\support\luts directory.

Example: When you create a LUT identifier called Test Color, the file is saved as
follows:

IndexColorLUTManager.lutDirectory= %PLAT_HOME%\support\luts\testcolor.txt

16-2: Adding a LUT Identifier to a Modality

To add a LUT identifier to a modality:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file:

2. Enter the following command and press [Enter]:

IndexColorLUTManager.<xx>.<LUTy>=<lutidentifier>

Where:

 XX—the modality identifier, such as NM for Nuclear Medicine

 LUTy—one of the LUTs available for a given modality

 lutidentifier—a default or user-defined LUT identifier.

Example: If you want to add a user-defined LUT with lutidentifier "testcolor" to the Nuclear Medicine
modality, enter the command as follows:

IndexColorLUTManager.NM.LUT1=testcolor

16-3: Adding a Preset to a Modality

To add a preset to a modality:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file:

2. Enter the following command:

IndexColorLUTManager.<xx>.<Presety>=<lutidentifier>

Where:

2063534-001 Rev 2 98
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 XX—the modality identifier, such as NM for Nuclear Medicine

 Presety—one of the presets available for a given modality

(y = 0 through 9 only)

 lutidentifier—default or user-defined LUT identifier.

Example: If you want to add a user-defined LUT with lutidentifier "testcolor" to the
Nuclear Medicine modality, enter the command as follows:

IndexColorLUTManager.NM.Preset1=testcolor

Note: If at least one preset is left unassigned, it can be used to remove an applied LUT.

16-4: Adding a LUT to a Procedure Code

To add a LUT to a procedure code:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file:

2. Enter the following command:

IndexColorLUTManager.<xx>.Procedure.<yy>=<lutidentifier>

Where:

 XX—the modality identifier, such as NM for Nuclear Medicine

 yy—one of the procedure codes defined for the hospital, available for a given modality

 lutidentifier—default or user-defined LUT identifier.

Example: If you want to add a user-defined LUT with lutidentifier "testcolor" to the
Bone Scan procedure code, defined as 02 at your hospital, in the Nuclear
Medicine modality:

IndexColorLUTManager.NM.Procedure.02=testcolor

16-5: Testing Non-linear Modality LUT Application

You can test if the application of a non-linear modality LUT from an image header or a
Gray Scale Presentation State (GSPS) object is causing an image quality problem by
assigning the value of the following property to false:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.DICOMLUTReader.enableNonLinearModality
LUT=true

Setting the value to false will disable support for non-linear modality LUTs in the image
headers and therefore should be set false only for testing purposes.

2063534-001 Rev 2 99
Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 17: Changing Magnification Values Appearance

This section describes how to change the property that controls how the magic glass
magnification values and the maximum percentage values appear on the Utilities tab.

In some language configurations, the magnification of the magic glass numbers combines
with the maximum percentage value. For example, a magic glass number of 50 and a
maximum percentage value of 35% appears as 5030%.

If this appears on your system, use the following procedure to change the affected
property:

1. Open Tools Editor and locate the magicGlassSliderPreferredWidth entry.

2. Enter the user preferred value in the Custom column.

(The default value is 350.)

Section 18: Configuring Cross-Reference Line Printing

This procedure describes how to enable cross-reference printing of related images from
the workstation to CDPS printers.

This feature is disabled by default and works only when printing to CDPS printers. If
printing of cross-referenced images is attempted to a PCS printer, the print request causes
the PCS applications to error.

To enable cross-reference printing from the workstation, a new workstation property must
be created with the parameter value set to true.

Note: A print request with cross-reference lines sent to a PCS causes PCS to crash until
that print request has been removed from the print queue.

To avoid sending a cross-reference print job to the PCS cameras, a second new
workstation property needs to be created and values provided for each PCS supported
camera.

Cross-reference printing is accessed only from the cross-reference portion of the

workstation GUI. The PCS printers will not be displayed for this specific area of the
workstation GUI after they have been added to the exclude list.

18-1: Tools Required

Tools Editor software installed.

18-2: Configuring Cross-Reference Line Printing

To configure cross-reference line printing:

2063534-001 Rev 2 100

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

1. Log on to the workstation as Administrator. If the workstation application is running,

quit the application and prevent it from re-launching.

2. To enable cross-reference printing, edit the platinum_custom properties file to add the
following parameter:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.BaseLayoutButtonToolbar.printXr
efEnabled=true

3. If your site has both CDPS and PCS printers you must now exclude the PCS printers
from servicing these requests. From the CAT, obtain a list of print servers for your
system:

a. Log on to CAT and click Configuration.

b. Select Camera Server.

Result: A list of CameraUIDs displays.

For each camera_uid on the returned list you must know whether it is a PCS or CDPS.

4. Add the following line to the custom_properties file:

com.ge.med.newman.gui.view.ui.PrintFilmDialog.excludeXRefPrinterList={<e
nter the list of PCS printers, separated by commas>}

5. Launch the workstation application and test the printing of cross-referenced images to
CDPS from the HSA workstation. Please refer to the workstation online help for
instructions.

Try to print cross-referenced images to both CDPS (should print OK) and PCS (should
not be available from the list of printers available while in the cross-reference feature
of the Centricity GUI).

6. Resolve all issues before making the feature available system wide.

7. Quit the workstation application and prevent it from launching automatically.

8. Log on to the HSA workstation as Administrator.

9. Use Windows Explorer to navigate to the %PLAT_HOME% directory.

10. Double-click the ToolsEditor.bat file to launch the tool.

11. Log on with a valid Centricity user name and password (not the "sa" account) and
enter the IP address of the IMS database server.

12. Search for the string "Xref" to find the two newly created properties in the
custom_properties file.

13. For one of the two parameters, highlight the cell for the custom properties and then cut
the contents of the cell (<control-x>, <enter>).

14. Highlight the cell under the system column for that property and then paste the
previously copied contents of the cell (<control-v>, <enter>).

15. Repeat for the other property.

2063534-001 Rev 2 101

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

16. Quit the Tools Editor and then re-launch the workstation application and confirm that
the functionality works as desired for this and other workstations.

Note: The scout image will not be printed unless it displays on the screen. (In other
words, if you page up/down and the image is not displayed CDPS will not print the
scout image/lines).

Section 19: Conference Display Protocols (CDP)

19-1: Configuring CDPs

To enable Conference Display Protocols (CDPs):

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the CDP row and click it.

4. Change the value of the property to Y.

5. Click Save.

6. When the application restarts, the CDP feature is enabled. Verify that the following
functions are available in the application:

 Display Conference button displays on the Worklist.

 Save for Conference menu option displays on the Exam Functions menu.

 Setup tab is available on the Utilities palette.

 Delete Conference menu option displays on the Exam Functions Window.

19-2: Deleting CDPs

This section explains how to enable the Delete Conference menu option.

To enable the Delete Conference button:

1. Open the platinum_properties file and find the entry:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.functionbar.ExamToolsPanel.enableDeleteConfe
rence=false

2. Copy the property and paste it to the platinum_custom file.

3. Change the value of the property to true.

2063534-001 Rev 2 102

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

4. Save the file.

Result: When the application restarts, the Delete CDP feature is enabled.

19-3: Automatically Deleting CDPs

To enable automatic deletion of CDPs after a certain period of time:

1. Log on to the CAT tool as administrator.

2. In the Navigation panel, click Administration and then click System Configuration.

3. Select PACS Configuration from the drop-down list and click Conference Object
Keep Alive.

4. Change the value to the number of days that the CDP should remain on the system.

For example, enter 15 to keep the CDPs on the system for 15 days.

The CDP object will be deleted from the system 15 days after the last modification date.

19-4: Configuring the Retention Period for CDPs

To configure the retention period for CDPs:

1. Log in to CAT as the Administrator.

2. In the Navigation panel, under Administration, click Sys. Configuration.

Note: The Sys.Configuration option is available to you only if you have the
CATViewSysConfiguration privilege.

3. In the Select list, select PACS Configuration.

The PACS Configuration window displays a list of available PACS configurations.

4. Find the Conference Object Keep Alive configuration.

The selected configuration’s details are displayed in the System Config section.

a. Edit the configuration’s details as needed.

Note: When modifying configurations, modifications are only possible for the fields
containing black text. Fields with light gray text cannot be changed.

Conference Object Keep Alive The number of days that a Conference Display Protocol (CDP) exists on the
system without any updates made to it, after which the IMS Daemon deletes the
CDP from the system. Default is 30 days. To configure CDPs to never be
deleted, set this value to a high number, such as 500 years (182500).

b. Click Save.

2063534-001 Rev 2 103

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Note: The Save button is enabled only if you have the CATPACSSysConfigUpdate
privilege.

Note: For non-U.S. sites, System Locale Country, System Locale Language, and
Translated Text Encoding Format have to match the site.

5. Restart the middle tier.

Section 20: Default Display Protocols (DDP)

20-1: DDP Layout Description

This section explains how exam groups are matched to Default Display Protocol layouts.

Basically, each group is scored against each layout for parameter matches.

Note: All parameters are currently weighted equally. For detailed information, see
Workstation Online Help Manual, (particularly regarding user setup procedures).

Basically, each group is scored against each layout for parameter matches.

20-1-1: IGscore Table

To populate a DDP, the IGscore Table class manages the table that matches image series
with image series rules for the DDP layout.

The get BestMatch method builds the table and assigns the matches as shown:

Table 13-9: DDP Best Match

Series 1 Series 2 Series 3 Series 4 Series 5 Series 6

Layout 1 5 0 0 2 2 1

Layout 2 3 4 3 1 0 0

Layout 3 0 2 0 4 1 3

Each entry in the table is the match score when an image series is matched with the
image series rules for a DDP layout. Matches are based on series parameters (i.e.,
projection, pulse sequence, etc.). The higher the match score, the better the match. In this
example, you are trying to match six image groups to three layouts.

The best match for each layout is determined as follows:

Look for the series with the highest match number for each layout.

When found, take that layout and group out of contention (i.e. assign a match) by setting
all other score values for that row and column to 0. Then repeat this for each successively
lower match score until all layouts are matched, or you reach 0.

2063534-001 Rev 2 104

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

If a particular match score is found in the table more than once, it is okay if it is not in the
same column or row. If it is, look at the appropriate column totals (the lower the totals, the
less likely that group matches), and take the lowest one. If you still do not get a match, the
use the highest match score.

The previous table is a basic example, since each layout has only one group that has the
highest match score for it (layout 1 matches group 1, layout 2 matches group 2, layout 3
matches group 4). For more complex cases where more than one group has the same
score for a given rule, this algorithm can be used.

20-1-2: Grouping Parameters for Different Modalities

Series can be divided into separate groups for viewing. Groups are based on the following
parameters.

Note: For the standard CR DDPs, the groups are actually combined for all the series in the
exam, creating one series.

Table 13-10: Example DDP Grouping Parameters for some Modalities

CR exams: Image Type, View Position

CT exams: Image Type, Contrast Agent, Series Number, Scan Sequence, Nearest
Orthogonal

MR exams: Image Type, Contrast Agent, Echo Time, Repetition Time, Flip Angle,
Series Number, Scan Sequence, Nearest Orthogonal

The Nearest Orthogonal is a derived parameter (values correspond to axial, sagittal,

coronal, or unknown).

20-2: Configuring System DDPs

Use this section to configure System Default Display Protocols (DDPs). Three properties
were added to the Centricity workstation to support the configuration of the system (GE
Default) DDPs that are applied when there are no site or user DDPs for a particular exam
procedure.

These properties can be used instead of saving a site DDP, if the functionality of a
particular system protocol is desired over the default. The properties are:

com.ge.med.platinum.ddp.systemdefault.1=

com.ge.med.platinum.ddp.systemdefault.2=

com.ge.med.platinum.ddp.systemdefault.4=

Each property represents changes to the system default display protocol for the specified
monitor configuration. Only 1, 2, and 4 are supported. All mixed monitor systems default to
the n-1 configuration for default selection.

2063534-001 Rev 2 105

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Values to these properties should be a list of elements separated by commas. Each

element should be formatted as shown below:

Example: To make MR-Stacks the default for all MR on 2 & 4 heads, enter:

com.ge.med.platinum.ddp.systemdefault.2=MR:NoHist:MR‐Stacks‐

NoHist,MR:Hist:MR‐Stacks‐Hist

com.ge.med.platinum.ddp.systemdefault.4=MR:NoHist:MR‐Stacks‐

NoHist,MR:Hist:MR‐Stacks‐Hist

Note: You can add these properties in either the Platinum_custom.properties for all
workstations or push them to the database as a system or user preference using the
Tools Editor.

20-2-1: System DDP Support

The following modalities are supported:

 XA

 DS

 CR

 DX

 MG

 RF

 CT

 MR

 PT

 US

 NM

The following historical types are supported:

 NoHist

 Hist

The current version of the application supports only the System Default Display Protocols.

Note: If the protocol does not apply correctly, verify that the DDP name is a valid system
default. Some System Default Display Protocols are not supported for all monitor
configurations. User and Site protocol names are NOT supported in these properties.

2063534-001 Rev 2 106

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Note: RA1000 workstations should not be used to interpret IODs sent from Vivid7 ultrasound
modalities.

20-3: Enabling Overwrite of a DDP Name

By default, the workstation does not allow you to overwrite a DDP or re-save a DDP with
the same name. If you try to save the DDP with the same name, the warning message,
"You currently have a Display Protocol with that name" displays. You should use different
names to distinguish the DDPs. You can delete a DDP and then recreate it with the same
name, but by default you cannot save a DDP with a name that already exists.

To enable a user to overwrite a DDP name, modify the following property as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.ddp.DDPSave.overwriteDDP=true

By default this property is set to false.

20-4: Configuring Procedure_Ckey in a DDP Tree

Use this section to configure the workstation to use the Procedure Ckey in a DDP Tree.

Note: The site must have all workstations upgraded to at least Centricity 2.0 before this
feature can be turned on.

20-4-1: Important Information About This Procedure

Log off all RA1000 users and prevent them from logging in until after this procedure is run.
Users whose applications are not stopped by physically walking to the workstation and
logging them out may reconnect afterwards and store bad DDPs, so each RA1000
workstation application needs to be stopped.

INSTALLED BASE

Sites with Workstation versions lower than 2.01.09.29 (pre-2.0.2 and 2.1.0.0 [2.1M4])
should NOT run the "Start DDP Tree Modify" conversion script. If the users have already
built DDPs and the workstation version is lower than 2.01.09.29, please upgrade first.

If you will be using the ddppush.bat file, ensure that the file you are using is the version
from the Workstation 2.1.0.0 release or later.

NEW SITES

If it is a new site and no DDPs have been built yet, it is OK to set the CAT tool
DDPTreeUseProcCKey parameter to Y, no matter what version RA1000 is being used, but
do not run "Start DDP Tree Modify" conversion script if the workstation version is lower
than 2.01.09.29. For all new sites, this parameter (in Client Config) should be turned on for
all sites prior to any DDPs being built. When this parameter is set and the DDPs are built,
there is no way to undo the conversion.

2063534-001 Rev 2 107

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

20-4-2: Backing Up DDPs and DDP Tree

Back up the DDPs and DDP tree by copying the ddp and ddp_tree IMS database tables to
temporary database tables:

1. Log in as sybase, or in a terminal window become the sybase user:

# su ‐ sybase

2. Enter the following command:

$ isql ‐Usa ‐w132

3. Enter the sa password.

4. Enter the following commands to copy the tables:

1> select * into tempdb..ddp from ddp

2> select * into tempdb..ddp_tree from ddp_tree

3> go

Note: When the server or sybase is restarted, these tables will be lost. If you need to keep
the data longer, you need to bcp the data out to a more permanent location.

2063534-001 Rev 2 108

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

To have these options turned on, the customer or their authorized

representative must sign this agreement and fax the signed copy to GEHC IITS
Regulatory Affairs department, Barrington, IL at 847-277-5240.

Only a GE Field Support engineer can disable/enable the options.

1. The Institution named below acknowledges the information noted in this

section, which the authorized and medically trained representatives of the
Institution have read carefully.
Signature Form

2. The Institution hereby instructs you to enable the Procedure Ckey in DDP
Tree options as indicated by the signature.

_________________________________________ __________

PRINTED AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE/TITLE SIGNATURE

_________________________________________ __________

INSTITUTION DATE

20-4-3: Important Information About This Procedure

Log off all RA1000 users and prevent them from logging in until after this procedure is run.
Users whose applications are not stopped by physically walking to the workstation and
logging them out may reconnect afterwards and store bad DDPs, so each RA1000
workstation application needs to be stopped.

If you will be using the ddppush.bat file, ensure that the file you are using is the version
from the Workstation 2.1.0.0 release or later.

If you are upgrading to PACS 2.1.2.1 or later, when your PACS version is 2.0.2 or 2.1.0.0
(2.1M4), or with workstation versions lower than 2.01.09.29, when you upgrade the
workstations, you should NOT configure the workstation to use the Procedure_Ckey in
DDP Tree until after you have upgraded the rest of the PACS system. When this
parameter is set and the DDPs are built, there is no way to undo the conversion.

2063534-001 Rev 2 109

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

20-4-4: Configuring Procedure_Ckey in a DDP Tree

Scenario 1—Site upgraded to 2.1.3.1 or later from a lower version

1. On an RA1000 that is configured to connect to the ISU, launch the DDP

Administration Tool by opening C:\platinum\ddppush.bat, and log in as username
ddpadmin.

2. On the File menu, click Modify DDPTree

Result: A new screen displays with the title DDP Tree Modify.

3. Click Start DDP Tree Modify, which is on the lower right of this screen.

This step usually takes less than 10 minutes. To see whether the conversion is finished:

a. Navigate to C:\platinim\service\logs with Windows Explorer.

b. Use View > Details, and View > Refresh, and wait until the file size of DDPAdmin
stops growing.

c. When the file size stops increasing, open it with a text editor. The conversion is
done when C:\platinum\service\logs\DDPAdmin.log contains the message DDP
trees were modified! at the end of the log.

4. Login to CAT Tool as an administrator.

5. On the Navigation panel, click Administration>Client Config.

6. Click the DDPTreeUseProcCKey row.

7. Change the value of the property to Y.

8. Click Save.

The next time you login, your workstation will use procedure ckey instead of
procedure description in ddp tree.

Scenario 2—New installation of CWS 2.1.3.1 or later

1. Login to CAT Tool as an administrator.

2. On the Navigation panel, click Administration > Client Config.

3. Click the DDPTreeUseProcCKey row.

4. Change the value of the property to Y.

5. Click Save.

The next time you login, your workstation will use procedure ckey instead of
procedure description in ddp tree.

2063534-001 Rev 2 110

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

20-4-5: Deleting Temporary Database Tables

To delete the temporary database tables when you are satisfied with the new DDPs:

1. Log in as sybase, or, in a terminal window become the sybase user:

# su ‐ sybase

2. Enter the following command:

$ isql ‐Usa ‐w132

3. Enter the sa password.

4. Enter the following commands:

1> drop table temdb..ddp

2> drop table tempdb..ddp_tree

3> go

20-5: Enabling Users to Save Site DDPs

Users can save a site DDP from their own user login account if they have the
CreateSiteDDP privilege and if the CreateSiteDDP property is enabled. By default this
property is set to false.

To enable users to save site DDPs from their own user login account, modify the following
property as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.WorkManager.allowSaveSiteDDP=true

If this property is set to true and the user has the CreateSiteDDP privilege, then a Site
DDP check box displays in the Save DDP screen. This allows users to save a site DDP
without logging in as a DDP system administrator.

Section 21: Configuring the All Images Group

All Images Grouping—each exam includes an "All Images" series in the series hot zone
and layout manager. The All Images series combines all images for an exam into one
displayable series. The All Images series can also be saved with any display protocol.

The following properties need to be configured to support the "All images" group:

 To configure the label of all images group anywhere it displays in a list, such as the
series hot zone menu, modify the following property as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.imagegrouping.ImageGroup.allImagesLabel=All
images

2063534-001 Rev 2 111

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 To configure the label used in the system overlay display of the series number for the
all images group, modify the following property as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.allIma
gesGroupLabel=ALL

 To configure the label used in the system overlay display of the series number for the
significant images group, modify the following property as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.sigIma
gesGroupLabel=SIG

 To configure the label for frame number when appended to the image number
displayed in the system overlay, modify the following property as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.frameN
umLabel=F:

 To configure the property to prevent the "All images" group from being created for a
modality, modify the following property as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.imagegrouping.excludeModalityFromAllImagesG
roup=

 To configure the property to specify image order in the all images group for a mixed
modality exam, modify the following property as follows:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.imagegrouping.allImagesModalityOrder=CR,CT,
DX,MG,MR,NM,OT,PT,RF,RT,US,XA

Note: The combineCRCompExams, compCRprocsNotCombined, and

combineMixedModalityGroups properties formerly used by the combine all code
have been removed from Platinum.properties. Below is the section of
Platinum.properties that was removed:

Section 22: Configuring a Remote Reading Workstation

Use this section to configure a remote reading workstation:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Configuration.

3. Select Workstation from the Select drop-down menu.

4. To create a new workstation client, click Create New. To modify an existing

workstation client, select the Client ID from the list of existing clients.

5. When a workstation client is selected, the workstation information is populated.

6. Click the Workstation Type drop-down menu and select R (Remote).

2063534-001 Rev 2 112

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

7. To set up an alias for the remote reading workstation's client ID, enter the alias value/
name in the Alias ID field.

Result: The alias displays on the remote reading workstation's send dialog.

8. Log on to the workstation as Administrator.

9. Change the following line in the \plantinum\support\ServerInfo.properties file.

From:

com.ge.med.platinum.profile.WorkstationProfile.workSourceType0=com.g
e.med.platinum.work.isu.CotsISURepository

to:

com.ge.med.platinum.profile.WorkstationProfile.workSourceType0=com.g
e.med.platinum.work.isu.RemoteWSRepository

10. Configure the Windows scheduler to set up the daemon process schedule by double-
clicking on the following:

\platinum\service\config\setRMWSSchedule.bat

Note: If you want to change the frequency of the daemon process, modify the time entry
in this file. By default, the daemon process runs at the beginning of every hour.

Note: If you need to delete the scheduled daemon process job, double-click the
following file.

\PLAT_HOME\service\config\deleteRMWSSchedule.bat

11. Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the platinum directory.

12. Double-click launcher.cfg.

13. Enter the following command anywhere before the last line of the file:

‐DproxySet=true ‐Dhttp.proxyHost=<address of proxy server> ‐

Dhttp.proxyPort=80

Where <address of proxy server> is the user’s proxy server address. For example:
http-proxy.supply.ge.com.

14. Save and close the file.

Section 23: Configuring the Third Party Applications Menu

Use this section to configure the Third Party Applications menu in the Task Bar of
workstation. The menu is accessed from the ">>" button on the Task Bar.

The Third Party Applications menu is pre-configured to contain the following third-party
applications:

2063534-001 Rev 2 113

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 Microsoft Internet Explorer

 Microsoft Word

 Microsoft Excel

 Microsoft PowerPoint

 Centricity Exam Manager (in a web browser)

Note: Only load approved third-party software on the workstation platform. Loading non-
approved third-party software on the workstation can cause system degradation.

Note: When Centricity is run, the menu will only contain those applications that are actually
installed on the workstation. For example, if Microsoft PowerPoint is not installed on
the workstation, the Microsoft PowerPoint will not be one of the menu items.

23-1: Adding Applications to the Third Party Applications Menu

To add applications to third party applications menu:

1. Log on as Administrator.

2. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file:

3. Add properties to the file as specified below:

a. Determine the total number of configured third-party applications. Centricity 4.0

comes with 5 pre-configured applications as specified above.

For example, if you are adding one more application to the default pre-configured
menu, the total number of configured applications will be 6. If you are adding two more
applications, the total number of configured applications will be 7, and so on.

b. Enter the following line at the end of the file:

applications.external.number=<xx>

where xx is the total number of configured applications.

c. Assign a number to each application that you are adding.

Application numbers are assigned in the order that the applications are added. For
example, the 5 pre-configured applications are assigned the numbers 1 through 5.
The first application you add to the pre-configured applications must be assigned as
number 6. The next one you add after that must be assigned as number 7, and so on.

d. For each Third Party Application you are adding, add the following line at the end
of the file:

applications.external.name.<yy>=<application_name>

where:

 <yy>—the number you assigned to this application in Step c

2063534-001 Rev 2 114

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 application_name—the name of the application you are adding.

e. For each Third Party Application you are adding, add the following line at the end
of the file:

applications.external.path.<yy>=<C:\\path\\exe_file>

where:

 yy—the number you assigned to this application in Step c

 C:\\path\\exe_file—the absolute path to the executable file that can be used to run
the application. The executable file can be a .exe, .bat, or .cmd file.

Note: Folder delimiters in the path must be specified as two backslashes (\\) and not
one.

f. OPTIONAL: If there are two possible locations where the executable file can exist,
and you would like to specify the second possible location, add the following line:

applications.external.path.<yy>.secondPossibleLocation=<C:\\path\\ex
e_file>

where:

 yy—the number you assigned to this application in Step c

 C:\\path\\exe_file—the absolute path to the second executable file that can be

used to run the application.

4. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

5. Restart workstation for changes to take effect.

Note: Versions of Centricity 2.0 and higher do not support configuring parameters or
arguments to be used with the executable file when invoking it to run the
application.

23-2: Configuring URLs to Web Applications (“Open API”)

Note: This feature is sometimes called Open API.

To configure the number of URLs appearing in the third party application menu:

1. Navigate to the Platinum/support/Platinum_custom.properties file.

2. Add properties to the end of the file as specified below:

a. Add the following code to configure N number of URLs:

applications.external.OpenAPI.NUMBER‐OF‐URLS=N

where N is the number of URLs to be configured.

2063534-001 Rev 2 115

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

b. Add the following codes to configure a URL http://www.ServerName.com/ with

menu label ‘XXXX’ and Tool Tip as ‘YYYY’:

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n=http://www.ServerName.com/
index.html

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐DISPLAYTEXT=<XXXX>

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐TOOLTIPTEXT=<YYYY>

Where ‘n’ is the number of the URL being configured. ‘n’ takes a value of 1,2, 3,....
when configuring the first, second, third URL and so on.

c. Add the following code to configure N number of arguments to be passed with the
URL:

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐ARGUMENTS‐NUMELEMENTS=N

where ‘n’ is the number of the URL being configured

d. Add the following codes to assign the Accession Number, MRN, and Order
Number as parameters to the URL:

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐NAME‐1=ACCESSIONNUMBER

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐DEFAULT‐VALUE‐
1=<ACCESSIONNUMBER>

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐NAME‐2=MRN

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐DEFAULT‐VALUE‐2=<MRN>

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐NAME‐3=ORDERNUMBER

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐DEFAULT‐VALUE‐
3=<ORDERNUMBER>

URLs can be configured to pass different number of arguments. A URL having a

combination of ACCESSION NUMBER, MRN, or ORDERNUMBER with other
constant Arguments can also be configured. However, the values for ACCESSION
NUMBER, ORDERNUMBER, and MRN are always taken from the opened exam,
when a user clicks on the URL.

The MRN number can be either the Medical Record Number or the RIS Patient ID. Its
value is taken from the database.pacs.field.source.medicalrecordnumber property in
the Platinum Properties. RIS Patient ID is taken as the default value for the MRN
number.

Note: The ACCESSIONNUMBER, ORDERNUMBER, and MRN should be coded in

angle brackets (</>). Otherwise their values will not be substituted from the exam.

e. Add the following codes to configure Google with a search Criteria:

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n=http://www.google.com/search

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐DISPLAYTEXT=www.Google.com

2063534-001 Rev 2 116

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐TOOLTIPTEXT=Search for GE
Healthcare

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐ARGUMENTS‐NUMELEMENTS=3

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐NAME‐1=hl

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐DEFAULT‐VALUE‐1=en

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐NAME‐2=q

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐DEFAULT‐VALUE‐2=GE
Healthcare

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐NAME‐3=btnG

applications.external.OpenAPI.URL‐n‐PARAMETER‐DEFAULT‐VALUE‐3=Google
Searches

Section 24: Configuring Image Display Options

Use the following section to set the following display options:

 “Configuring Supported and Unsupported SOP Class UID Checking” on page 117

 “Configuring Default Window Level Calculation” on page 118

 “Configuring Workstation for Fuji CR Image Display” on page 120

24-1: Configuring Supported and Unsupported SOP Class UID Checking

The workstation displays the following message when it encounters an image type it does
not support for display:

Image Type Not Supported For Display

This occurs on a per image basis and is in addition to the supported modality configuration
information done on the exam level.

The default configuration of the workstation displays this message for any private (i.e. not
a DICOM defined) image type. If the SOP Class UID (tag 0008,0016) in the image header
doesn't start with the string "1.2.840.10008.", then it is a private image type.

If there are private image types, you must configure the workstation to display them. Use
the following properties:

1. Open Tools Editor.

2. Find and set the following properties:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.MedImageDE.numPrivSupportedSOPClassUIDs=TTT
T

2063534-001 Rev 2 117

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.platinum.work.MedImageDE.privSupportedSOPClassUID.NNNN=XX
XX

Where:

 TTTT—the number of private SOP Class UIDs being listed to support.

 NNNN—the index starting from 0 of the private SOP Class to support.

 XXXX—the SOP Class UID of the private image type to support.

If there are public DICOM defined image types that the workstation should not attempt to
display, configure this information with the following properties:

1. Open Tools Editor.

2. Find and set the following properties:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.MedImageDE.numNonSupportedSOPClassUIDs=TTTT

com.ge.med.platinum.work.MedImageDE.nonSupportedSOPClassUID.NNNN=XXX
X

Where:

 TTTT—the number of SOP Class UIDs being listed to not display.

 NNNN—the index starting from 0 of the SOP Class to not display.

 XXXX—the SOP Class UID of the image type to not display.

To disable this entire SOP Class UID checking mechanism, set the following property to
true (default value is false):

1. Open Tools Editor.

2. Find and set the following property to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.MedImageDE.disableSOPClassSupportCheck=true

24-2: Configuring Default Window Level Calculation

Several options are available to configure the default window level calculation code in the
workstation. This code is used when an image sent to the PACS does not have any
window level info (no vOI LUT info). This means there are no 0028, 1050 & 0028, 1051
tags and no 0028, 3010 tag in the image header.

To enable the window level per modality:

1. Open Tools Editor.

2. Find and set the following property to false:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.useDefaultPresetWLXX

2063534-001 Rev 2 118

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

where XX is the modality code.

Note: If this property is set to true, then the

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.WLPresetController.XXPreset1Window and
com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.WLPresetController.XXPreset1Level
properties are used for the default window level value for modality XX.

Example: com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.useDefaultPresetWLCR=true

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.WLPresetController.CRPreset1Window=100
0

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.WLPresetController.CRPreset1Level=500

Otherwise with useDefaultPresetWLXX set to false for the modality, the following
properties may be used to control the sampling and calculation of a default window level
value for an image:

To set the window level value to display the entire pixel range:

1. Open Tools Editor.

2. Find and set the following property to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.DefaultLUT.useFullPixelRange.XX=tr
ue

where XX is the modality code.

Example: com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.useDefaultPresetWLCR=false

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.DefaultLUT.useFullPixelRange.CR=true

For the CR, XA, DX, and MG modalities, there are two algorithms that can be used to
sample and calculate a default window level value. The default is to take a minimal sample
of the center row and center column of the image and calculate a window level value from
that data.

An alternative is to take a larger sample (optionally the whole image) and calculate a value
with that. To use the alternate algorithm for these modalities, set the following property to
true:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.DefaultLUT.useHistCalcXRayWL=true

For an example of how to configure the workstation to use this alternate algorithm to
sample the entire image for the CR modality, see the section on Configuring Workstation
for Fuji CR Image Display.

For more information on using the Centricity Tools Editor, refer to “Tools Editor” on
page 263.

2063534-001 Rev 2 119

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

24-3: Configuring Workstation for Fuji CR Image Display

Some Fuji CR images are sent to the PACS without any window level info (i.e. no
0028,1050 & 0028,1051 tags and no 0028,3010 tag). If the images do not display properly
on the workstation.

To correct the settings on a Fuji CR Image Display:

1. Open Tools Editor.

2. Find and set the following properties:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.useDefaultPresetWLCR=false

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.DefaultLUT.useHistCalcXRayWL=true

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.DefaultLUT.percentOfHistogramInWin
dow.CR=100

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.lut.DefaultLUT.percentOfImageAreaInHis
togram.CR=100.

Note: For more information on using the Centricity Tools Editor, refer to “Tools Editor” on
page 263.

Section 25: Configuring Display Performance

The Display Performance parameter improves the display performance for Centricity 4.0
backend servers by using optimized server queries.

If your backend server is Centricity 2.0 or earlier, then this parameter has no effect since
there are no optimized queries in these servers.

To enable Display Perfomance changes on the workstation.

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the PerformanceDisplay row and click it.

4. Change the value of the property to Y.

5. Click Save.

Section 26: Enabling the Right-Click Menus

The workstation includes several right-click menus to increase efficiency in the workflow.
Right-click options are available throughout the application including on the WorkModes
palette, Patient Jacket palette, Image Area. Most functionality available from either the tool
buttons or the Exam Functions menus are now available on the right click menus. These

2063534-001 Rev 2 120

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

menus are context-sensitive, meaning that the menu only displays appropriate actions
depending on where you are in the application and workflow.

For more information on using right-click menus, refer to the workstation Online help.

To enable the right-click menus on the workstation:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the RightClickMenu row and click it.

4. Change the value of the property to Y.

5. Click Save.

Section 27: Enabling Thumbnails

The workstation can display miniature images, called thumbnails, on the Series hot zone
menu. The image displays to the left of the series name.

To enable Thumbnails on the workstation:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

3. Find the UseThumbnails row and click it.

4. Change the value of the property to Y.

5. Click Save.

Section 28: Enabling Spatial Cursor

Note: This functionality can be used only for images obtained from CT/PET combined
scanner.

The Spatial Cursor provides a simple way to correlate anatomy to functional data on
mixed-modality exams, such as PET/CT. It can also be used as a general navigational aid
for sync-stack, scout-based navigation, and multi-planar navigation for a single-modality
case.

For more information refer to the Workstation Online help.

To enable the Spatial Cursor on the workstation:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Client Config.

2063534-001 Rev 2 121

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

3. Find the SpatialCursor row and click it.

4. Change the value of the property to Y.

5. Click Save.

Section 29: Enabling Auto Zoom of GE Mammo Images

The useBreastROI property provides control over the use of the GE private mammo tags
(0045,1060) and (0045,1061) for the breast ROI. If the private tags are turned on, this
results in the automatic zooming in of GE mammo images so that the breast occupies the
maximum space. By default, these private tags are not used. If the customer wants this
automatic zooming behavior, then you have to configure the useBreastROI property and
set it to true using the Tools Editor.

In Tools Editor, edit the following property to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.MGImageActionManipulator.us
eBreastROI=true

By default, the above property is set to false.

Section 30: Display Support for Additional Modalities

The workstation has a pre-defined set of modalities that are supported for the image
display. This is configurable via the Tools Editor. Refer to “Tools Editor” on page 263.

In the Tools Editor, edit the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.worklist.OpenExamManager.modalitiesSupported
=MR|CT|CR|SC|RF|US|XA|NM|DF|DR|DS|DX|MG|PT|OT

The above property is set as the default.

1. To add a new modality for display, add a '|' character and the modality code. Refer to
“Modality Codes” on page 123.

Example: Supporting IO modality, for display:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.worklist.OpenExamManager.modalitiesSupported
=MR|CT|CR|SC|RF|US|XA|NM|DF|DR|DS|DX|MG|PT|OT|IO

The Workstation can now display all Dental Intra-Oral images with the IO modality
code.

2. To create DDPs for the newer modality exams:

In the Tools Editor, edit the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.worklist.WorkListPanelController.modalitiesS
upported=MR|CT|CR|SC|RF|US|XA|NM|DF|DR|DS|DX|MG

2063534-001 Rev 2 122

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

The above property is set as the default.

To add a new modality for DDP creation, add a '|' character and the modality code.

Example: Supporting IO modality, for DDP creation:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.worklist.WorkListPanelController.modalitiesS
upported=MR|CT|CR|SC|RF|US|XA|NM|DF|DR|DS|DX|MG|IO

30-1: Modality Codes

Table 13-11: Modality Code Descriptions

Modality Code Description

MR Magnetic Resonance

CT Computed Tomography

CR Computed Radiology

SC Screen Capture

RF Radio Fluroscopy

US Ultrasound

XA X-ray Angiography

NM Nuclear Medicine

MG Mammography

PT PET

DS Digital Subtraction Angiography

DX Digital X-ray

DF Digital fluroscopy

DR Digital Radiography

OT Other modalities

IO Dental Intra-oral

Note: RA1000 workstations should not be used to interpret IODs sent from Vivid7 ultrasound
modalities.

2063534-001 Rev 2 123

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 31: Adding Modality Codes to the Worklist Filter

When you enter a modality code in the worklist filter, an error message will display if the
modality code is invalid. You can create/edit a list of supported modality codes on a
workstation.

To add modality codes:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2. Add the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.ColumnFilter.modalitiesSupported=MR|CT|CR|S
C|RF|US|XA|NM|DF|DR|DS|DX|MG|PT|OT|IO|RT

Note: Refer to the Workstation and Exam Manager Operator Manual for a description of the
default modality codes.

3. Include one or more codes that you would like to be valid.

4. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

Section 32: Disabling the Modality Code Check

When you enter a modality code in the worklist filter, the workstation can display an error
message if the modality code is invalid. This worklist filter modality code check can be
disabled.

To disable the modality code check:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2. Add the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.ColumnFilter.checkModality=false

3. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

Section 33: Configuring Cine Options

33-1: Disabling the Scroll Cine Tool

The Scroll Cine tool is enabled by default. To disable the tool:.

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2. Add the following property:

2063534-001 Rev 2 124

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ScrollCineRedirector.enable
ScrollCineTool=false

3. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

33-2: Disabling Manual Cine Tick Marks

By default, the workstation displays tick marks on both sides of the image view area to
indicate the relative position of the image in the stack when you are using the Manual Cine
tool. You can disable these tick marks.

Note: This property does not control tick mark display for the Scroll Cine tool.

To disable Manual Cine tick marks:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2. Add the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.RoamRedirector.enableTickMa
rks=false

3. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

33-3: Configuring Manual Cine Tick Mark Color

You can configure the color of the tick marks that indicate the relative position of the image
in the stack when you are using the Manual Cine tool. The default color is white.

To configure the color of the tick marks:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2. Add the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.ImageView.cinePositionColor=0xFFF
FFF

3. Enter the 3 byte hexadecimal value for the color you want to use.

4. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

33-4: Disabling Cine Tools and Image Navigation in Full Screen Mode

When a region is in full screen display, you can use the Cine tools. Image navigation
(Previous Image and Next Image buttons) is also supported.

To disable the Cine tools and Image Navigation when you are in full screen mode.

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file.

2063534-001 Rev 2 125

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

2. Add the following property:

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.ViewPreferencePanel.disableNewFullSc
reenMode=true

3. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

Section 34: Configuring Region of Interest (ROI)

34-1: Enabling Region of Interest

To enable the Region of Interest (ROI) feature:

1. Navigate to the Platinum.properties or Platinum_custom.properties file.

2. Enter the following code:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.notare.user.showStatonROI=true

Assign false to disable the feature.

The following information is displayed when the with the ROI feature is enabled:

 Area at the bottom of an Oval ROI

 Area at the bottom of a Rectangular ROI

 Area at the bottom of a W/L Rect ROI

 Area at the bottom of an interpolated ROI

 Area at the bottom of a polygon ROI

 Angle at the vertex of an angle ROI

 Length at anchor point of a Line ROI

Note: The image will still display the full statistics information of the ROIs at the bottom right
of the image.

34-2: Configuring ROI Behavior for Workstation

Prior to the 3.0 release, while using the ROI tool on an image, any selected image would
get deselected. Only the image on which the tool is used remains selected.

Effective with 3.0 release, multiple images remain selected when the tool is used on a
particular image.

To deselect the other selected images, set the following property to true as shown:

2063534-001 Rev 2 126

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.images.notare.OverlayRedirector.deselectOthe
rImagesOnOverlayCreation=true

Section 35: Configuring Mark Significant Feature

The Mark Significant feature allows a user to mark images significant in the Image View
Area. The user uses the Significant Image Selection tool present in the Image Toolbar to
mark the images as Significant Images.

To configure the Mark Significant feature:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Sys. Configuration.

3. Select the Pacs Configuration option from the Select drop-down menu.

4. Find the Allow Mark Images As Significant row and click it.

5. Set the value of the property to Y.

6. Click Save.

To disable the Mark Significant feature, set the property value to N.

Disabling the property removes the Significant Image Selection Tool from the Image
Toolbar. It also prevents the images from being marked as Significant automatically when
ROIs are created and does not allow the use of Space Bar shortcut key in cine mode to
mark images significant.

However, images saved as significant when the property was enabled will remain
significant with the SI flag on it.

Section 36: Configuring Image Overlay Elements

Image overlays are the textual elements that are displayed on top of an image and hold
some piece of information about that image. Common examples are the series and image
numbers in the upper left-hand corner or the window and level values in the lower right-
hand corner.

Image overlays are displayed in one of the following two modes:

 Essential Overlay—Essential Overlay displays only the very essential information so

that image view is minimally obstructed.

 Full Overlay—Full Overlay displays all the overlay information for an image and can
be activated by selecting "Image Overlay" from the Image Functions menu (Alt-I
shortcut key) and making sure the image area on screen is large enough by reducing
the image upcount (e.g., 1x1 or 4x1). With Full Overlay detailed, information such as
Patient Name, DOB, Study Date and Time, etc. are displayed.

2063534-001 Rev 2 127

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Use the following property to configure the image overlay for an image:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFact
ory.[M]‐[OM]‐[LOC]‐[#]=[TAG]|[LBL]|[SRC]

where:

 [M]—the modality of the image. Valid values are listed in Table 13-11: Modality Code
Descriptions.

 [OM]—the Overlay Mode. Valid values include ESSENTIAL and FULL.

 [LOC]—the Overlay Location on the Image. Valid values include NORTHWEST,

TOPCENTER, NORTHEAST, RIGHTCENTER, SOUTHEAST, BOTTOMCENTER,
SOUTHWEST, LEFTCENTER, CENTER.

 [#]—the number of overlay elements in that location. Valid values are integers greater
than 0.

 [TAG]—the Attribute Tag which specifies exact image attributes. The image attributes
include DICOM tags and other tag values. For DICOM Tags, concatenate the first and
second 4-digit values.

Note: The DICOM tags of an image header can be viewed by using the Image
Information tool.

 [LBL]—the Overlay Label which is a text describing the attribute. The attribute is
followed by a colon and the attribute value. For example, the image number displays
as Im: 1 where Im is the attribute and 1 is the attribute value.

 [SRC]—the Source of attribute value. Valid values include HEADER and DBASE.

36-1: Adding New Image Overlay Elements

To add a new image overlay element to a location on the image:

 Choose the modality, overlay mode, and overlay location for the images to which the
new overlay elements are to be added to.

 Find and Increment the value of the following property by 1:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFact
ory.[M]‐[OM]‐[LOC]‐NUMELEMENTS

where:

 [M]—the Modality

 [OM]—the Overlay Mode

 [LOC]—the Overlay Location on image

 Select the image attribute that needs to be displayed for the new element. Also
determine its tag, overlay label, and source.

2063534-001 Rev 2 128

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 Add the following property, where [#] is the element number on that location (first
element being 0) and will equal to (NUMELEMENTS-1) for the new element. For
Example, if there were previously 4 elements, the NUMELEMENTS was incremented
it to 5 in the previous step and therefore [#] should be replaced with 4.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFact
ory.[M]‐[OM]‐[LOC]‐[#]=[TAG][LBL]{SRC]

where:

 [TAG]—the Attribute Tag

 [LBL]—the Overlay Label

 [SRC]—the Source of attribute value.

36-2: Configuring Image Overlays for Unsupported Modalities

Centricity uses the configuration of GENERICMODALITY for all unsupported modalities.

However, unsupported modalities can be configured to display desired information.
Supported modalities are currently MR, CR, CT, NM, DX, PT, MG, RF, XA, & US.

To configure image overlays for unsupported modalities:

1. To configure unsupported modalities, assign the modality code of the unsupported

modality to the following code:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFact
ory.modalitiesSupported=[xx],[xx],[xx]......

Where xx is the modality code of the unsupported modality.

2. Find all the overlay properties belonging to GENERICMODALITY, i.e., properties of

the formats:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFact
ory.GENERICMODALITY‐[OM]‐[LOC]‐NUMELEMENTS

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFact
ory. GENERICMODALITY ‐[OM]‐[LOC]‐[#]

3. Copy all these properties and create a new set, replacing GENERICMODALITY with
the code of the unsupported modality. Add this new set of properties to the profile.

4. Add new overlay elements to the unsupported modality properties as described in

Adding New Image Overlay Elements.

2063534-001 Rev 2 129

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 37: Configuring Image Stepping for the Mammography Tile

Feature

Effective with RA1000 Release 4.0, there is a property available for configuring the
whether the image stepping for the Mammography Tile (Mammo Tile) feature is enabled
or not.

The default setting of the property is shown below:

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.MammoPreferencePanel.enableMammoTileStep
=false

Where:

false — the image stepping functionality is turned off and steps are not repeated as
needed when stepping forward or backward

true — the image stepping functionality is turned on and steps are repeated as needed
(when stepping forward, until the last image is displayed in each image region, or when
stepping backward, until the first image is displayed in each image region

37-1: Configuring Attributes of the Image Count Indicator

Effective with RA1000 Release 4.0, properties are available for configuring the image
count indicator when viewing MG images.

37-1-1: Configuring the Location of the Image Count Indicator when Viewing MG
Images in Essential Overlay Mode

Effective with RA1000 Release 4.0, a property is available for configuring the location of
the image count indicator when viewing MG images in essential overlay mode. The image
count indicator is the overlay text that says, for example, “1 of 3”, “2 of 3”, and so forth.

The property is listed below:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.MGSystemOverlayMVC.imageCou
ntIndicatorAdjust=<nn>

Where:

<nn> — A whole number from 0 to 90, which represents a percentage of the distance
away from the center of the viewport that the image count indicator would be shifted
horizontally and away from the breast wall when used with MG images and when in
essential overlay mode. The edge of the viewport is defined as 100% and 0% is defined
as the center of the viewport. Negative numbers are read as a zero value (center of the
viewport). Numbers greater than 90 are read as 90.

The default setting for this property is 65.

The following are examples of a few of the settings that are possible for the image count
indicator when viewing MG images in essential overlay mode.

2063534-001 Rev 2 130

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Illustration 13-2:Image Indicator Count - Property Setting of 65

Illustration 13-3:Image Indicator Count - Property Setting of 85

Illustration 13-4:Image Indicator Count - Property Setting of 0

37-1-2: Property for the Image Count Indicator for the MG ESSENTIAL Overlay

This property is to be changed only if there is a need to resolve a conflict on the MG

ESSENTIAL overlay.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFactory.
MG‐ESSENTIAL‐TOPCENTER‐3=108|NOLABEL|HEADER

Note: As part of resolving a conflict, the corresponding NUMELEMENTS property might

need to be updated.

2063534-001 Rev 2 131

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

37-1-3: Property for the Image Count Indicator for the MG FULL Overlay

This property is to be changed only if there is a need to resolve a conflict on the MG FULL
overlay.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFactory.
MG‐FULL‐TOPCENTER‐3=108|NOLABEL|HEADER

Note: As part of resolving a conflict, the corresponding NUMELEMENTS property might

need to be updated.

37-1-4: Configuring the Font Size of the Image Count Indicator when Viewing MG
Images

Effective with RA1000 Release 4.0, a property is available for configuring the font size of
the image count indicator when viewing MG images.

The property is listed below:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.MGSystemOverlayMVC.imageCou
ntIndicatorFontAdjust=<nn>

Where:

<nn> — A whole number representing an added point-size value. This value will be added
to the point size of the Font used to display image count indicator. If the indicator would
normally be displayed with a 9-point Font and the value of this property is 2, then the
indicator will be displayed with an 11-point Font. Negative numbers are read as 0.

The default setting for this property is 2.

Note: The setting of this single property controls the font size for the image count indicator in
both the full overlay mode and the essential overlay mode.

37-2: Configuring the ERMF Adjusted Overlay

Effective with RA1000 Release 4.0, the following property is set to true by default to
enable the “ERMF Adjusted” text overlay to indicate when ERMF Adjusted Pixel Spacing
is used for measurement for mammography images:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.notare.user.ERMFAdjustedOverlayOn=true

Where:

true — if a mammography image meets one of ERMF rules listed in “Preconfigured Rules
for ERMF Adjustment of Mammography Images” on page 135, the RA1000 displays the
“ERMF Adjusted” overlay text for the mammography image

false— if a mammography image meets one of ERMF rules listed in “Preconfigured Rules
for ERMF Adjustment of Mammography Images” on page 135, the RA1000 does not
display the “ERMF Adjusted” overlay text for the mammography image

2063534-001 Rev 2 132

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Note: In the CDPS application, having the "Not Calibrated" and "ERMF Adjusted" text
overlay options on CDPS both set to be turned off only disables the text overlay on
screen. If a mammography image meets one of ERMF rules listed in “Preconfigured
Rules for ERMF Adjustment of Mammography Images” on page 135, RA1000 still
uses ERMF adjusted pixel spacing for "Actual Size" printing on the affected
mammography image that is printed in Actual Size.

Section 38: Configuring Presentation States

38-1: Configuring the Presentation State Quick Save Options

To configure the presentation state quick save options:

1. Open the Tools Editor.

2. Find the following properties and configure them as desired:

 This property enables or disables the quick save feature and the Alt+G
functionality. Possible values are true (the default) to enable the feature and the
shortcut key functionality, and false to disable them.

CompatibilityChecker.canQuickSaveGSPS

 This property displays or hides the Quick Save Presentation State button on the
function bar. Possible values are true to display the button, and false (the
default) to hide it.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.functionbar.FunctionBarIconPanel.showQuickSaveButton

 This property adds the prefix Q- to the presentation state label. The label is
configurable. It has a two-character limit.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.view.controller.ExamStatusController.QSLabel

3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

Result: The presentation state quick save options are configured.

38-2: Configuring Shutter Properties

Use the following property to assign a color to the ROI when used as a shutter:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.notare.user.roi.ROIOverlayModel.shutte
rROIColor=0x00ff00

You can also add properties to configure display of an additional component as System
Image Overlay, to indicate if a shutter is applied to the CR, RF, and XA images. Use the
following platinum property, configured for CR images as an example, to configure the
display of additional component indicating shutter application.

2063534-001 Rev 2 133

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFact
ory.CR‐FULL‐NORTHWEST‐3=00181600|Shutter|HEADER

Note: To configure this feature for other modalities, replace ‘CR’ with the appropriate
Modality code as listed in Table 13-11: Modality Code Descriptions.

38-3: Retrieving Pixel Spacing Information

The workstation tries to read value for Pixel Spacing first from the database and then from
the Image Header. Use the following two properties for CR modality as examples, to
define and control the source of pixel spacing information:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.MedImageDE.firstCheckImagerPixelSpacing.CR=
true

com.ge.med.platinum.work.MedImageDE.ignoreDatabasePixelSpacing.CR=tr
ue

By default, both the properties are assigned false. The ‘ignoreDatabasePixelSpacing’

property, when set to true for a modality, forces the workstation to ignore the database and
obtain the pixel spacing value from the Image Header. The ‘firstCheckImagerPixelSpacing’
property, when set to true, reverses the order and first checks the image header for Image
Pixel Spacing.

Note: If a GSPS object is used for the display of an exam, the pixel spacing information will
come from the GSPS object, and not the image header.

38-4: Setting Presentation State Labels

The following property sets the types of presentation state labels displayed for image
overlays:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.displa
yPresentationLabelSetting=0

Values that can be assigned for the property are:

 0—does not display any presentation state labels.

 1—displays only.the non-system (i.e., non-RPPS) presentation state labels.

 2—displays system (RPPS) and non-system presentation state labels.

 3—displays system, non-system, and "NONE" (when no GSPS is applied)

presentation state labels.

This property is applicable for the following modalities:

 CR

 CT

 DX

2063534-001 Rev 2 134

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 MR

 NM

 PT

 RF

 US

 XA and

 GENERICMODALITY

Section 39: Configuring the Saving of User-Calibrated Pixel Spacing

Information

There is a property to configure whether or not user-calibrated pixel spacing information is

saved by users.

The default setting of this property is shown here:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.userCalPixelSpacingEnable=true

Where:

 true—enable the saving of user-calibrated pixel spacing information by users

 false—disable the saving of user-calibrated pixel spacing information by users

Section 40: Preconfigured Rules for ERMF Adjustment of

Mammography Images

Prior to RA1000 Workstation Release 4.0, in order to avoid "double correction" errors on
some mammography images, RA1000 did not support any algorithms specified in the IHE
Mammography Profile for calculating distance and area measurements for mammography
images.

Effective with RA1000 Workstation Release 4.0, there are two preconfigured rules
designed to conditionally apply the IHE Mammography Profile Algorithm to certain
mammography images. If the criteria for either of the preconfigured rules is not met, then
no IHE algorithms are applied.

The default settings of these preconfigured rules are shown in the following sections:

 Rule that Conditionally Applies ERMF Adjustment to MagView MG Images from GE

Senographe Systems

 Rule that Conditionally Applies ERMF Adjustment to Non-GE MG Images

2063534-001 Rev 2 135

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Along with the above rules, a property specifying how many ERMF adjustment rules are
used must also be configured only if rules in addition to the preconfigured rules are used:

 Property that Specifies the Number of ERMF Adjustment Rules Used

Both of these rules operate together on the RA1000 Workstation by default. If a measured
distance or a Region of Interest (ROI) is shown in a mammography (MG) image, an
annotation indicates whether or not the image has been ERMF Adjusted, Calibrated, or
Not Calibrated.

If an image does not meet any of the preconfigured rules for ERMF adjustment, then the
following occurs:

 in the RA1000 application: the RA1000 does not use the algorithms specified in the
IHE Mammography Profile for calculating distance and area measurements on
mammography images

 in the RA1000 application: the annotation displayed on screen is "Not Calibrated" if

the "Not Calibrated" text overlay is configured to display on screen in RA1000

 when printing using CDPS: the annotation displayed on the printed image when
printed in True Size is "Not Calibrated" if the "Not Calibrated" text overlay option set to
be turned on in CDPS

If a GE Service Representative or Field Engineer requires more information about or is

considering adjusting these properties for any site, they must use the normal escalation
process to do so.

Note: The onscreen display of the “ERMF Adjusted” overlay is configurable. For more
information, see Configuring the ERMF Adjusted Overlay. For information on ERMF
Adjusted, Calibrated, or Not Calibrated annotations on MG images in display and
printing, see the Centricity PACS RA1000 Workstation and Exam Manager Operator
Manual. For information on Calibrated versus Not Calibrated annotations on images in
display and printing, see the Centricity PACS RA1000 Workstation and Exam
Manager Operator Manual.

40-1: Property that Specifies the Number of ERMF Adjustment Rules Used

This property specifies the number of preconfigured rules that can be customized for using
ERMF adjusted imager pixel spacing for measurements on MG images. The default
setting of this property is shown below:

com.ge.med.platinum.ERMFAdjusted.RULES‐NUMELEMENTS=2

40-2: Rule that Conditionally Applies ERMF Adjustment to MagView MG

Images from GE Senographe Systems

When the DICOM header information of a MG image meets the requirements in the rule,
the RA1000 workstation, the following occurs in the RA1000 application:

 RA1000 uses ERMF Adjusted Pixel Spacing for measurements

2063534-001 Rev 2 136

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 RA1000 displays the "ERMF Adjusted" overlay if the "ERMF Adjusted" image overlay
is configured to display on screen in RA1000

The default setting of this property / rule is:

com.ge.med.platinum.ERMFAdjusted.RULES‐0=(0008,0070).EQ."GE Medical
Systems"&&(0018,1114).GT.1.10&&(0018,1164).GT.(0018,7022)/
1.10&&(0018,1164).LE.(0018,7022)

Where the DICOM tags are defined as follows:

(0008,0070) = Manufacturer

(0018,7022) = Detector Element Spacing

(0018,1114) = Estimated Radiographic Magnification Factor

(0018,1164) = Imager Pixel Spacing

Warning: When customizing the preconfigured rules for ERMF adjusted imager pixel
spacing for measurements on MG images and entering numerical constants, the
number format must conform to the English (United States) standards for
number format, where the period "." is intended as a decimal point and the
comma "," is intended as a digit grouping symbol. Using another number
format can result in incorrectly parsed numbers in rules, unintended
measurement results on the affected images, and unintended print sizing of the
affected images.

Note: The onscreen display of the “ERMF Adjusted” overlay is configurable. For more
information, see Configuring the ERMF Adjusted Overlay.

40-3: Rule that Conditionally Applies ERMF Adjustment to Non-GE MG

Images

When the DICOM header information of a MG image meets the requirements in the rule,
the RA1000 workstation, the following occurs in the RA1000 application:

 RA1000 uses ERMF Adjusted Pixel Spacing for measurements

 RA1000 displays the "ERMF Adjusted" overlay if the "ERMF Adjusted" image overlay
is configured to display on screen in RA1000

The default setting of this property / rule is:

com.ge.med.platinum.ERMFAdjusted.RULES‐1=(0008,0070).NE."GE Medical
Systems"&&(0018,1114).GT.1.0

Where the DICOM tags are defined as follows:

(0008,0070) Manufacturer

(0018,1114) Estimated Radiographic Magnification Factor

2063534-001 Rev 2 137

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Warning: When customizing the preconfigured rules for ERMF adjusted imager pixel
spacing for measurements on MG images and entering numerical constants, the
number format must conform to the English (United States) standards for
number format, where the period "." is intended as a decimal point and the
comma "," is intended as a digit grouping symbol. Using another number
format can result in incorrectly parsed numbers in rules, unintended
measurement results on the affected images, and unintended print sizing of the
affected images.

Note: The onscreen display of the “ERMF Adjusted” overlay is configurable. For more
information, see Configuring the ERMF Adjusted Overlay.

Section 41: Configuring Sound Clip Duration

The maximum duration (in seconds) for a sound clip can be configured using the following
property in the platinum file. Set the value to a suitable number of seconds for which you
want a sound clip to be active.

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.ui.examnotes.gui.audio.ExamNotesRecordAudio
UI.timeLimit=3600

Section 42: Configuring the Case Insensitive Sorting Feature

The case insensitive feature, when set to true, allows for case insensitive filtering of
information on certain columns of a Worklist. For example, when a search criteria is given
for mr, the filtering will be done on MR, ignoring the case.

Note: This feature should be turned off for all languages other than English.

To turn off the case insensitive sorting feature:

1. Open Tools Editor.

2. Find and set the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.ColumnFilter.caseInsensitiveQuery=false

Section 43: Changing the Units in which to Display Reconstruction

Diameter Value

On image overlays, the reconstruction diameter value read from a modality displays in
centimeters by default. The default setting for this property is for centimeters as shown:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.rec
onDiametermm=false

To change the display to millimeters:

2063534-001 Rev 2 138

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.rec
onDiametermm=true

Section 44: Configuring F12 Behavior When Utilities Palette Open

By default, the F12 key approves and completes the exam selected on the Report palette
regardless of whether or not you have the Utilities palette open. The default setting for this
property is as shown:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.report.utilityHotKeyOnProperties=
true

To prevent F12 from approving and completing the exam while the Utilities palette is open:

 Use the Tools Editor to add a custom property value for the following platinum
property:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.report.utilityHotKeyOnProperties=
false

With this property set to false, the system alerts you when you press F12 while you have
the Utilities palette open. The default text for this alert is:

Exam status could not be changed. Please close utility palette, and
try again.

Section 45: Configuring Showing Hidden Images When Presentation

State Applied

When a modality sends a presentation state for an exam, the presentation state may omit
a number of images in the exam. These images are considered hidden. By default, you
cannot see hidden images in an exam when the presentation state is applied on the
Workstation.

By default, the following properties are set to false, as shown:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.isu.ExamTransaction.showAllImagesPSG_onExam
Open=false

com.ge.med.platinum.work.isu.ExamTransaction.showAllImagesPSG_onAppl
yPSG=false

com.ge.med.platinum.work.isu.ExamTransaction.showAllImagesPSG=false

To see hidden images when you open an exam:

 Use the Tools Editor to add set a custom property value for the following platinum
property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.isu.ExamTransaction.showAllImagesPSG_onExam
Open=true

2063534-001 Rev 2 139

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

To see hidden images when you apply a presentation state to an exam:

 Use the Tools Editor to add set a custom property value for the following platinum
property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.isu.ExamTransaction.showAllImagesPSG_onAppl
yPSG=true

To see hidden images in both cases (when you open an exam, and when you apply a
presentation state to an exam):

 Use the Tools Editor to add a custom property value for the following platinum
property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.isu.ExamTransaction.showAllImagesPSG=true

This property overrides the previous two properties.

Section 46: Configuring Image Grouping Preferences for Open Exams

By default, image grouping preference changes apply to all currently open exams. The
default setting for this property is as shown:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.imagegrouping.retainGroupModeForOpenExam=false

To apply a change in image grouping preference to an exam only when the exam is closed
and reopened:

 Use the Tools Editor to add a custom property value for the following platinum
property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.imagegrouping.retainGroupModeForOpenExam=true

Section 47: Configuring Writing of PET Image Rescale Slope/Intercept

Information

For certain PET exams, the process of writing out rescale slope/intercept information
takes a long time. This results in a long exam save time and a long image print time. By
default, PET image modality LUT information (rescale slope/intercept) is written for exam
save or image print.

By default, the following properties are set to false, as shown:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.GSPSmodalitylutModel.skipWriteFor.RPPS
.PT=false

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.GSPSmodalitylutModel.skipWriteFor.Prin
tRPPS.PT=false

To skip this information for exam save:

2063534-001 Rev 2 140

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 Use the Tools Editor to add a custom property value for the following platinum
property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.GSPSmodalitylutModel.skipWriteFor.RPPS
.PT=true

To skip this information for print:

 Use the Tools Editor to add a custom property value for the following platinum
property:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.GSPS.GSPSmodalitylutModel.skipWriteFor.Prin
tRPPS.PT=true

Note: These platinum properties do not affect presentation state saves. Presentation state
saves will still write rescale slope/intercept information when these properties are true.

Section 48: Platinum Properties

This section contains the following information:

 Additional Platinum Properties Related to 3.0.5.1 and Later

 Additional Platinum Properties Related to 3.0.5.3 and Later

 Fixed Properties (effective 3.1.1.2 and later)

 Variable Properties (effective 3.1.1.2 and later)

 Additional Platinum Properties (effective 3.2 and later)

 Unsupported Platinum Property (effective 3.2 and later)

 Additional Platinum Properties (effective 3.2.2 and later)

 Additional Platinum Properties (Effective with Release 3.2.2.1)

48-1: Additional Platinum Properties Related to 3.0.5.1 and Later

You should not edit or override any of the following properties:

 The following property is used to prevent unlimited Workstation JDBC connections.

The default value is shown. Do not reduce this value.

com.ge.med.dataserver.maxDataSourceConnections=20

 If the following property is set to true, the Workstation will disconnect old Samba
connections before creating new connections in cases where the Image Volume has
gone down. The default value is false. Do not change or override this value.

com.ge.med.platinum.work.ISURepository.disconnectStaleSambaConn=false

2063534-001 Rev 2 141

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 The following property is used to produce correct Workstation behavior with different
versions of PowerScribe. The default value is false. Do not change or override this
value:

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.markDictatedWhenDictated=false

 The following property produces correct Workstation behavior with different versions
of TalkStation. The default is value is false. Do not change or override this value.

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.talkCSR5Workflow=false

48-2: Additional Platinum Properties Related to 3.0.5.3 and Later

GE Service Representatives (including Field Engineers) should not edit or override any
of the properties that are related to sitewide settings for the following:

 Image orientation marker box fill color, box frame color, marker text string for image of
unknown origin, and marker text string for image of known origin, marker text string
font size, and marker text string color

 Pixel gap between image orientation marker’s frame and marker string

 Font size, text color, or the text message itself for the “Warning: Not for Diagnostic
Use” warning message that displays on non-DICOM format images (such as TIFF,
JPEG, and PGN) exported using DICOM export

 Color, thickness, and length of indicator for non-primary exams

 Location of the measurement ruler’s description

 Tooltip text for the Image Orientation Changed icon

If a GE Service Representative or Field Engineer requires more information about or is

considering adjusting these properties for any site, they must use the normal escalation
process to do so.

Note: For updates to the properties described in this section, see Fixed Properties (effective
3.1.1.2 and later) and Variable Properties (effective 3.1.1.2 and later).

48-3: Fixed Properties (effective 3.1.1.2 and later)

Effective with 3.1.1.2 and later:

 The property for configuring orientation marker box background (box fill) color is
removed. The color is fixed to black.

 The property for configuring orientation marker text font style and size is removed.
The font style and size is fixed to Helvetica-bold-12.

 The behavior of the “Not All Series Displayed” feature is improved.

These changes affect the following user scenarios when “Not All Series Displayed
Message” feature is enabled.

2063534-001 Rev 2 142

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 When in dictate mode, and the user clicks on the next exam button, the exam is
not marked dictated until the “Not All Series Displayed” check has been
performed and the user clicks yes, if required.

 When multiple exams are open or closed that would trigger the “Not All Series
Displayed” alert, the “Not All Series Displayed” alert displays once summarizing
the multiple exams that had series that had not been displayed.

48-4: Variable Properties (effective 3.1.1.2 and later)

Effective with 3.1.1.2 and later:

 The property for brightness value for orientation marker text and box frame is
adjustable. They share the same value which is restricted from 200 (darkest) to 255
(brightest).

The default setting of this property is shown here:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.orient
ationMarkerGrayScaleValue=200

 The property for "no image orientation in DICOM header" character(s) can be
configured to not display only for the following modalities:

US, CR, XA, DX, RF, NM

This property is configured separately for each modality.

The default setting of this property for the US, CR, XA, DX, RF, and NM modalities is
shown here:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.orient
ationMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo.US=true

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.orient
ationMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo.CR=true

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.orient
ationMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo.XA=true

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.orient
ationMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo.DX=true

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.orient
ationMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo.RF=true

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.orient
ationMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo.NM=true

Where:

 true—turn on the display of the “no image orientation in DICOM header” character(s)

 false—turn off the display of the “no image orientation in DICOM header” character(s)

2063534-001 Rev 2 143

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Note: The system only allows this property to be configured for the US, CR, XA, DX, RF,
and NM modalities.

48-5: Additional Platinum Properties (effective 3.2 and later)

48-5-1: Properties Controlling Image Orientation Marker Display for CR and DX

Images

Sitewide properties can be configured to control image orientation marker display for the
following modalities:

CR, DX

There is a separate property to configure for each modality.

These properties were added to disable or enable the display of the Image Orientation
Markers (such as, for an example only, "L", "R", "A", "P").

These properties are applicable to the CR and DX modalities only.

These properties are different from the orientationMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo properties,

which control only whether the "no image orientation information available" character(s)
display when image orientation information is not available for the image.

The default setting of this property for the CR and DX modalities is shown here:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.disableOri
entationMarker.CR=false

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.disableOri
entationMarker.DX=false

Where:

true = Turn off the display of image orientation markers for the modality.

A value of true for the SystemOverlayMVC.disableOrientationMarker property

disables the display of "no image orientation information available" character(s)
and disables the display of the Image Orientation Markers for that modality. If
this property is set to true for a modality, that setting overrides the setting for the
orientationMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo property for that modality and disables the
display of image orientation markers for both the situation when there is header
information for the image of that modality type and in the case when there isn't
header information for the image of that modality type.

false = Turn on the display of image orientation markers for the modality.

A value of false for the SystemOverlayMVC.disableOrientationMarker property

causes the property setting for the orientationMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo
property for that modality to take priority over the setting of false for
SystemOverlayMVC.disableOrientationMarker for that modality.

2063534-001 Rev 2 144

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Note: The system only allows this property to be configured for the CR and DX modalities.
These properties are set independently of the properties that control whether the “no
image orientation in DICOM header” character(s) are displayed for certain modalities
when no orientation information is available for the image.

Note: For CR and DX images with image orientation markers suppressed from displaying on
RA1000, GE does not modify the information in the image headers when the DICOM
image is sent outside of the PACS. PACS passes any DICOM information in the
DICOM header as sent by the modality. Images viewed outside of RA1000 using other
DICOM viewers might display incorrect information that was passed through PACS.
Using lead markers during image acquisition is another way to indicate image
orientation.

Warning: Use the "true" setting with caution. Setting this property to true disables the
display of image orientation information for the CR or DX modality, regardless
of whether the images carry incorrect or correct image orientation information
into the RA1000 workstation for the modality. Setting this property to true may
prevent the user from seeing correct image orientation marker information. The
user should determine which images carry incorrect image orientation marker
information into the RA1000 workstation and only set this property to "true" to
view images with that issue.

48-5-2: Properties Controlling the Characters Used for “No Image Orientation in
DICOM Header” for OT and SC Images

Sitewide properties can be configured to control the display of the "no image orientation in
DICOM header" character(s) for the following modalities:

OT, SC

There is a separate property to configure for each modality.

The default setting of this property for the OT and SC modalities is shown here:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.orientatio
nMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo.OT=true

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.orientatio
nMarkerDrawNoHeaderInfo.SC=true

Where:

 true—turn on the display of the “no image orientation in DICOM header”

character(s)

 false—turn off the display of the “no image orientation in DICOM header”
character(s)

The system also allows this property to be configured for the US, CR, XA, DX, RF, and NM
modalities (see Variable Properties (effective 3.1.1.2 and later)).

2063534-001 Rev 2 145

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

48-5-3: Platinum Property Controlling the modalWaitDialog

The platinum property modalWaitDialog, when enabled, can limit user interaction on the
RA1000 while an exam is being opened or closed by the RIS. A progress bar monitors the
status of the open/close operation. This property is relevant to RIS integrations that are
based on Generic Extends, such as Medora RIS.

 If set to true: The progress bar dialog will lock out user interaction with the RA1000
while an exam is opening or closing. There is one exception: users will be able to
respond to any dialogs that require user interaction while an exam is opening or
closing.

 If set to false (the default value): The progress bar dialog, while displayed, will not
lock out user interaction with the RA1000. Users will have full use of the RA1000 while
an exam is opening or closing.

To enable the modalWaitDialog property:

1. Using the Tools Editor, set the following property to true:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.extend.communication.ProgressBarThrea
d.modalWaitDialog=true

2. Save and close the platinum properties file.

48-5-4: Property for Illegal Characters in DDP Names

The following property controls which characters are considered illegal characters in DDP
names. This property is stored in stored in platinum properties and the default setting for
this property is as shown:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.layoutmanager.inValidNameCharacterLists=~!@#$%^&
*()={}[]|\\:";'<>?,.`

48-5-5: Property for Configuring the Autofilter Delay for the Worklist Table

Effective with 3.2, the autofilter delay for the Worklist table is configurable.

The autofilter delay controls how long the system pauses for user input in query / filter
creation before executing the worklist table filter information that was entered so far.

The site-wide property controlling the auto filter delay can be set (using Tools Editor) to a
value of greater than the default value of 5 seconds (5000 milliseconds).

The default format is the following (seconds expressed as milliseconds):

com.ge.med.bean.worklisttable.WorklistTable.filterDelay=5000

Note: This property cannot be changed to less than 5 seconds (5000 milliseconds).

2063534-001 Rev 2 146

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

48-6: Unsupported Platinum Property (effective 3.2 and later)

 Auto Save of Comparison Exams on Exam Closing

Effective with 3.2, the property that controlled the inclusion and exclusion of
comparison exams as part of the automatic save on exam closing is removed and is
no longer supported. The unsupported property is as shown:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.work.ExamSet.dontSaveComparisonsOnSaveClose=

Also effective with 3.2, when the Save Changes To Current Exam when Closing
Exam option is selected under Exam Closing Options in Utilities > Preferences >
System Preferences, comparisons (historicals) are no longer part of an autosave upon
exam close. Comparisons can only be saved through the Exam Functions menu.

48-7: Additional Platinum Properties (effective 3.2.2 and later)

48-7-1: Configuring Sending of Event Messages to a Third-Party Application (when

Generic Extends is used)

Effective with 3.2.2, when using the RA1000 Workstation with Generic Extends, the
workstation can be configured to send certain event information to a third-party application
based on site needs.

To add and configure these events:

1. Add these properties to the platinum_custom.properties file for some or all

workstations.

2. Add the following property to configure the application to launch when the events are
generated:

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.sendOutboundMessageApp=

Below is an example of this property, with information after the equal sign of a path to
launch the application and to write out the message text to a txt file:

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.sendOutboundMessageApp=c:\\temp\\test
.exe ‐a c:\\test.txt

Important If the site is not planning to periodically enable and disable the sending of the
events described in step 3, then there is no need to do step 3. If the above
property is present, Generic Extends automatically enables the sending of the
event messages in step 3, even if the event properties in step 3 are not present.
Go to step 4.

If the site is planning to periodically enable and disable the sending of the event
messages, then go to step 3.

3. If the site is planning to periodically enable and disable the sending of the event
messages, it is recommended to add the following properties for each message, even
if both messages are not enabled. These properties are set independently and
operate independently of each other.

2063534-001 Rev 2 147

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Open and Displayed Exam Event

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.receiveOpenAndDisplayedEvents=

 The possible settings after the equal sign are:

true = generate an event to a third-party application containing certain information about

exams each time the user opens exams for display, redisplays exams that are already
opened using the Opened Exams Hotzone, or when there is a change (increase or
decrease) in the total number of unique exams displayed across all configured monitor
regions.

false = do not generate an event to a third-party application containing certain

information about exams each time the user opens exams for display, redisplays exams
that are already opened using the Opened Exams Hotzone, or when there is a change
(increase or decrease) in the total number of unique exams displayed across all
configured monitor regions.

Close Exam Event

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.receiveCloseExamEvents=

 The possible settings after the equal sign are:

true = generate an event to a third-party application containing certain information about

exams each time the user does a Close Exam or a Close All Exams action.

false = do not generate an event to a third-party application containing certain

information about exams each time the user does a Close Exam or a Close All Exams
action.

4. Save and close the file that was updated and restart the workstation.

48-7-2: Configuring the Amount of Image that Remains in the Viewport when
Zooming or Panning

Effective with 3.2.2, a new property is added to force a certain percentage of an image to
always remain on screen when the image is zoomed or panned to outside of the viewport
/ moved offscreen.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.ImageActionManipulator.forceIma
geOnScreen=20

Where:

0 —the minimum value / setting, which disables this property

20 —the default value / setting of 20%
70 —the maximum value / setting of 70%

If a negative value is entered for a setting, the system does not accept the negative value
and instead converts the value to zero.

When this property is set to a value greater than zero, the system honors this property
setting when restoring a bookmark, a CDP, or a saved presentation state.

2063534-001 Rev 2 148

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Note: You can add these properties to the platinum_custom.properties and

extend.properties files for some or all workstations or set them as a system-level
preference using the Tools Editor.

48-7-3: Property for RA1000 with AW Server Integration

Effective with 3.2.2, there is a property that may need to be changed if a site uses a
language other than English with AW Server integration. If the AW Server client displays a
window title that starts with any text other than AW Server, in English, then a property
change needs to be added to Platinum_custom.properties.

Illustration 13-5:AW Server Client: No property change needed

The default property value is:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.architecture.AWServerClientTitle=AW Server

If the AW Server client uses a window title that does not start with AW Server:

1. Open the AW Server client to determine what the window title is.

2. Add the following property to the Platinum_custom.properties file:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.architecture.AWServerClientTitle=<AW Server
window title>

3. Save and close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

48-8: Additional Platinum Properties (Effective with Release 3.2.2.1)

48-8-1: Property Allowing Auto Saving of Comparison Exams when the Primary
Exam is Closed

Effective with PACS 3.2.2.1 and later, a property is added to allow auto saving of
comparison exams when the primary exam is closed.

To allow auto saving of comparisons along with primary exams on exam close, the
property listed below should be set to “false”.

2063534-001 Rev 2 149

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

The default setting shown below is a setting of “true”, to save the primary exam only on
auto saves:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.work.ExamSet.dontSaveComparisonsOnSaveClose=true

Where:

true - saves primary exam only on auto save [default setting]

false - saves primary and comparisons on auto save

Note: The setting of this property does not affect whether or not auto save is enabled for
exams. Auto saving for exams is controlled by two user preferences on the Utilities Palette:
Preferences > System Preferences > Exam Closing Options: "Prompt To Save Image
Before Closing" and "Save Changes to Current Exam when Closing Exam".

Note: This property can be configured separately for each workstation, or you can add these
properties to the platinum_custom.properties and extend.properties files for some or
all workstations or set this property as a system-level preference using the Tools
Editor.

48-8-2: Properties Allowing Control Over Shutters

Effective with PACS 3.2.2.1 and later, two properties are available to control the reading of
shutter information. For controlling the reading of shutter information in an image header,
an existing property can be used. For controlling the reading of shutter information in
saved presentation states, a new property was added.

The two properties allow sites to disable the application of shutter information from either
the image header and/or presentation states.

To disable the application of shutter information, the properties listed below should be set
to “false”.

The default settings are shown below are settings of “true”, to enable the application of
shutter information for image headers and for presentation states:

For image headers:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.MedImageDE.enableImageShutter=true

For presentation states:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.MedImageDE.enableShutterGSPS=true

Where:

true - enable application of shutter information [default setting]

false - disable application of shutter information

These properties can be set independently of each other. However, presentations take
precedence over image header information. Therefore, regardless of the settings of these
properties, if a presentation state exists and it doesn't include a shutter, then even if the
image header has a shutter, it will be ignored.

2063534-001 Rev 2 150

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Setting the first property for image headers is recommended. Because using the gsps
property also prevents user-created shutters from being honored, it is not recommended
to change the gsps property unless the site is certain that it does not want any user to
save a shutter.

Note: These properties can be configured separately for each workstation, or you can add
these properties to the platinum_custom.properties and extend.properties files for
some or all workstations or set this property as a system-level preference using the
Tools Editor.

48-8-3: Property Controlling “always on top” Dialog Display Behavior for Third-
Party Applications

Effective with PACS 3.2.2.1 and later, a property was added to ensure that clicking outside
a dialog on the RA1000 Workstation and dismissing it does not cause the third-party
application to lose its “always on top' behavior.”

To configure the “always on top” dialog display behavior, the property below should be set
to “true”.

The default setting shown below is a setting of “false”, where the third party application
does not have “always on top” dialog display behavior:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.WindowOnTopManager.enableJava6OnTopFix=false

Where:

true - third-party application has “always on top” dialog display behavior

false - third-party application does not have “always on top” dialog display behavior
[default setting]

When using Windows 7 64-bit OS, where a third-party application, such as RIS-IC, is
configured to have the "always on top" behavior, the third-party application may not always
remain on top, even when the platinum property is set to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.WindowOnTopManager.enableJava6OnTopFix=true

If this occurs press Alt+Tab until Windows selects the third-party application window that
you want to have focus / to remain on top. Then select the third-party application window
by clicking on it. This should restore the application's property to remain on top.

Note: This property can be configured separately for each workstation, or you can add this
property to the platinum_custom.properties and extend.properties files for some or all
workstations or set this property as a system-level preference using the Tools Editor.

2063534-001 Rev 2 151

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 49: RA1000 with AW Server Integration

49-1: Optional Property for Configuring “Return to AWS” Feature

When using the “Return to AWS” feature, there is an optional property available to make
AW Server application window display as the forwardmost window instead of the RA1000
Workstation application window.

1. With the AW Server Client application closed, open the solo.ini file.

2. Add the following property entry in the solo.ini file:

solo.alwaysOnTop=true

3. Save and close the solo.ini file.

4. Restart the workstation.

5. Start the RA1000 application and the AW Server client application.

6. Use the “Return to AWS” feature to confirm that the change takes effect.

Section 50: Configuring Workstation Messages

The workstation messages are present in the ptStrings.properties file.

To configure workstation messages:

1. Navigate to platinum > Support.

2. Locate the ptStrings.properties file.

3. Search for the appropriate key for the workstation message and configure the value.

Section 51: New Images Notification While Viewing an Exam

The workstation displays a notification message when new images are loaded onto the
primary exam. Table 13-12 explains the modification options for the new images
notification message.

Table 13-12: Modification Options for the New Images Notification Message

To: Open the Tools Editor and change the value for the following platinum property:

Reconfigure the com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.NINController.MillisForNINDisplay=5000

notification message
to remain on screen
for a longer duration

2063534-001 Rev 2 152

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-12: Modification Options for the New Images Notification Message (Continued)

To: Open the Tools Editor and change the value for the following platinum property:

Toggle the com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.NINController.NINFeature=true

notification message
on or off Note: The notification prompt is on by default.

Change the amount com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.NINController.MillisBetweenNINChecks=30000

of time before the
NINThread checks for
new images

Show the warning com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.NINController.NINWarning=false

dialog box when
using the Remote
Workstation

Turn on/off the slide com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.AlertWindow.NINSlide=true

function of the alert
window

Section 52: Customizing the Arrangement of Function Buttons

You can customize the arrangement of the function buttons. This allows you to rearrange
the placement of the function buttons to improve user workflow. These custom options are
available on the Work Modes palette (on the Verify, Dictate, and Browse tabs), on the
Patient Jacket palette, and on the image title bar.

52-1: Rearranging the Buttons

To rearrange the function buttons:

1. Using the Tools Editor, verify the value for the following property is set to true. This
enables you to hide buttons.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.hideEnabled=true

2. To rearrange the buttons on the Work Modes palette (on the Browse, Verify, and
Dictate tabs), update the following properties:

Note: The first property below, ButtonOrder, applies to all three tabs on the Work Modes
palette: Browse, Verify, and Dictate. It can be overwritten by any of the three
mode-specific properties, ButtonOrder.browse, ButtonOrder.verify, and
ButtonOrder.dictate.

Note: A value of EMPTY means the value is not set.

Note: To identify the function button for each integer below, refer to “Mapping Function
Buttons to Integers” on page 154.

2063534-001 Rev 2 153

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.ButtonOrder=15,0,23,0,22,21,18,19,13,12,14,11,2,1,4,3
,5,6,7,8,9,10,20,0,16,17,24

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.ButtonHide=EMPTY

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.ButtonOrder.browse=EMPTY

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.ButtonHide.browse=EMPTY

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.ButtonOrder.verify=EMPTY

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.ButtonHide.verify=EMPTY

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.ButtonOrder.dictate=EMPTY

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.ButtonHide.dictate=EMPTY

3. To rearrange the buttons on the Patient Jacket palette, update the following
properties:

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.patientJacket.ButtonOrder=18,19,13,12,2,1,4,3,5,6,7,11,9,10,20

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.patientJacket.ButtonHide=EMPTY

4. To rearrange the buttons on the image title bar, update the following properties:

Note: The first property below, ButtonOrder, aligns the buttons left-justified. The property
ButtonOrder.right aligns the buttons right-justified.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.imageTitle.ButtonOrder=5,11,6,10,7,8,9,0,16,15,14,1,2,3,4,17

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.imageTitle.ButtonHide=12,13

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.imageTitle.ButtonOrder.right=EMPTY

52-1-1: Mapping Function Buttons to Integers

Table 13-13 identifies the integer for each function button on the Work Modes and Patient
Jacket palettes. Table 13-14 identifies the integer for each function button on the image
title bar. Refer to these mappings when changing the placement order of the function
buttons.

2063534-001 Rev 2 154

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-13: Function Button to Integer Map for Work Modes and Patient Jacket Palettes

Function Button Integer

SPACER 0

REFRESH 1

MARK_DICTATED 2

UNVERIFY 3

VERIFY 4

GET_PATIENT 5

SEND_EXAM 6

ADD_FOLDER 7

REMOVE_FOLDER 8

HELP 9

PRINT 10

SEND_TO_REMOTE 11

SYNC_PACSREPORT 12

EXAM_NOTES 13

SEARCH 14

OPENRISRMREPORT 15

DIRECT_DICTATION 16

REMOTE_DICTATION 17

MARK_CONF 18

UNMARK_CONF 19

CANCEL_QUERY 20

STORAGE_SETTINGS 21

DELETE_EXAM 22

FETCH_EXAM 23

LAUNCH_PROGRISTECHMODULE 24

2063534-001 Rev 2 155

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-14: Function Button to Integer Map for Image Title Bar

Function Button Integer

EMPTY_LABEL 0

PREV_SHEET 1

PREV_IMAGE 2

NEXT_IMAGE 3

NEXT_SHEET 4

LAYOUT_TYPE 5

SELECT_ALL 6

SHOW_REPORT 7

PATIENT_JACKET 8

SHOW_EXAMNOTES 9

CINE_CONTROLS 10

CONNECTIONS 11

PREV 12

NEXT 13

COMPARISON 14

SERIES 15

AW_EXTEND 16

MATRIX_EXTEND 17

52-2: Changing the Number of Columns

To change the number of columns:

1. Using the Tools Editor, make the following changes.

2. To change the number of columns on the Work Modes palette (on the Browse, Verify,
and Dictate tabs), update the following properties:

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.numberOfColumns.browse=2

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.numberOfColumns.verify=2

2063534-001 Rev 2 156

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.workmodes.numberOfColumns.dictate=2

3. To change the number of columns on the Patient Jacket palette, update the following
property:

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.preferencepanels.buttonpreferencetab
pane.patientJacket.numberOfColumns=2

Section 53: Enabling the Idle Time Out Notification

To enable the idle time out notification feature:

1. Using the Tools Editor, set the following property to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ForcedLogoutController.showIdleTimeoutW
arning=true

2. Verify the following property is set to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ForcedLogoutController.autoLogout=true

3. This step is optional. By default, the notification prompt displays when you have three
minutes of inactivity remaining before the system logs you out. To change the default
value to a different length of time, set the following property to a new value (in
minutes):

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.util.ForcedLogoutController.idleTimeOutWarni
ngPeriod=3

Section 54: Keyboard Shortcuts

54-1: Reconfiguring the Shortcut Keys

To reconfigure a shortcut key:

1. Using the Tools Editor, reconfigure the value of the shortcut key property. Table 13-15
lists the shortcut key properties with their default values.

Note: A shortcut key label on a drop-down menu changes automatically when you
reconfigure the value for that shortcut key. For example, if you reconfigure the shortcut
key for Select All from its default of Alt+A to Alt+S, then the label on the Image
Functions drop-down menu changes to Alt+S.

Table 13-15: Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

Function Keys

2063534-001 Rev 2 157

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-15: Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values (Continued)

Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

HK.+F1=HELP

HK.+F2=START_DICTATION

HK.+F3=SHOW_MYDESKTOP

HK.+F4=MARK_ARRIVED

HK.+F5=MARK_VERIFIED

HK.+F6=MARK_DICTATED

HK.+F7=TOGGLE_MAIN_PALETTES

HK.+F9=HIDE_ALL_PALETTES

HK.+F11=MARK_APPROVED_AND_FORWARDED

HK.+F12=MARK_APPROVED_AND_COMPLETE

Command Keys

HK.+Escape=CANCEL_QUERY

HK.+Home=HOME

HK.+End=END

HK.+Left=LEFT_ARROW

HK.+Right=RIGHT_ARROW

HK.+Up=UP_ARROW

HK.+Down=DOWN_ARROW

HK.+Page_Up=PAGE_UP

HK.+Page_Down=PAGE_DOWN

HK.+Enter=ENTER

HK.+Tab=TAB

HK.+NumPad-0=WL_PRESET_0

HK.+NumPad-1=WL_PRESET_1

HK.+NumPad-2=WL_PRESET_2

HK.+NumPad-3=WL_PRESET_3

2063534-001 Rev 2 158

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-15: Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values (Continued)

Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

HK.+F11=MARK_APPROVED_AND_FORWARDED

HK.+F12=MARK_APPROVED_AND_COMPLETE

Command Keys

HK.+Escape=CANCEL_QUERY

HK.+Home=HOME

HK.+End=END

HK.+Left=LEFT_ARROW

HK.+Right=RIGHT_ARROW

HK.+Up=UP_ARROW

HK.+Down=DOWN_ARROW

HK.+Page_Up=PAGE_UP

HK.+Page_Down=PAGE_DOWN

HK.+Enter=ENTER

HK.+Tab=TAB

HK.+NumPad-0=WL_PRESET_0

HK.+NumPad-1=WL_PRESET_1

HK.+NumPad-2=WL_PRESET_2

HK.+NumPad-3=WL_PRESET_3

2063534-001 Rev 2 159

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-15: Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values (Continued)

Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

HK.Alt+A=SELECT_ALL

HK.Alt+B=SAVE_CONFERENCE

HK.Alt+C=COPY_DDP

HK.Alt+D=DISPLAY_IMAGES

HK.Alt+E=DELETE_DDP

HK.Alt+F=DISPLAY_CONFERENCE

HK.Alt+F6=DICTATE_AND_CLOSE_EXAM

HK.Alt+G=QS_GSPS

HK.Alt+H=SAVE_DDP

HK.Alt+I=SHOW_HIDE_OVERLAY

HK.Alt+J=ACQUIRED_EXAM

#HK.Alt+K=STACK_VIEW

HK.Alt+L=REVIEW_MACRO

HK.Alt+M=MORE_DDP

HK.Alt+N=DICTATION_MACRO

HK.Alt+O=LOGOUT

HK.Alt+P=PRINT

HK.Alt+Q=QUIT_APPLICATION

#HK.Alt+R=SHOW_REPORT

HK.Alt+S=SAVE

#HK.Alt+T=VERIFICATION_MACRO

HK.Alt+U=DESELECT_ALL

HK.Alt+V=GRAPHICS_OVERLAY

HK.Alt+W=CLOSE

#HK.Alt+X=REDO

HK.Alt+Y=SHOW_HIDE_ANNOTATION

2063534-001 Rev 2 160

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-15: Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values (Continued)

Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

HK.Alt+Z=SHOW_HIDE_RIS_MODULES

HK.Alt+Space=STATE_WL

HK.Alt+F6=DICTATE_AND_CLOSE_EXAM

HK.Alt+NumPad_+=ZOOM_2X

HK.Alt+EQUALS=ZOOM_2X

HK.Alt+NumPad_-=ZOOM_HALF

HK.Alt+Minus=ZOOM_HALF

HK.Alt+/=RESET_TO_NORMAL

HK.Alt+0=WL_PRESET_0

HK.Alt+1=WL_PRESET_1

HK.Alt+2=WL_PRESET_2

HK.Alt+3=WL_PRESET_3

HK.Alt+4=WL_PRESET_4

HK.Alt+5=WL_PRESET_5

HK.Alt+6=WL_PRESET_6

HK.Alt+7=WL_PRESET_7

HK.Alt+8=WL_PRESET_8

HK.Alt+9=WL_PRESET_9

HK.Alt+;=INVERT_GRAY_SCALE

Ctrl

HK.Ctrl+B=SAVE_BOOKMARK

HK.Ctrl+C=COPY

HK.Ctrl+D=MARK_DICTATED,100+SAVE,700+CLOSE,
700+DISPLAY_IMAGES,700+START_DICTATION,0

HK.Ctrl+E=CONVERT_EXPORT_IMAGES

HK.Ctrl+G=MARK_VERIFIED,100+SAVE,700+CLOSE,0

HK.Ctrl+K=PREV_SIGNIFICANT_IMAGE

2063534-001 Rev 2 161

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-15: Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values (Continued)

Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

HK.Ctrl+L=NEXT_SIGNIFICANT_IMAGE

HK.Ctrl+N=SERIES_NAVIGATOR

HK.Ctrl+P=SHOW_PATIENT_INFO

HK.Ctrl+Q=MARK_DICTATED,100+SAVE,700+CLOSE,0

HK.Ctrl+R=SHOW_REPORT_PALETTE

HK.Ctrl+S=EXTEND_1

HK.Ctrl+U=SHOW_UTILITIES

HK.Ctrl+V=PASTE

HK.Ctrl+W=SHOW_WORK_MODES

HK.Ctrl+X=CUT

#HK.Ctrl+Y=SAVE_REPORT

HK.Ctrl+Z=DISPLAY_IMAGES+START_DICTATION,0

HK.Ctrl+Space=STATE_SELECTION

#HK.Ctrl+Right=MOVE_PALETTE_RIGHT

#HK.Ctrl+Left=MOVE_PALETTE_LEFT

#HK.Ctrl+Up=MOVE_PALETTE_UP

#HK.Ctrl+Down=MOVE_PALETTE_DOWN

#HK.Ctrl+Page_Up=MOVE_PALETTE_PAGE_UP

#HK.Ctrl+Page_Down=MOVE_PALETTE_PAGE_DOWN

Ctrl+Alt

HK.Ctrl+Alt+A=SELECT_APPROVERS

HK.Ctrl+Alt+D=MEASURE_DISTANCE

HK.Ctrl+Alt+F=MAMMO_FIT_TO_BREAST

HK.Ctrl+Alt+H=FLIP_HORIZONTAL

HK.Ctrl+Alt+I=ROI_RECTANGLE

HK.Ctrl+Alt+K=MEASURE_CALIBRATION

2063534-001 Rev 2 162

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-15: Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values (Continued)

Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

HK.Ctrl+Alt+L=AUTO_PERF_LOG

HK.Ctrl+Alt+M=MEASURE_ANGLE

HK.Ctrl+Alt+O=ROI_OVAL

HK.Ctrl+Alt+P=PIXELS_LENS

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Q=MAMMO_QUADRANT_ZOOM

HK.Ctrl+Alt+R=RESET_WINDOW_LEVEL_LAST_SAVED

HK.Ctrl+Alt+S=SAVE_ALL

HK.Ctrl+Alt+T=TEXT_ANNOTATION

HK.Ctrl+Alt+V=FLIP_VERTICAL

HK.Ctrl+Alt+W=CLOSE_ALL

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Y=CRASH_IE

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Z=SCROLL_CINE

HK.Ctrl+Alt+1=LUT_PRESET_1

HK.Ctrl+Alt+2=LUT_PRESET_2

HK.Ctrl+Alt+3=LUT_PRESET_3

HK.Ctrl+Alt+4=LUT_PRESET_4

HK.Ctrl+Alt+5=LUT_PRESET_5

HK.Ctrl+Alt+6=LUT_PRESET_6

HK.Ctrl+Alt+7=LUT_PRESET_7

HK.Ctrl+Alt+8=LUT_PRESET_8

HK.Ctrl+Alt+9=LUT_PRESET_9

HK.Ctrl+Alt+0=LUT_PRESET_0

Ctrl+Shift

HK.Ctrl+Shift+A=ARROW_ANNOTATION

HK.Ctrl+Shift+C=MANUAL_CINE

HK.Ctrl+Shift+D=ROTATE_CLOCKWISE

2063534-001 Rev 2 163

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-15: Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values (Continued)

Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

HK.Ctrl+Shift+E=ROI_POLYGON

HK.Ctrl+Shift+F=SPATIAL_CURSOR

HK.Ctrl+Shift+G=SIGNIFICANT_IMAGE_SELECTION

HK.Ctrl+Shift+H=HIDE_IMAGE

HK.Ctrl+Shift+I=IMAGE_ABOUT_INFORMATION

HK.Ctrl+Shift+J=DRAG_DROP_IMAGE

HK.Ctrl+Shift+K=LAST_ZOOM_EXACT_VALUE

HK.Ctrl+Shift+L=RESET_LAST_SAVED

HK.Ctrl+Shift+M=MAGIC_GLASS

HK.Ctrl+Shift+N=CINE_LOCK_MOUSE

HK.Ctrl+Shift+O=FIT_TO_DISPLAY_REGION

HK.Ctrl+Shift+P=IMAGE_PAN

HK.Ctrl+Shift+Q=QUADRANT_ZOOM

HK.Ctrl+Shift+R=ROTATE_COUNTER_CLOCKWISE

HK.Ctrl+Shift+S=IMAGE_SELECTION

HK.Ctrl+Shift+T=ROI_WINDOW_LEVEL

HK.Ctrl+Shift+U=KEY_IMAGE_SELECTION

HK.Ctrl+Shift+V=IMAGE_SHUTTER

HK.Ctrl+Shift+W=WINDOW_LEVEL

HK.Ctrl+Shift+Y=CUSTOMIZED_ZOOM

HK.Ctrl+Shift+Z=CONTINUOUS_ZOOM

Alt+Shift

HK.Alt+Shift+B=TOGGLE_SERIES_HOTZONE_POPUPMENU

HK.Alt+Shift+E=DELETE_BOOKMARK

HK.Alt+Shift+F=TOGGLE_COMP_HOTZONE_POPUPMENU

#HK.Alt+Shift+H=SAVE_BOOKMARK

2063534-001 Rev 2 164

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Table 13-15: Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values (Continued)

Shortcut Key Properties with Default Values

HK.Alt+Shift+K=DICTATE_CLOSE_NEXTEXAM

HK.Alt+Shift+M=DISPLAY_MORE_BOOKMARKS

HK.Alt+Shift+Y=HIDE_OVERLAY_AND_HIDE_ALL_PALETTES

Ctrl+Alt+Shift

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Shift+C=WRITE_CURRENT_CDP

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Shift+D=DUMP_IMAGES_OF_A_LAYOUT

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Shift+E=RUN_WINDOWS_EXPLORER

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Shift+J=RENDER_STANDALONE_USING_J2D

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Shift+P=WRITE_DDPS

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Shift+S=SAVE_IMAGE_AS

HK.Ctrl+Alt+Shift+T=WRITE_DECISION_TREES

54-2: Unassigning a Shortcut Key for a Workstation

The following procedure explains how to unassign a shortcut key from a function for a
Workstation. The shortcut key will be unavailable to all users from this Workstation only.

To unassign a shortcut key from a function for a Workstation:

1. Open the Tools Editor and locate the comma-delimited property

HK.UNASSIGNEDCOMMANDS.

2. For the shortcut key that you want to unassign, add the function’s property
representation to the Custom column for the property
HK.UNASSIGNEDCOMMANDS. You can unassign multiple shortcut keys. For
example, to unassign the More Display Protocols function, add MORE_DDP to the
Custom column.

Result: The shortcut key is unassigned from the function. Also, in the Keyboard
Shortcuts tab on the Utilities palette, the Assigned Shortcuts list box displays the label

UNASSIGNED and a Workstation icon next to the shortcut key that was unassigned.
The Workstation icon indicates that the shortcut key is unavailable to all users from this
Workstation only.

Users can reassign shortcut keys that were unassigned at the Workstation level.

2063534-001 Rev 2 165

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

54-3: Configuring the Relative Zoom Shortcut Key

To configure the relative zoom shortcut key:

1. Using the Tools Editor, use the following property to change the default value:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.LayoutActionAdapter.customZ
oomfactor=4.00

Section 55: CAD Markers

55-1: Hiding the NO CAD Marker Indicator

To hide the NO CAD marker indicator:

1. Using the Tools Editor, set the following property to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.hide_C
AD_FindingsNotAvailableString=true

55-2: CAD Markers in a Mammo Stepped Protocol

55-2-1: Enabling the Repeat CAD Marker Navigation Mode

To enable the repeat CAD marker navigation mode:

1. Using the Tools Editor, set the value for the following property to 2:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.mammography.view.StepNavigationController.st
epnavigationmode=2

2. To enable the repeat CAD marker navigation mode functionality on “Other” views, set
the value for the following property to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.mammography.view.StepNavigationController.ca
dForOtherViews=true

55-2-2: Enabling the Show CAD Marker Navigation Mode

To enable the show CAD marker navigation mode:

1. Using the Tools Editor, set the value for the following property to 1:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.mammography.view.StepNavigationController.st
epnavigationmode=1

2. To enable the show CAD marker navigation mode functionality on “Other” views, set
the value for the following property to true:

2063534-001 Rev 2 166

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.mammography.view.StepNavigationController.ca
dForOtherViews=true

Section 56: Support for TE and PV Images

56-1: Enabling the Process Type Indicator and “Missing” Messages

The TE and PV processing type indicators and the “TE Missing” and “PV Missing”
messages are disabled by default. To enable the processing type indicators and the
“Missing” messages:

1. Using the Tools Editor, verify the value for the following property is set to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.imagegrouping.ImageGrouper.enablePVTEPreference=true

56-2: Controlling the Location of the Processing Type Indicator

The following property controls the location of the processing type indicator for Essential
overlays:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFact
ory.MG‐ESSENTIAL‐MGTOP‐2=207|NOLABEL|HEADER

The following property controls the location of the processing type indicator for Full
overlays:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFact
ory.MG‐FULL‐MGTOP‐9=207|NOLABEL|HEADER

56-3: Handling Unavailable Images

56-3-1: Non-GE Images

To display a missing message for non-GE images:

1. Using the Tools Editor, verify the value for the following property is set to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.imagegrouping.ImageGrouper.ImageProcessing.
ShowImageProcessingTypeMissingMsgForNonGE=true

56-3-2: Raw Images as a Fallback

If PV and/or TE images are not available, you can have raw images displayed as a
fallback.

To display raw images as a fallback:

2063534-001 Rev 2 167

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

1. Using the Tools Editor, verify the value for the following property is set to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.imagegrouping.ImageGrouper.ImageProcessingF
allbackToRAW=true

Section 57: Seno Advantage Keypad Integration

57-1: Connecting the Seno Advantage Keypad

The Seno Advantage keypad is compatible with any RA1000 Centricity Workstation that
has an RS232 serial port (commonly called a COM port in Windows). A USB-RS232
adapter and driver are required for Workstations that are not equipped with an RS232
serial port.

Note: GE does not provide the USB-RS232 adapter.

To connect the Seno Advantage keypad to an RA1000 Workstation:

1. Connect the keypad to an RS232 serial port on the RA1000 Workstation. Use the
default port COM1. If there are multiple COM ports and COM1 is being used for
something else, then connect the keypad to a different port.

2. If the Workstation is not equipped with an RS232 serial port, then use a USB-RS232
adapter to connect the keypad to the Workstation. Install the driver that is supplied
with the adapter.

3. Using the Tools Editor, change the following properties:

a. Set the following property to true:

com.ge.med.platinum.keypad.SenoKeypadController.keypadConnectedToSerial=true

Note: By default this property is set to false.

b. The default value for the following property is COM1. Change the value only if you
selected a different COM port in step 1.

com.ge.med.platinum.keypad.SenoKeypadController.commport=COM1

57-2: Controlling the Contrast and Brightness of the Keypad Knobs

To control the amount of contrast and brightness of the keypad knobs:

1. Using the Tools Editor, enter a value for the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.keypad.SenoKeyPadScrollController.wl_factor

This property controls the amount of contrast and brightness that can be changed for
each knob. The default value is 5. The value that you set should be greater than zero.

2063534-001 Rev 2 168

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Section 58: Configuring Archiving on Configurable Exam Status

Prerequisites:

 You must have the following privileges:

 CATViewSysConfiguration

 CATPACSSysConfigUpdate

 For non-U.S. sites, System Locale Country, System Locale Language, and
Translated Text Encoding Format have to match the site.

Note: When modifying configurations, modifications are only possible for the fields
containing black text. Fields with light gray text cannot be changed.

To configure the archiving on configurable exam status, do the following:

1. Log in to CAT as the Administrator.

2. In the Navigation panel, under Administration, click Sys. Configuration.

3. In the Select list, select PACS Configuration.

Result: The PACS Configuration window displays a list of available PACS

configurations.

4. Find the Exam Transition Status configuration.

The Exam Status Transition value triggers archive submission. Supported values
would include Verified (50), Read-Offline (55), Dictated (60), Transcribed (70), and
Completed (90). Archive submission will occur when an exam with images is set to a
value equal to or greater than the configured status value. Default value is 50
(Verified).

Result: The selected configuration’s details are displayed in the System Config
section.

a. Edit the configuration’s details as needed.

Warning: 1) When using third-party archives, delaying archiving as long as possible

reduces the risk of rejected images getting archived and possibly accessed or
viewed. Therefore, it is advisable to configure the system to archive exams on
Completion (90).

2) When using Enterprise Archive, updating the EA with image rejection status
events reduces the risk of rejected images getting archived and possibly
accessed or viewed. It is important to configure the ENM ImageUpdated
notification event to update EA with image rejection status.

b. Click Save.

5. Find the Auto Archive Age configuration.

2063534-001 Rev 2 169

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

The Auto Archive Age is number of hours after the acquisition status is changed to
closed and after which a study will become eligible for archival. The IMS daemon task
(AutoArchive) will then pick up this study and submit it to the archive queue. Default
value is 168 hours (one week).

The selected configuration’s details are displayed in the System Config section.

a. Edit the configuration’s details as needed.

b. Click Save.

6. Find the Remote Exam Closed Acquisition Allowed configuration.

The Remote Exam Closed Acquisition Allowed is a sitewide setting that determines
how the system handles SOP additions to a pre-existing Remote exam (lta_stat=R)
that is closed for acquisition.

Allowable values are “Y” (Allow SOP additions to a pre-existing remote exam that is
closed for acquisition) and 'N' (Do Not Allow SOP additions to a pre-existing remote
exam that is closed for acquisition.). Default value is Y.

Result: The selected configuration’s details are displayed in the System Config
section.

a. Edit the configuration’s details as needed.

b. Click Save.

7. Restart the Middle Tier.

Section 59: Enabling and Configuring Rejected Image Deletion

Prerequisites:

 You must have the following privileges:

 CATViewSysConfiguration

 CATPACSSysConfigUpdate

 CATSystemMonitorView

 CATDBMaintUpdateStatus

 For non-U.S. sites, the System Locale Country, System Locale Language, and
Translated Text Encoding Format values have to match the site.

Note: When modifying configurations, modifications are only possible for the fields
containing black text. Fields with light gray text cannot be changed.

To enable and configure the Rejected Image Deletion feature, do the following:

1. Verify that the Rejected Image Deletion feature is enabled:

2063534-001 Rev 2 170

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

a. Log in to CAT as the Administrator.

b. In the Navigation panel, under Administration, click Sys. Configuration.

c. In the Select list, select PACS Configuration.

Result: The PACS Configuration window displays a list of available PACS

configurations.

d. Find the Minimum Rejected Image Deletion Time configuration.

The Minimum Rejected Image Deletion Time is the minimum period of time (in
minutes) after which a rejected image is eligible for deletion. A compatible version
of AIM must be installed and configured to work with this feature. Default is –1
(inactive).

Result: The selected configuration’s details are displayed in the System Config
section.

Note: The CAT configuration for enabling the Rejected Image Deletion feature also
controls the interval of time after which a rejected image is eligible for deletion.

e. Edit the configuration’s details as needed.

f. Click Save.

g. Restart the Middle Tier.

Warning: 1) When using third-party archives, delaying archiving as long as possible

reduces the risk of rejected images getting archived and possibly accessed or
viewed. Therefore, it is advisable to configure the system to archive exams on
Completion (90).

2) When using Enterprise Archive, updating the EA with image rejection status
events reduces the risk of rejected images getting archived and possibly
accessed or viewed. It is important to configure the ENM ImageUpdated
notification event to update EA with image rejection status.

Note: To configure the system to archive exams on completion (90), see “Configuring
Archiving on Configurable Exam Status” on page 169.

2. Verify that ENM is configured to subscribe to the “DeleteSOP” event. For more
information, see “Configuring ENM (Event Notification Manager)” in the Centricity
PACS Servers Service Manual.

3. Verify that the database task that deletes rejected images is enabled:

a. Log in to CAT as the Administrator.

b. In the Navigation panel, under Administration, click System Monitor.

Result: The System Monitor window is displayed.

c. In the Select list, select Dbase Maintenance.

Result: The list of database maintenance tasks is displayed.

2063534-001 Rev 2 171

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

d. In the list of tasks, find an click the DelRejImg database maintenance task.

The status and start/end times for the task are displayed in the Database
Maintenance section.

Note: By default, the DelRejImg task runs at 2:00am each day.

e. To enable the DelRejImg task, verify it is set to IDLE. If the DelRejImg task is set
to SUSPEND, change it to IDLE:

i. In the Change to list, select the following status:

IDLE—the task is eligible to run when the next start time is met.

ii. Click Update Status.

4. To reject an image, workstation users must have the user privilege of “RejectImage”.
Verify the users rejecting images either had the privilege of “RejectImage” or belong to
a user group that has the “RejectImage” IMS Function privilege in CAT. See the
Centricity PACS System Administrator Online Help Manual, “Default User
Group Privileges” and “Folder Privileges” section.

a. Log in to the Workstation as a user with the correct user and folder privileges for
rejecting an image.

b. Reject a test image in the Workstation application.

Note: After rejected images are deleted: 1) image references that might still reside in GSPS/
KINs (and that refer to rejected images that have been deleted) will no longer be able
to display the rejected images that have been deleted from the system, 2) the unreject
feature is no longer available for the image, 3) the reasons for image rejection are not
retained in the system, so the Centricity Administration Tool (CA Tool) Reject Image
report will not display information for rejected images deleted from the system, and 4)
unless the rejected image deletion event “DeleteSOP” is subscribed to, there will be
no permanent record of image rejection.

5. Use the command for individual image deletion to delete the test image.

a. On the IMS, enter the following command

execute rejected_image_deletion @IMAGE_CKEY=nnnn,@AUTO_FLAG=0

Where:

nnnn is image_ckey (an integer representing the unique image identifier)

b. See sample command and response:

1> execute rejected_image_deletion @IMAGE_CKEY=9999,@AUTO_FLAG=0

2> go

(return status = 0)

6. Confirm that the DeleteSOP event is logged in ENM for the test image.

2063534-001 Rev 2 172

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

For more information, see “Configuring ENM (Event Notification Manager)” in the
Centricity PACS Servers Service Manual.

7. (Optional step) Verify that the DelRejImage task runs correctly.

a. Reconfigure the DelRejImage task to run 15 to 30 minutes from the time you are
configuring it.

b. Reject another test image, and check the ENM log to see if the DelRejImg task
automatically deletes the rejected image in question.

Note: When you are through checking the DelRejImage task, verify to reset it back to
the default setting of running at 2:00am.

Section 60: Configuring Hardware Properties for Size Synchronization

with Mixed Monitors

Important The RA1000 Workstation does not currently support calibration software for
monitor resolution. If a site uses the size synchronization feature in a mixed
monitor configuration, it is strongly recommended that you configure the
Hardware.properties file for each monitor, which ensures that the workstation
monitors provide additional accuracy in monitor resolution and pixel spacing.

Note: The RA1000 does not allow you to size synchronize mammography images.

To configure the Hardware.properties file for size synchronization with mixed monitors, do
the following.

1. Do the following to change the property that controls whether or not the hardware
properties file is read for head information, to configure the number of mixed monitors
used to display images, and to indicate the starting monitor in the mixed monitor
configuration.

a. Navigate to the following directory on the workstation:

C:\platinum\support

b. Open the Hardware.properties file and find the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.view.DisplayHeadManager.readFromProperties=

c. If the property is set to false, set it to true as shown:

com.ge.med.platinum.view.DisplayHeadManager.readFromProperties=true

d. Find the following section and set it according to the comments in the file:

com.ge.med.platinum.view.DisplayHeadManager.numHeads=N

N = total number of monitors (called heads), including mixed monitors, if present.

This number indicates the number of monitors you actually want to use to
display images, not the total number of monitors that are attached to the
system.

2063534-001 Rev 2 173

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

e. Find the following section and set it according to the comments in the file:

com.ge.med.platinum.view.DisplayHeadManager.startHead=NStart

NStart = The first monitor (called head index) from which you want the application
to start. This property, along with the numHeads property, determines which
monitors to use for the application. Note that this value is zero-based, which
means the first monitor is 0, the second monitor is 1, and so forth.

f. Save the Hardware.properties file.

2. Keep the Hardware.properties file open. For each monitor in the mixed monitor
configuration, do the following to assign the correct resolution for each monitor (called
“head” in the Hardware.properties file):

a. Find “Head Dimensions” section of the file (sample below):

# Head Dimensions

..

..

# Head No. 0

com.ge.med.platinum.view.DisplayHeadManager.headNum.0.width=1280

com.ge.med.platinum.view.DisplayHeadManager.headNum.0.height=1024

com.ge.med.platinum.view.DisplayHeadManager.headNum.0.resolution=
***

Where:

1280 is the monitor width in pixels

1024 is the monitor height in pixels

*** is the monitor resolution DPI, which you must calculate

b. Check the setup of the monitor to see if the display size on the monitor needs to
be adjusted for additional accuracy when using the size synchronization feature:

i. Enter the pixel width value after “width=”.

In Windows Display Properties for the monitor, get this information for the
pixel width of the monitor. In the example above, pixel width is 1280.

ii. Enter the pixel height value after “height=”.

In Windows Display Properties for the monitor, get this information for the
pixel height of the monitor. In the example above, pixel height is 1024.

iii. Measure the display width of the monitor (in inches).

In this example, we use the measure of 14.1 inches as the display width.

2063534-001 Rev 2 174

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

iv. Measure the display height of the monitor (in inches).

In this example, we use the measure of 11.3 inches as the display height.

v. Calculate DPI width.

DPI width = width in pixels / width in inches

In this example: 1280/14.1 = 90.78

vi. Calculate DPI height.

DPI height = height in pixels / height in inches

In this example: 1024/11.3 = 90.61

vii. Enter the DPI resolution after “resolution=”.

DPI Resolution to enter is either the DPI width or DPI height, whichever
number is higher. Round up to the next whole number any fractional values of
0.5 or greater. In this example, 90.78 should be rounded up to 91.

viii. Calculate the percent difference in DPI resolution between DPI width and DPI
height.

Percent difference in DPI resolution = (DPI width – DPI height) / DPI width

In this example: (90.61 – 90.78) / 90.78 = –0.177%

ix. If the absolute value of the percent difference between DPI width and DPI
height is greater than plus or minus 1%:

The hardware properties for the monitor are not correctly configured for
additional accuracy when using the size synchronization feature with mixed
monitors. If possible, you should use the display size buttons on the front of
the monitor to change the display width and/or display height until the percent
difference between DPI width and DPI height is less than or equal to plus or
minus 1%. Otherwise, try a different screen resolution mode in the Windows
Display Properties dialog or use another monitor with square pixels.

x. If the absolute value of the percent difference between DPI width and DPI
height is less than or equal to plus or minus 1%:

The hardware properties for the monitor are already correctly configured for
additional accuracy when using the size synchronization feature with mixed
monitors. No further action is necessary. This is the case in the example used
in this procedure, where absolute value of the percent difference between DPI
width and DPI height is 0.177%.

2063534-001 Rev 2 175

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

A full representation of this example is:

xi. Save the Hardware.properties file.

3. Repeat step 2 for each monitor in the mixed monitor configuration.

4. When you are through configuring the monitors in the mixed monitor configuration,
save and close the Hardware properties file.

Section 61: Migrating to and Configuring PACS Sites with RIS-IC

61-1: Migrating RIS Data to RIS-IC

Warning: By default, RIS-IC sends the RIS accession number to both the PACS
ris_exam_id and order_nbr fields. Before you migrate to or install a RIS-IC
system:

1. Verify the RIS accession number is mapped to the PACS ris_exam_id and
order_nbr fields.

2. Verify that the order_nbr field matches the ris_exam_id field in PACS for all
exams currently in PACS.

Some desktop integration functions may not work correctly if the order_nbr
field does not match the ris_exam_id field, which could lead to no exam being
displayed or the incorrect exam being displayed.

PACS supports more than one mapping for accession number, such as mapping
accession number to ris_exam_id or order_nbr. However, the desktop integration
currently requires the order_nbr field to match the ris_exam_id field in order for the
desktop integration to work correctly. It is necessary to verify the order_nbr field matches
the ris_exam_id field for all exam data currently in PACS.

The RIS accession number should always be mapped to ris_exam_id. It is normally

mapped to the order_nbr field as well, unless the site has used this field for some other
purpose.

To set the properties for PACS sites with RIS-IC data only or PACS sites with RIS-IC data
with RIS data, see Configuring PACS Sites with RIS and RIS-IC for more information
about the properties to set.

Warning: If the RIS accession number is not mapped to the order_nbr field, confirm that
the site is not using the desktop integration and that the site fully understands

2063534-001 Rev 2 176

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

that the desktop integration may not work correctly, which could lead to no
exam being displayed or the incorrect exam being displayed.

61-2: Configuring PACS Sites with RIS and RIS-IC

If a site is using PACS with RIS-IC, specific configurations may need to be made based on
site needs.

When PACS is used with RIS-IC, regardless of whether the site is in RIS-driven mode or
PACS-driven mode, the desktop integration requires the RIS-IC accession number in both
the and order_nbr and ris_exam_id fields on PACS. However, some sites may have
custom configurations where the order_nbr field does not match the ris_exam_id field.
Other sites may add RIS-IC integration to an existing PACS, and the PACS order_nbr
field may have been used for other purposes, such as a custom worklist.

Two properties, when both set to the same value, allow sites to control whether

 PACS launches images based on the order_nbr field,

OR

 PACS launches images based on the ris_exam_id field.

Note: Configuration is based on comparing the data stored in the order_nbr and
ris_exam_id fields.

To configure PACS sites with RIS-IC:

1. Locate and/or add the following properties:

 In the platinum.property file, the following RA1000 platinum property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.work.Exam.useOrderNumberInsteadOfRISExamI
D=

 In the extend.property file, the following Extend property:

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.getACCByOrderNumber=

Note: You can add these properties to the platinum_custom.properties and

extend.properties files for some or all workstations or set them as a system-level
preference using the Tools Editor.

2. Because configuring PACS sites with RIS-IC is based on comparing the data stored in
the order_nbr and ris_exam_id fields, do one of the following:

 If the order_nbr field and the ris_exam_id fields are identical for all exams, these
properties can be left at their default setting of “true”. These properties are set to
“true” by default, which allows PACS to use the order_nbr field to launch images.
This scenario is the recommended configuration for all RIS-IC/PACS integrations.

Setting both properties to true means PACS uses the order_nbr field when
launching images in the desktop integration:

 In the Platinum.properties file, set the following RA1000 platinum property:

2063534-001 Rev 2 177

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.work.Exam.useOrderNumberInsteadOfRISEx
amID=true

 In the Extend.properties file, set the following Extend property:

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.getACCByOrderNumber=true

This (default) setting of both properties to “true” should be used if the order_nbr
field and the ris_exam_id fields are identical for all exams. The setting of both
properties to “true” means PACS uses the order_nbr field when launching
images in the desktop integration.

OR

 If the order_nbr field and the ris_exam_id fields are not identical for all exams,
then both of the properties above should be set to “false”. Using a setting of
"false" for these two properties allows PACS to use the ris_exam_id field with the
desktop integration.

Setting both properties to “false” means PACS uses the ris_exam_id field when
launching images in the desktop integration.

 In the platinum.property file, the following RA1000 platinum property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.work.Exam.useOrderNumberInsteadOfRISEx
amID=false

 In the extend.property file, the following Extend property:

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.getACCByOrderNumber=false

The setting of both properties to “false” should be used if the order_nbr field and
the ris_exam_id fields are not identical for all exams. The setting of both
properties to “false” means PACS uses the ris_exam_id field when launching
images in the desktop integration.

Warning: By default, both RIS-IC and PACS assume the accession number and order
number are identical. If the order_nbr field does not match the ris_exam_id
field, you must set or add the following properties as shown:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.work.Exam.useOrderNumberInsteadOfRISExamI
D=false

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.extend1.getACCByOrderNumber=false

If you do not set the properties as shown when the order_nbr field does not
match the ris_exam_id field, the desktop integration will not work correctly.
The desktop integration not working correctly could lead to no exam being
displayed or an incorrect exam being displayed.

Section 62: Configuring the Association Worklist Format

Effective with 3.2, the Association Worklist format is configurable, with a format defined in
CAT that is applied. The CAT format is named "AssociationWorklistFormat." If there is no

2063534-001 Rev 2 178

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

CAT format defined, the property file definition is applied. If there are no definitions in
either file, the default format is applied.

The default format is the following:

27(6,Accession), 9(10,Procedure), 8(3,MdL), 10(3,Img), 17(10,Study Time), 22(4,Online),

42(8,Status).

The property file is from prefix com.ge.med.platinum.AssociationWorklistFormat.

Section 63: Configuring the Availability of Stack Sync Options on the

Utilities Palette

With a property change and a Utilities Palette change, Stack Sync (an enhanced form of
linking) can be enabled or disabled for use.

When enabled, Stack Sync allows users to select multiple Image Display Series that are
all in the Stack mode and to synchronize these series so that all of the series show the
same relative anatomical location.

Note: The property that allows the user to control the enabling or disabling of Stack Sync on
the Workstation is enabled by default. The display option setting on the RA1000
workstation for using Stack Sync is disabled by default.

Important Enabling Stack Sync is a two-step process: 1) Enable the platinum property (if
not already enabled) that lets users enable and disable Stack Sync at the user
preference level (Utilities Palette), and 2) As long as the platinum property is
already enabled, change the display options setting in the Display Options
setting on the RA1000 Workstation for each user that wants to use Stack Sync.

Disabling Stack Sync is a one-step process: Disabling the platinum property (if
not already disabled) that lets users enable or disable Stack Sync at the user
preference level (Utilities Palette), OR if the platinum property is enabled,
change the display options setting in the Display Options setting on the RA1000
Workstation for each user that wants to disable Stack Sync at the user level.

To enable or disable Stack Sync:

1. Change the property for Stack Sync.

a. In the platinum.property file, locate the following RA1000 platinum property:

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.ViewPreferencePanel.turnOnSynchStackFeat
ure=

Where:

true—include on the Utilities Palette the option to enable and disable Stack Sync on the
workstation (the default setting, effective 3.2.2 and later)

false—exclude from the Utilities Palette the option to enable and disable Stack Sync on
the workstation

2063534-001 Rev 2 179

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

b. Do one of the following:

 To allow the user to control the enabling or disabling of Stack Sync on the
Workstation, change the value of false to true.

OR

 To not allow the user to control the enabling or disabling of Stack Sync on the
Workstation, change the value of true to false.

c. Save and close the platinum.property file and restart the RA1000 Workstation.

Note: You can add this property to the platinum_custom.properties file for some or all
workstations or set it as a system-level preference using the Tools Editor.

2. If it is open, exit and restart the Workstation application.

3. In the RA1000 Workstation application, change the Display Options setting for Stack
Sync.

a. Navigate to the Utilities > Preferences > Display Preferences tab.

b. In the Display Options section, do one of the following:

 To enable Stack Sync, select the Enable Stack Sync check box.

OR

 If the ability to enable or disable Stack Sync was disabled with the property
setting to disable this ability on the Workstation, the Enable Stack Sync
check box no longer appears on the Display Preferences tab.

Section 64: Configuring Server Selection for the Utilities Palette Exam
Manager

The Utilities Palette Exam Manager server selection is default configured to use multiple
servers, for users who need to log in to different servers based on the server location of
the Exam Manager application (this is the default configuration that is generally used.

The Utilities Palette Exam Manager server selection also can be configured for a static IP
address (a custom configuration).

There are two possible configurations for server selection for the Utilities Palette Exam
Manager application:

 Default Configuration (no action necessary)

 Non-Standard Configuration for Server Selection for Utilities Palette Exam Manager

2063534-001 Rev 2 180

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

64-1: Default Configuration (no action necessary)

By default, when users log into the RA1000 workstation that is configured for multiple
servers and uses the Exam Manager functionality in the Utilities palette, the Utilities
Palette Exam Manager session is pointed to the same server that the workstation is
logged into. The default configuration is the generally used configuration.

To maintain the configuration for multiple server selection, the property that allows static
configuration is commented out by default. This property is in the ServerInfo.properties
file, which is in the Platinum directory, in the Support subdirectory. This property should
remain commented out (pound symbol remains at the start of the line) for the default
configuration to remain in effect:

This property is as follows by default, for dynamic selection of multiple servers, to prevent
static IP address assignment for the Utilities Palette Exam Manager:

#com.ge.med.platinum.extend.ie.webAddress=http://0.0.0.0:80/psem/
servlet/psem.PSEM

64-2: Non-Standard Configuration for Server Selection for Utilities Palette

Exam Manager

Important If you are using the default configuration for dynamic server selection for the
Utilities Palette Exam Manager, do not use the procedure in this section. This
procedure is only used to configure the Utilities Palette Exam Manager to use a
static IP address for server selection.

As a custom configuration, in special cases, a property can be set to force the Utilities
Palette Exam Manager to always use a specific server IP address for the Exam Manager
application. When this property is set, it allows a user to be logged into one server for their
workstation session and logged into another server for their Utilities Palette Exam
Manager session.

To do this non-standard configuration:

1. Locate the ServerInfo.properties file. This file is in the platinum directory, in the
support subdirectory.

2. Find the property listed below:

#com.ge.umed.platinum.extend.ie.webAddress=http://0.0.0.0:80/psem/
servlet/psem.PSEM

To allow static configuration of the IP address for static IP address for server selection, the
property above, which allows static configuration, is uncommented and the static IP
address is added. This property is in the Platinum directory, in the Support folder, in the
ServerInfo.properties file. This property should be uncommented (pound symbol removed
at the start of the line) to use the property for static IP configuration.

Warning: If you are using the com.ge.med.platinum.extend.ie.webAddress=http://

1.2.3.4:80/psem/servlet/psem.PSEM property to set the Utilities Palette Exam
Manager server selection to a static IP address, discuss this configuration with
the site’s system administrator and inform the system administrator and the
users at the site of the results that users will experience with this configuration.

2063534-001 Rev 2 181

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

Overriding the default dynamic selection of the IP address for the Utilities
Palette Exam Manger allows a user to be logged into one server for the
Workstation session and logged into another server for the Exam Manager
session. If users are not informed that their workstation session is pointed at
one server and their Utilities Palette Exam Manager session is pointed at
another server, this situation might result in a user unknowingly using the
Utilities Palette Exam Manager to change patient or exam data on a server they
did not intend to update.

A sample of this property is as follows, uncommented to override dynamic selection of

multiple servers, and to use static IP address assignment instead for the Utilities Palette
Exam Manager:

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.ie.webAddress=http://1.2.3.4:80/psem/servlet/
psem.PSEM

Where:

1.2.3.4 is a sample IP address for static IP address configuration for the Utilities
Palette Exam Manager application server

3. Save and close the ServerInfo.properties file and restart the Workstation.

Section 65: Enabling the NBSS Interface

In order to use the NBSS interface to open exams you need to first install the General
Extends Interface. Once you have installed general Extends, you can test NBSS by using
CLIWrapper.exe from the Windows Command Window.

To display a patient’s exams for screening, use the command:

cliwrapper ds <patient ID>

To display a patient’s exams for assessment, use the command:

cliwrapper da <patient ID>

<patient ID> is required for ds and da. You may also specify the authority code along with
these parameters as follows:

cliwrapper ds <patient ID> <authority code>

or

cliwrapper da <patient ID> <authority code>

To close all open exams, use the command:

cliwrapper dx

For more information about using NBSS with the cliwrapper or the General Extends API,
see the Generic Extend API Specification.

2063534-001 Rev 2 182

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

65-1: Configuring PACS for NBSS

In order to properly inform operators when mammograms they are looking at are out of
date (greater than a configured number of days old), you need to enable a property in
custom.platinum.properties.

1. Open %PLAT_HOME%\support\platinum_custom.properties.

2. Set the mammogram overlay property to true.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.showOu
tdatedImageIndicator=true

3. If you need to change the number of days before a mammogram is considered to be

out of date, set the property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayMVC.outdat
edImageThresholdDays

The default value is 180 days.

4. Restart the RA1000 for the changes to take effect.

65-1-1: Configuring the Overall Mode for Displaying Out of Date MG Image
Information Pop-ups

You can change whether the Out of Date MG image information pop-ups display or not.
The default setting of the property is shown below:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.outdatedimageinfo.popup.OutdatedIm
ageInfoController.OutdatedImageInfoPopupMode=1

Where:

1 — pop-up display is enabled (pop-up is triggered with a mouse hover over the “image
out of date” overlay display)

0 — pop-up display is disabled

65-1-2: Configuring the Delay after Mouse Hover before the Information Pop-up
Displays

You can change the milliseconds of delay after mouse hover over the “Image out of date”
overlay display before the “Image out of date” information pop-up displays.

The default setting of the property (in milliseconds) is shown below:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.outdatedimageinfo.popup.OutdatedIm
ageInfoPopupHandler.outdatedImageInfoPopupDelayMilliSecs=1000

2063534-001 Rev 2 183

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

65-1-3: Configuring the Size and Position of the Image Out of Date Message

When an out of date mammogram displays, a warning message overlays the image. You
can change the position of the message with the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.MGSystemOverlayMVC.outdated
ImageIndicatorAdjust

Specify a value between 0 and 90. Zero centers the message in the image. 90 centers the
text 90% of the way between the image center and the right edge of the image. The
default is 65.

You can increase the size of the message font with the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.MGSystemOverlayMVC.outdated
ImageIndicatorFontAdjust

Specify the amount by which to increase the font size in points. If the normal font size is 9,
a value of 2 would increase the message font size to 11 points. The default value of this
parameter is 2.

65-1-4: Property for the Image Out of Date Overlay for MG ESSENTIAL Overlay

This property is to be changed only if there is a need to resolve a conflict on the MG

ESSENTIAL overlay.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFactory.
MG‐ESSENTIAL‐BOTTOMCENTER‐0=210|NOLABEL|HEADER

Note: As part of resolving a conflict, the corresponding NUMELEMENTS property might

need to be updated.

65-1-5: Property for the Image Out of Date Overlay for MG FULL Overlay

This property is to be changed only if there is a need to resolve a conflict on the MG FULL
overlay.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.SystemOverlayConfigFactory.
MG‐FULL‐BOTTOMCENTER‐0=210|NOLABEL|HEADER

Note: As part of resolving a conflict, the corresponding NUMELEMENTS property might

need to be updated.

65-2: CLIWrapper Configuration

CLIWrapper.exe requires some settings in CLIWrapper.ini. The DA and DS commands

need to be mapped to procedures within the RA1000. This mapping is done with the
[ActionToProcedureGroup]. The default settings are:

[ActionToProcedureGroup]
DA=GEI‐DA
DS=GEI‐DS

2063534-001 Rev 2 184

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

You also need to set the default behavior of the CLIWrapper with the following settings:

[Defaults]
AuthorityCode=SYSTEM_DEFAULT
CloseAllPrevExamsOnOpen=true

AuthorityCode. The authority code used when none was specified with the
CLIWrapper command. SYSTEM_DEFAULT uses the default PACS authority code.

CloseAllPrevExamsOnOpen. When set to yes, closes all exams in the RA1000

before opening the exams specified with the CLIWrapper command.

Section 66: Configuring the Navigator

This section contains the following:

 “Configuring the Navigator Auto-Display” on page 185

 “Configuring the Double-right Click Display Option” on page 187

 “Configuring the Default Size of Navigator Components” on page 187

 “Configuring the Default Values for the Navigator User Preferences” on page 188

 “Changing the Default Monitor Region Type” on page 189

 “Showing or Hiding the Dynamic Image Grouping Button” on page 190

 “Configuring the Navigator to Receive New Image Notifications” on page 190

66-1: Configuring the Navigator Auto-Display

On the Utilities palette, there is a Navigator user preference titled Automatically display
Navigator when opening exams. When this user preference is selected, the Navigator
displays automatically each time an exam is opened.

There are 2 platinum properties that allow you to change the behavior of this user
preference:

 defaultLaunchOn1stPinnedMonitor

 defaultLaunchOnCMonitor

66-1-1: defaultLaunchOn1stPinnedMonitor

This property controls whether the Navigator automatically displays on a monitor where
the Navigator is pinned. With the Navigator pinned on only one monitor (C or D), the
Navigator automatically displays on that monitor. With the Navigator pinned on multiple
monitors, the Navigator displays on the left-most monitor where the Navigator is pinned.
The default is true.

2063534-001 Rev 2 185

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

To control whether the Navigator automatically displays on a monitor where the Navigator
is pinned:

1. Open the Tools Editor and find the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnailDialog.defaultLaunchOn1stPinnedMonitor

2. Change the value to false to turn off this behavior. Change the value to true to turn
it on.

3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

66-1-2: defaultLaunchOnCMonitor

This property controls whether the Navigator automatically displays on the C monitor or on
the left-most D monitor.

Table 13-16: Values for defaultLaunchOnCMonitor

With the value set to: The Navigator:

True Automatically displays on the C monitor.

If the workstation does not have a C monitor, then the

Navigator displays on the left-most D monitor.

False (the default) Automatically displays on the left-most D monitor.

Note: The property defaultLaunchOn1stPinnedMonitor determines how the property

defaultLaunchOnCMonitor is used. For example:
If defaultLaunchOn1stPinnedMonitor is set to true, then
defaultLaunchOnCMonitor is used only if no Navigators are pinned.
If defaultLaunchOn1stPinnedMonitor is set to false, then
defaultLaunchOnCMonitor is used regardless if Navigators are pinned.

To control whether the Navigator automatically displays on the C monitor or on the left-
most D monitor:

1. Open the Tools Editor and find the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnailDialog.defaultLaunchOnCMonitor

2. Change the value to true to automatically display the Navigator on the C monitor.
Change the value to false to automatically display the Navigator on the left-most D
monitor.
3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

2063534-001 Rev 2 186

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

66-2: Configuring the Double-right Click Display Option

This property enables or disables the ability to double-right-click in a monitor region

(empty or filled) to display the Navigator.

To configure the Navigator’s double-right click display option:

1. Open the Tools Editor and find the following property:

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferencePanel.enableRightDblClickLaunch

2. Change the value to true to enable this option. Change the value to false to disable
the option.
3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

Result: The Navigator double-right click display option is configured.

66-3: Configuring the Navigator Default Position

There is a property that determines how far down from the top of the screen the Navigator
appears when displaying it using the Navigator hover button or the shortcut key. The
default value is 45 pixels, which places the Navigator just under the hover button so it
does not cover up the button.

To configure the Navigator default position on the monitor:

1. Open the Tools Editor and find the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnailDialog.defaultNavYOffset

2. Enter a new default value.

3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

Result: The Navigator default position is configured.

66-4: Configuring the Default Size of Navigator Components

To configure the default size of Navigator components:

1. Open the Tools Editor.

2. Find the following properties and configure them as desired:

 This property sets the width of the timeline. The default is 250 pixels.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnailDialog.defaultTimelineWidth

2063534-001 Rev 2 187

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 The values for these properties are calibrated to calculate the height of the
Navigator for both clinical and diagnostic monitors. Enter values that best fit your
monitor resolution.

The default value for the thumbnail strip height is 160 pixels for the clinical monitor
and 144 pixels for the diagnostic monitor. The default value for the button panel
height is 98 pixels for the clinical monitor and 85 pixels for the diagnostic monitor.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnailDialog.defaultThumbStripHeightC

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnailDialog.defaultThumbStripHeightD

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnailDialog.defaultButtonPanelHeightC

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnailDialog.defaultButtonPanelHeightD

3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

Result: The default size of the Navigator components are configured.

66-5: Configuring the Default Values for the Navigator User Preferences

The Navigator user preferences are located on the Utilities palette. From the Preferences
tab, select the System Preferences tab and scroll down to the Navigator Preferences
section.

To configure the default values for the Navigator user preferences:

1. Open the Tools Editor.

2. Find the following properties and configure them as desired:

 This property sets the default width of the Navigator relative to the size of the
active monitor. For example, setting the default to 75 means the size of the
Navigator from side to side will be 75 percent of the width of the active monitor.
Possible values are 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferencePanel.SnapToolZoomPreference

 This property sets the default height of the Navigator. The value entered here
represents the number of thumbnail strips that can be visible in the Navigator
without having to re-size the Navigator or scroll up or down to view additional
thumbnail strips. Possible values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferencePanel.DisplayedExamStrips

2063534-001 Rev 2 188

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 This property sets the default for the Navigator auto hide user preference. Change
the value to true to enable this property. Change the value to false to disable it.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferencePanel.snapToolAutoHide

 This property sets the default for the Navigator user preference auto hide time.
Possible values are 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, or 10 seconds.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferencePanel.SnapToolTimeToHide

 This property sets the default for the Navigator minimize user preference. Change
the value to true to enable this property. Change the value to false to disable it.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferencePanel.snapToolMinimize

 This property sets the default for the Navigator auto display user preference.
Change the value to true to enable this property. Change the value to false to
disable it.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.ViewPreferencePanel.autoDisplaySeriesNavigator

With this property set to true, the Navigator displays automatically each time an
exam is opened. There are 2 platinum properties that allow you to change the
behavior of this property:

 defaultLaunchOn1stPinnedMonitor

 defaultLaunchOnCMonitor

3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

Result: The default values for the Navigator user preferences are configured.

66-6: Changing the Default Monitor Region Type

You can use the Navigator snap tool to change the layout of the monitor regions. If new
regions are created when changing the monitor layout using the Navigator, then the
properties listed here set the default monitor region type, either stack mode (4) or sheet
mode (2), for those new regions.

To change the default monitor region type:

1. Open the Tools Editor and find the following properties:

2063534-001 Rev 2 189

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

 This property applies to all modalities except CR and MG.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.ImageNavigatorThumbnail.newLayouts‐default

 This property applies to the CR modality only.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.ImageNavigatorThumbnail.newLayouts‐CR

 This property applies to the MG modality only.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.ImageNavigatorThumbnail.newLayouts‐MG

2. Change the value to either 4 (for stack mode) or 2 (for sheet mode).

3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

Result: The default monitor region type is changed.

66-7: Showing or Hiding the Dynamic Image Grouping Button

There is a property that controls if the dynamic image grouping button appears on the
Navigator.

1. Open the Tools Editor and find the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.NavigatorExamPanel.enableDynamicImageGrouping

2. Change the value to true to display the dynamic image grouping button on the
Navigator. This is the default. Change the value to false to hide the button.
3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

66-8: Configuring the Navigator to Receive New Image Notifications

There is a property that controls whether the Navigator receives new image notifications
from the NINController thread.

Note: If NINFeature is set to false, but NIN_Navigator is set to true, then the NINController
thread will continue to send new image notifications to the Navigator. Setting both
NINFeature and NIN_Navigator to true prevents the Navigator from automatically
updating when new images come into an exam.

2063534-001 Rev 2 190

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

1. Open the Tools Editor and find the following property:

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.NINController.NIN_Navigator

2. Change the value to true to enable this option. This is the default. Change the value
to false to disable it.
3. Save and exit the Tools Editor.

Result: The Navigator is configured to receive new image notifications.

Section 67: Precision Reporting Properties (Informational Only)

The properties documented in the following subsections are informational only and not
meant to be configured. These properties are exposed and default configured to the
optimal setting for Precision Reporting sites.

67-1: Property for IDR Simplified Design (informational only)

There is a property that ensures the current correct design integration for Precision
Reporting (PR).

The default setting of the property is shown below:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.extends.ICAPI.IDRSimplifiedDesign=false

Where:

false — (the default setting and the recommended setting for PR sites) current design for
backward compatibility for current PR design integration

true — (not recommended) used only after a PR site has a future PR release that will
allow for a future PR design integration

Note: You can add this property to the platinum_custom.properties file for some or all
workstations or set it as a system-level preference using the Tools Editor.

67-2: Property for ICAPI Worklist Selection (informational only)

There is a property that controls the correct context behavior in Precision Reporting (PR).

The default setting of the property is shown below:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.extends.ICAPI.WorklistSelection=true

Where:

true — (default setting and the recommended setting) for the correct context behavior in
Precision Reporting

2063534-001 Rev 2 191

Chapter 13 Workstation Feature Configuration

false — not recommended

Note: You can add this property to the platinum_custom.properties file for some or all
workstations or set it as a system-level preference using the Tools Editor.

2063534-001 Rev 2 192

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Installing the Accession Number Dialer Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Section 2: Installing Accession Number Dialer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Section 3: Disabling Dial Tone Recognition for the Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Section 4: Integrating the Lanier Dictation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Section 5: Integrating the Dictation System with XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Section 1: Installing the Accession Number Dialer Modem

Use this procedure to connect the Accession Number Dialer Modem to the workstation.

System Alert: Use the grounding strap provided to eliminate any static charge when handling
any hardware.

1-1: System Connection Diagram

Illustration 14-1:Original System Connection Diagram

Dictaphone Hospital
Machine Phone Line

Illustration 14-2:New System Connection Diagram

2063534-001 Rev 2 193

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

System Alert: It is recommended to use a UPS and transient surge protectors.

1-2: Connecting a Modem

To connect a Modem:

1. Shutdown the workstation as documented in the Workstation Online Help.

System Alert: Use the grounding strap provided to eliminate any static charge when handling
any hardware.

2. Set the Dual In-line Package (DIP) switches on the bottom of the USR Courier
V.Everything Modem as follows:

Table 14-1: Modem DIP Switch Settings

DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Setting ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

3. Connect the modem to the workstation as shown in Illustration 14-2: New System
Connection Diagram, on page 193.

4. Power on the modem.

5. Power on the workstation.

6. See “Installing Accession Number Dialer Software” on page 194 to install the
software.

Section 2: Installing Accession Number Dialer Software

This section outlines how to install the Dictation Accession Number Dialer software on the
workstation.

Note: The Dictation system has been validated against the U.S. Robotics/3Com Courier
modem. Other modems may cause problems and GE Healthcare Integrated IT
Solutions does not support these installations.

The Accession Number Dialer for Dictation function dials the accession number of the
currently displayed exam on the workstation to an external modem. Pressing the F2 key or
selecting Start Dictation from the Exam menu on the workstation enables this function.

The modem automatically transmits the accession number from the workstation to a
dictation system that uses an analog phone interface. This saves the Radiologist time by
not having to manually enter the Accession Number using the Dictation keypad.

2063534-001 Rev 2 194

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

Prerequisites:

 See “Installing the Accession Number Dialer Modem” on page 193

2-1: Configuring the Workstation

To configure a workstation:

1. Open Notepad.

2. Select Open from the File menu in Notepad.

3. Modify the %PLAT_HOME%\support\platinum_custom.properties to overwrite the

properties provided in %PLAT_HOME%\support\platinum.properties as necessary.

If needed, the property can be populated as system properties in IMS DB using Tools
Editor to make the new configuration effective globally in all workstations at the site.
See “Tools Editor” on page 263

4. The following is an example of the default configuration provided in

%PLAT_HOME%\support\platinum.properties.

Note: Throughout this manual, PLAT_HOME is used to describe the location where the
application was installed.

2063534-001 Rev 2 195

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

# ModemDialer

# Switch to turn on the lanier or dictaphone

# Lanier=1, DictaPhone=2, Not supported=0

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.DictationController.dictationSystem=2

# Property Common for lanier and dictaphone

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.commPortUsed=COM2

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.displayWarnings=true

########################### Dictaphone Configuration ###############

# baudRate for modem

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.baudRate=9600

## prefix which will be appended in front of exam unique id number

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.prefix=ATX3&D0&R1DT

## suffix will be appended after the exam unique id number

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.suffix=#;h0\r

## This property defines the type of information to be sent from centricity

## Value 1 the system will send exam.order_num

## Value 2 the system will send exam.ris_exam_id

## Value 3 the system will send patient.mrn_number

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.DialerControl.numberType=1

Note: With the above default configuration, the following command is sent from
Centricity to Dictaphone System.

Example: exam.order number in PACS database = 1234567

Command to be sent = ATX3&D0&R1DT1234567#;H0\r

Note: If the exam.order number in PACS has letters in it, then the property:
com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.prefix=ATX3&D0&R1DT should
be changed as follows:

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.prefix=ATX3&D0&R1DT"

2063534-001 Rev 2 196

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

Note: If the “Modem Dialer” text already exists in the Platinum_custom.properties file,
then modify the following parameter for the correct Communication Port (COM1 or
COM2):

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.commPortUsed=COM1

5. Select Save from the File menu to save the Platinum_custom.properties file.

6. Select Exit from the File menu to close Notepad.

7. Check that the Dictaphone is plugged in (as shown in Illustration 14-2: New System
Connection Diagram, on page 193) and operational.

8. Start the workstation.

9. Open an exam and press F2 to verify that the correct exam unique number is sent
with the proper prefix and suffix configured.

2-2: Disabling Dial Tone Recognition for the Modem

To disable dial tone recognition for the modem:

1. Open Hyperterminal.

2. Select Properties from the File menu.

3. Verify that the Connect Using field displays Courier V.Everything External.

If it does not, click the drop-down arrow and select it.

a. Click OK.

b. Enter AT and press Enter.

c. Confirm that a 0 (zero) or OK displays.

If not, refer to “Troubleshooting Dial Tone Recognition” on page 197.

4. Enter ATX3&W.

5. Confirm that a 0 (zero) or OK displays.

If not, refer to “Troubleshooting Dial Tone Recognition” on page 197.

6. Select Exit from the File menu to exit HyperTerminal.

7. Click Yes to confirm that you want to exit.

2-2-1: Troubleshooting Dial Tone Recognition

If not, check the following:

 Modem DIP Switches are setup correctly.

2063534-001 Rev 2 197

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

 Modem Driver is correctly installed.

 Cables are connected as shown in Illustration 14-2: New System Connection

Diagram, on page 193.

2-3: Testing the Dictation Accession Number Dialer Function

2-3-1: Testing Modem Functionality

To test modem functionality:

1. On the Accessories menu open the Phone Dialer.

2. Enter a phone number in the Number to Dial field.

3. Click Dial.

4. Adjust the volume on the modem so that the dial tone is audible.

5. Confirm that you hear a dial tone.

If you do not hear a dial tone, check the following:

 Modem DIP Switches are setup correctly.

 Modem Driver is correctly installed.

 Cables are connected as shown in Illustration 14-2: New System Connection

Diagram, on page 193.

 Workstation is configured as described in “Configuring the Workstation” on

page 195.

6. Click Hang Up when you are finished.

7. Select Exit from the File menu to exit the Phone Dialer application.

2-3-2: Testing Software Functionality

To test software functionality:

1. Launch workstation and log on.

2. Display an exam.

3. Press the F2 key and confirm that you hear a dial tone (corresponding to the exam’s
Accession Number) coming from the modem.

If you do not, check that the workstation is configured as described in “Configuring the
Workstation” on page 195.

2063534-001 Rev 2 198

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

4. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Exam Functions Menu and select Start
Dictation.

If you do not see Start Dictation, verify you have completed step 1 in “Configuring the
Workstation” on page 195.

5. Confirm that you hear a dial tone (corresponding to the exam’s Accession Number)
coming from your modem.

If you do not, check the workstation configuration as described in “Configuring the

Workstation” on page 195.

6. Quit the workstation.

7. Log out of Windows as administrator.

8. Log on to Windows as iis.

Section 3: Disabling Dial Tone Recognition for the Modem

To disable dial tone recognition for the modem:

1. Open Hyperterminal.

2. Select Properties from the File menu.

3. Verify that the Connect Using field displays Courier V.Everything External.

If it does not, click the drop-down arrow and select it.

a. Click OK.

b. Enter AT and press Enter.

c. Confirm that a 0 (zero) or OK displays.

If not, check the following:

 Modem DIP Switches are setup correctly.

 Modem Driver is correctly installed.

 Cables are connected as shown in Illustration 14-2: New System Connection

Diagram, on page 193.

4. Enter ATX3&W.

5. Confirm that a 0 (zero) or OK displays.

If not, check the following:

 Modem DIP Switches are setup correctly.

 Modem Driver is correctly installed.

2063534-001 Rev 2 199

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

 Cables are connected as shown in Illustration 14-2: New System Connection

Diagram, on page 193.

6. Select Exit from the File menu to exit HyperTerminal.

7. Click Yes to confirm that you want to exit.

3-1: Testing the Dictation Accession Number Dialer Function

3-1-1: Testing Modem Functionality

To test modem functionality:

1. On the Accessories menu open the Phone Dialer.

2. Enter a phone number in the Number to Dial field.

3. Click Dial.

4. Adjust the volume on the modem so that the dial tone is audible.

5. Confirm that you hear a dial tone.

If you do not hear a dial tone, check the following:

 Modem DIP Switches are setup correctly.

 Modem Driver is correctly installed.

 Cables are connected as shown in Illustration 14-2: New System Connection

Diagram, on page 193.

 Workstation is configured as described in “Configuring the Workstation” on

page 195.

6. Click Hang Up when you are finished.

7. Select Exit from the File menu to exit the Phone Dialer application.

3-1-2: Testing Software Functionality

To test software functionality:

1. Launch workstation and log on.

2. Display an exam.

3. Press the F2 key and confirm that you hear a dial tone (corresponding to the exam’s
Accession Number) coming from the modem.

If you do not, check if the workstation is configured as described in “Configuring the

Workstation” on page 195.

2063534-001 Rev 2 200

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

4. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Exam button and select Start Dictation.

If you do not see Start Dictation, verify you have completed step 1 in “Configuring the
Workstation” on page 195.

5. Confirm that you hear a dial tone (corresponding to the exam’s Accession Number)
coming from your modem.

If you do not, check the workstation configuration as described in “Configuring the

Workstation” on page 195.

6. Quit the workstation.

7. Log out of Windows as administrator.

8. Log on to Windows as iis.

Section 4: Integrating the Lanier Dictation System

This section describes how to integrate the Lanier Dication System on the workstation. It
includes how to configure the workstation to pass the MRN and Accession Number to the
Lanier Dictation System.

The Lanier integration kit makes it possible for the workstation to send the Medical Record
Number (MRN) and Accession Number to the Lanier Dictation system after clicking the
Start Dictation icon or pressing the F2 key in the Centricity™ graphical user interface
(GUI). The Lanier Dictation System integration kit is positioned as an add-on product,
which the customer can purchase as an option with the workstation.

The workstation outputs data, using the serial port when a physician selects an exam from
the worklist. The data is a string of formatted ASCII characters sent to the Lanier Dictation
System. The string begins with a single asterisk, followed by the MRN, followed by the
Accession Number, and ending with a single asterisk. The number of digits in the MRN
and Accession Number may vary between hospitals and has to be coordinated with the
associated field definitions on the Lanier Dictation System. The number of digits for both
may be adjusted in the custom_property file for the workstation.

4-1: Integrating the System

To integrate the Lanier Dictation System with workstation:

1. Log on to the Centricity Workstation application and open the exam to be dictated.

2. Before a user can start dictation from the workstation you have to call in to the Lanier
dictation server from Lanier Dictation phone. Use the configured quick access button
from the Lanier Dictation phone.

3. When logged on, the dictation system prompts for a MRN number.

4. At this point, use the Start Dictation option under the Exam Tool menu in the View
tab or the F2 shortcut key to send the MRN number and Accession number to the
Lanier system through the com port as configured.

2063534-001 Rev 2 201

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

4-2: System Requirements

 Use the Lanier Dictation System version 2.1.6 or later.

4-3: Connection Diagram

The following illustration shows a workstation connected to the Lanier Dictation System.

Illustration 14-3:Connecting to a Lanier Dictation System

Lanier Null Modem Cable Centricity

Dictation
Workstation
System

(LX-219-1)

4-4: Installing the Hardware

Contact the Lanier Dictation System field engineer to have the cable installed that
connects the two systems. This procedure should not be attempted by the GE Field
Engineer, since the process includes opening the Lanier system and welding the cable to
the appropriate connection.

4-5: Configuring the Software

Lanier System integration requires re-configuration of the workstation properties. These

properties are provided in the %PLAT_HOME%\support\Platinum.properties file.
Modification of the properties values should be done in
%PLAT_HOME%\support\Platinum_custom.properties, DB System properties, or user
properties.

To configure the dictation software:

1. Open Notepad.

2. Select Open from the File menu in Notepad.

3. Enter the following in the File Name field.

2063534-001 Rev 2 202

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

%PLAT_HOME%\support\platinum_custom.properties

Table 14-2: Configuration Properties for Lanier Dictation System

Properties and Default values Description

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.commPortUsed=COM2 COM port ID where cable

is connected

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.displayWarnings=true Displays the warning to

users

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.baudRate=4800 Data transfer rate

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.DictationController.dictationSystem=1 Lanier=1
DictoPhone=2
Not supported=0

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.maxAccessionNumber Maximum length of

Length=32 Accession number that
can be sent

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.birthDateFormat=MMddyy Format of the patient’s

birthdate:
Example: July 04, 1953
MMddyy -> *070453*
MMddyyyy -> *01041953*
ddMMyy -> *040753*
yyMMdd -> *530704*

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.expectedAccession Length of Accession

NumberLength=16 number that can be sent

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.delimitorOption=false Use of delimiter (For 8.1,

Delimiter option needs to
be turned off.)

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.delimitor=^ Delimiter Character (For

8.1, Delimiter option needs
to be turned off.)

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.useOrderNumber=false If useOrderNumber is true,

system sends
exam.order_num;
otherwise, it sends
exam.ris_exam_id.

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.sendBirthDate=false If sendBirthDate is false,

system sends MRN/
Accession number and
look for useOrderNumber
hierarchy.

4. Turn on the Lanier Dictation System support switch by changing the following
property:

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.DictationController.dictationSystem=1

2063534-001 Rev 2 203

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

5. If the length of MRN number and the accession number need to be changed, change
the following properties.

The length of MRN number and Accession number that is sent out through the comm
port is configurable, depending on site demand. The length of these numbers must
match the configuration of Lanier system configuration as well.

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.expectedMrnNu
mberLength=8
com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.expectedAcces
sionNumberLength=16

Example: MRN = 12345678 Accession number = 1234567890123456

With the default configuration above, the output from workstation through the com
port is *123456781234567890123456*.

6. Change the values of COM port if other than the default setting (COM2) is required.

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.ModemDialer.commPortUsed=COM2

7. Change the values of data transfer rate if other than the default setting (48000) is
required.

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.baudRate=2900

8. Define the source of accession number. Specify if the order_number or ris_exam_id is

used.

Set the value to “true” if order_num should be used for accession

number to be sent to Lanier System.

Set it to “false if ris_exam_id should be used for accession number

to be sent to Lanier system.

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.LanierDictationController.useOrderNumbe
r=false

9. Select Save from the File menu to save the Platinum_custom.properties file.

10. Select Exit from the File menu to close Notepad.

4-6: Testing Software Functionality

To test the Software functionality:

1. Double-click the workstation icon on the Windows desktop.

2. Log on as user.

3. Display an exam.

4. Press the F2 key and confirm that you hear a dial tone (corresponding the exam’s
Accession Number) coming from the modem.

2063534-001 Rev 2 204

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

If you do not, check the workstation configuration, as described in the previous

section.

5. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Exam button and select Start Dictation.

If you do not see Start Dictation, verify that you have completed step 1 in the
previous section.

6. Confirm that you hear a dial tone (corresponding to the exam’s Accession Number)
coming from the modem.

If you do not, check the workstation configuration, as described in the previous

section.

7. Quit the workstation.

8. Log out of Windows.

9. Log on to Windows as “IIS”.

10. Return the system back to the hospital.

Section 5: Integrating the Dictation System with XML

This section describes how to integrate the Dictation system with the workstation using
XML.

The workstation application and the Dictation system communicate with one another and
with an XML file that contains the necessary exam and patient information.

5-1: Integrating the Dictation System with the XML File

The XML template file is used to configure the patient and exam fields to populate the
output XML file. The output XML file is then used by the Boomerang Voice Dictation
system for processing.

The following additional information can also be configured for the integrated system:

 File path of the XML.template file

 Directory of the output XML file for the dictation system to process

 Name of the output XML file for the dictation system to process

To configure the above additional information:

1. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file:

2. Edit the file based on the options in the following table:

2063534-001 Rev 2 205

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

Table 14-3: Boomerang Voice Dictation Options

Property Name Property Description Valid Values Property

Type

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.DictationCo With this property, the user Lanier = 1 String

ntroller.dictationSystem can configure which dictation DictoPhone = 2
system they want to use with Boomerang = 3
the workstation Not Supported = 0
Note: Set this to 3 to
enable communication
with the XML file.

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.Boomerang With this property, the user Any string String

VoiceFileGenerator.templateXMLfilePath can specify the file path where
the workstation saves the
Boomerang XML template file.
Default value is
%PLAT_HOME%\\support\\B
oomerangXML.template

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.Boomerang This property identifies the Any string String

VoiceFileGenerator.outputDirPath directory of the XML output file
generated by PACS.
Default value is
c:\\temp\\boomerang

com.ge.med.newman.autoDialer.Boomerang This property identifies the Any string string

VoiceFileGenerator.outputFileName name of the XML output file
generated by PACS.
Default value is
boomerang.xml

com.ge.med.neman.autoDialer.BoomerangV Use this property to enable C:\\winnt\\notepad String

oiceFileGenerator.externalApplications= the workstation to launch an
external application after cmd /c C:\\Boom.bat
creating the xml file. The
external application could be You can launch multiple
used to indicate the 3rd party external applications by
application that was used to separating each
create the xml file. application or command
with |. Eg:
externalApplications=C:\\
winnt\\notepad|cmd /c
C:\\Boom.bat

3. Save the Platinum_custom.properties file.

4. Open Notepad and open the file:

%PLAT_HOME%\support\BoomerangXML.template file.

The contents of the file:

<?xml version= “1.0”?>

2063534-001 Rev 2 206

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

<ChunkData>
<Fields>
<Field1>$orderNumber$</Field1>
<Field2>$risExamID$</Field2>
<Field3>$MRN$</Field3>
<Field4>$DOB$</Field4>
<Field5>$pat_name$</Field5>
<Field6></Field6>
</Fields>
<Accessions>
<Accession1></Accession1>
<Accession2></Accession2>
<Accession3></Accession3>
<Accession4></Accession4>
<Accession5></Accession5>
<Accession6></Accession6>
<Accession7></Accession7>
<Accession8></Accession8>
<Accession9></Accession9>

<Accession3></Accession3>
<Accession4></Accession4>
<Accession5></Accession5>
<Accession6></Accession6>
<Accession7></Accession7>
<Accession8></Accession8>
<Accession9></Accession9>
<Accession10></Accession10>
<Accession11></Accession11>
<Accession12></Accession12>
<Accession13></Accession13>
<Accession14></Accession14>
<Accession15></Accession15>
<Accession 16></Accession 16>
</Accessions>
Note>
<Note1>$pat_name$</Note1>
</Note>
</ChunkData>

These workstation fields are supported for the BoomerangXML.template file:

 orderNumber (Exam Order Number)

 risExamID (RIS Exam ID)

 MRN (Patient Medical Record Number)

 DOB (Patient Date of Birth)

 pat_name (Patient Name)

2063534-001 Rev 2 207

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

5. In the Fields section enter the field values you want to send between the workstation
and the Dictation System. You may enter the values in any order.

Example: <Field1>$pat_name$</Field1>

If you do not want to use all of the field values, then leave the field line blank.

Example: <Field3></Field3>

6. Save the XML file when you are done modifying it.

If you are asked if you want to overwrite the existing file, click Yes. If you change the
name of the template file, then you must change the file name in the platinum
properties file as well.

5-2: End User Procedure

To use the dictation system:

1. Open an exam in the workstation application.

2. Press the F2 key.

The workstation application creates the C:\temp\boomerang\boomerang.xml output

file with the exam/patient information substituted as specified in the
BoomerangXML.template file.

3. Press the record button on the microphone connected to the integrated system.

The dictation system reads the XML file and begins dictation on the exam/patient
fields specified in the XML file.

Section 6: Connecting a Microphone to the Workstation

Microphones vary greatly in design and purpose. They can be very specialized. Consult
the microphone documentation for hardware and software specifics; however, most
models install in a similar fashion.

To connect a microphone to the Workstation:

1. Locate the sound connections and connect the microphone jack to the computer. Most
computers use an internal sound card and often the connections will be in the back of
the system.

2. These will be a series of connections the same size and diameter as the microphone
jack. One will be labeled as the microphone connection, either with a small icon that
looks like a microphone or explicitly labeled as such.

3. Plug the microphone into that connection.

To test the connection:

2063534-001 Rev 2 208

Chapter 14 Modem and Dictation Configuration

1. Open Speech in Control Panel.

2. Select the Speech Recognition tab.

3. Speak directly into the microphone. The sound level should register in the Microphone
Level indicator.

Note: If no sound is received after connecting the microphone, see Possible Speech
Recognition Problems in the Microsoft online help for troubleshooting procedures.
You can also refer to the microphone’s documentation for additional
troubleshooting procedures.

Microphone Specifications

The specifications of the microphone provided with Centricity are:

Catalog: K2009ZS

Model: C-RP USB MIC W/O SCANNER

Manufacturer: DICTAPHONE CORP

Part Number: OPSHM02-005

2063534-001 Rev 2 209

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Section 2: Integrating Dragon with Centricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Section 3: Creating a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Section 4: Training a New User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Section 5: Configuring the VCD Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Section 6: Using the Dragon Command Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Section 7: Exporting Commands into a Deployable Format (.xml or .dat) . . . . . . . . . . 214
Section 8: Importing Commands from a Deployable Format (.xml or .dat) . . . . . . . . . . 215
Section 9: Dragon Deployment with Centricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Section 10: Roaming Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Section 11: Implemented Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Section 12: Using the VCD Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Section 1: Overview

Voice Command and Control, and Voice Dictate (VCD) are Centricity Workstation features
that help technologists and radiologists in the hospitals to record their analysis of the
radiographic images, control the Centricity RA 1000 program with voice commands, and
dictate annotations to images. With these features, users can type their analysis, and
access the workstation functions faster than by using the mouse and keyboard interface.

The Voice Command and Control and Voice Dictation features require the Speech
Recognition (SR) Engine. Centricity Workstation uses the Dragon SR Engine for radiology
reporting. SR Engine operates in the following two different modes:

 Voice Command and Control—uses a limited set of predefined vocabulary in

restricted grammar rules. The users can start using voice command and control with
minimal speech training.

 Voice Dictation—allows users to dictate text in free form.

You can use the VCD feature to dictate free text such as for annotations, and to dictate
commands, such as to use the Cine, Zoom, and the Window Level tool.

For example, you can view a CT exam, and apply the abdomen Window Level preset for
CT using speech.

Section 2: Integrating Dragon with Centricity

To use the Dragon software, Dragon 8 Medical must be installed in the Centricity
Workstation, and you must complete the basic set up and training. For more information
on how to install the Dragon software, see the Dragon NaturallySpeaking 8 User’s Guide.

2063534-001 Rev 2 210

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

To use the Dragon’s voice command and dictate feature:

1. Start Dragon SR Engine, then start Centricity Workstation.

2. To activate the Dragon SR Engine, press the + key on the NumPad.

Result: The Dragon SR Engine is activated. You can now use the voice commands
available with dictation.

Note: For troubleshooting information, see “Dragon Naturally Speaking Troubleshooting” on

page 282.

Section 3: Creating a New User

When you launch the software for the first time, the New User dialog is launched and
leads you through creating a new user.

Note: If you upgraded a single user from a previous version, NaturallySpeaking loads that
user. If you upgraded multiple users, NaturallySpeaking displays the Open User
dialog box.

To create a new user:

1. In the Your Name text box, enter a user name.

The software automatically picks the best speech model and vocabulary settings for
your system. For more information on vocabularies and languages, see the Dragon
NaturallySpeaking 8 User’s Guide.

2. Select your dictation source. If you are using a USB microphone or another type of
input device, from the Dictation source list, select the appropriate option.

3. To continue, click Next.

The New User dialog is displayed. The New User dialog first explains how to position
your microphone.

For details on setting up the microphone, see the Dragon Naturally Speaking 8 User’s
Guide.

Section 4: Training a New User

The SR Engine requires users to perform at least five minutes of speech training before
using the voice dictation feature. The training results are stored as the user's personal
speech profile in the system.

SR Engine uses the following models to recognize the user’s speech:

 The Acoustic Model—accounts for a user's characteristics such as volume, pitch,

speed, and intonation.

2063534-001 Rev 2 211

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

 The Language Model—accounts for the probability of words appearing in certain

combinations.

Note: The speech recognition accuracy can continuously be improved for a user by adapting
both the acoustic and language models. When a user completes the dictation and
corrects the recognition results, the resulting sound data and matching text can be
used to improve the acoustic and language models.

You must now train Dragon NaturallySpeaking to recognize your voice by performing the
following steps:

Note: For more information on training a mobile user, see the Dragon NaturallySpeaking 8
User’s Guide.

1. A yellow arrow shows you where to start reading. To take a break while you are
training the program, click Pause.

2. To advance through the first two screens, you must say the sentences without
pausing. For the rest of the screens, it is okay to pause in the middle of a sentence.

When the words change color, it means the computer has heard and recognized
them. If you keep reading the same words, and the computer still doesn't get it, just
click Skip. Otherwise, click Next to continue.

3. Choose a text to read aloud and click OK.

You only need to read for about five minutes to train NaturallySpeaking to recognize
your voice.

You can take breaks during this training by clicking Pause. Don't worry if you make
mistakes or laugh. You should try to read exactly what you see on the screen, but it's
okay if you read something incorrectly. The computer will either ignore the mistake or
display the yellow arrow so you read the text again.

The progress bar shows how much text you have left to dictate.

Note: During training, dictating punctuation is not necessary.

4. When you’ve read enough, the New User Wizard displays a congratulations message.
When you click OK, NaturallySpeaking starts adapting to your voice.

4-1: Adapting to your Writing Style

After adapting to your voice, the New User Wizard prompts you to adapt Dragon
NaturallySpeaking to your writing style.

Dragon NaturallySpeaking can analyze your writing style to increase your overall
recognition accuracy during dictation. This tool scans documents in your My Documents
directory. These documents include Microsoft Word, Corel WordPerfect, text and rich text
files (.rtf).

Adapting to your writing style can add 5 to 30 minutes to user training. Verify all other
programs are closed when you run this step.

2063534-001 Rev 2 212

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

Note: Though we recommend that you run this part of the New User Wizard, if you plan to
skip this part of User creation, select "Skip this step" rather than Cancel.

Click Start to continue. While scanning your system, the New User Wizard displays its
status. When NaturallySpeaking is done adapting to your writing style, click Next.

You are now ready to dictate.

Section 5: Configuring the VCD Feature

Centricity RIS uses Dictaphone PowerScribe SDK, which provides reporting features and
SR capabilities using Dragon SR Engine. Although the Dragon SR Engine is used, control
of Dragon SR Engine must be accessed using PowerScribe API.

To use the Dragon software, Dragon 8 Medical must be installed in the Centricity
Workstation, and you must complete the basic set up and training.

5-1: Adding New Voice Commands

The Dragon SR Engine has a set of default voice commands. You can add new voice
commands to this default list of voice commands.

To add new voice commands:

1. In the Dragon menu, click Tools, and click Add New Command.

Result: The MyCommands Editor window displays.

2. In the MyCommand Name text box, enter the command name, and click Train.

Result: The text typed in this text box is interpreted when the user dictates it.

3. In the Description text box, enter the description for the command name.

4. In the Group list, select the group.

5. To enable the voice commands in the specific application, in the Availability list, click
the Application-specific option.

6. In the Application list, select the javaw process.

If the required process is not available in the Application list, you can browse for the
process on your computer.

7. In the Recognizable in States list, select the state.

8. In the Command Type list, select Step-by-Step as the command type.

9. In the Steps text area, enter the steps.

2063534-001 Rev 2 213

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

10. In the New Step list, select Keystrokes as the new step, then click Insert.

Result: The Send Keystrokes dialog box displays.

11. In the text box, enter the shortcut key and/or keystroke that you want to map, and click
OK.

12. To save the voice command, click Save.

Result: The voice command is saved in your profile.

Section 6: Using the Dragon Command Browser

All the commands that have been created can be accessed from the Command Browser.
The Command Browser also allows you to add new commands, modify existing
commands, export a list of commands to a .xml or a .dat file, and import them back.

To add/remove or modify commands:

1. In the Dragon window, click Tools, then click the Command Browser.

Result: The Command Browser window displays.

2. Click Manage, and expand the javaw group.

Note: If no javaw group is present, it means that javaw specific commands have not
been created. See Adding New Voice Commands to add a new command. Also,
see Importing Commands from a Deployable Format (.xml or .dat) into the Dragon
SR Engine.

Result: All the standard Centricity commands that are available display.

3. To add, remove, or modify commands, use the menus options in the Command
Browser window.

Section 7: Exporting Commands into a Deployable Format (.xml or

.dat)

To export commands into a deployable format:

1. In the Command Browser window, select commands in the javaw group, then click
Export.

Result: The Export Commands window displays.

2. In the File name text box, enter a name for the file.

2063534-001 Rev 2 214

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

3. From the Save as type list, select the format to export commands as (.xml or .dat),
and click Save.

Result: The selected commands are exported.

Section 8: Importing Commands from a Deployable Format (.xml or .dat)

To import commands from a deployable format:

1. In the Command Browser window, click Import.

Result: The Import Commands window displays.

2. In the File name text box, enter the file’s name.

3. In the Files of Type list, select the format that you want to import, and click Open.

Result: The Imported Commands window displays.

4. To import the commands, select the commands that you want to import, then click
Import.

Result: The selected commands are imported.

Section 9: Dragon Deployment with Centricity

A .dat file contains the encryption that can be used for deployment, if required. An .xml
may be more suitable to add, remove, and modify commands easily.

The .xml or .dat file can be packaged under Installshield and deployed at a site. The file
can be imported as a file as shown in Importing Commands from a Deployable Format
(.xml or .dat).

9-1: Activating Dragon SR Engine with Centricity

To activate Dragon with Centricity:

1. Start Dragon SR Engine, then start Centricity Workstation.

2. To activate the Dragon SR Engine, press the + key on the NumPad.

The Dragon SR Engine is activated. You can now use the voice commands available
with dictation.

2063534-001 Rev 2 215

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

Section 10: Roaming Users

To store speech profiles on the server, any image volume on the server can be mapped
using Common Internet File System (CIFS). Individual speech profiles can be stored on
location and accessed from Dragon SR Engine using the Roaming User feature.

For more information on configuring a roaming user, see the Dragon Naturally Speaking 8
User’s Guide.

Section 11: Implemented Voice Commands

Only select global shortcut keys have been implemented in the Centricity Workstation.
The users can easily add, remove, and modify the global shortcut keys. For more
information, see Adding New Voice Commands. Multiple voice commands can be added
mapping to the same shortcut key. For example, “Close Exam” and “Close Current Exam”
can both be mapped to Alt + W. Table 15-1: Voice Commands lists the global shortcut
keys for the voice commands.

Table 15-1: Voice Commands

Voice Command Description Shortcut Key

Annotation Toggle Annotations/ROI Alt + Y

Close All Exams Close All Exams and Comparisons Ctrl + Alt + W

Close Exam Close Current Exam and Comparisons Alt + W

Copy Display Protocol Copy Display Protocol Alt + C

Delete Display Protocol Delete Display Protocol Alt + E

Deselect All Deselect All Images Alt + U

Dictate Initiate Dictation F2

Help Show Help F1

Hide All Hide All Open Palettes F9

Image Overlay Toggle Image Overlays Alt + I

Mark Dictated Mark Exam Dictated F6

More Display Protocol Show More Display Protocols Alt + M

My Desktop Show My Desktop F3

Next Exam Go to Next Exam Alt + N

Open Exam Open Selected Exam Alt + D

2063534-001 Rev 2 216

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

Table 15-1: Voice Commands (Continued)

Voice Command Description Shortcut Key

Print Images Print Selected Images Alt + P

Save Display Protocol Save DDP Alt + H

Save Exam Save Current Exam Alt + S

Select All Select All Images Alt + A

Show All Show All Palettes F7

Skip Exam Skip Next Exam Alt + L

Utilities Open Utilities Palette Ctrl + U

Window Level 0 Window Level 0 Alt + 0

Window Level 1 Window Level 1 Alt + 1

Window Level 2 Window Level 2 Alt + 2

Window Level 3 Window Level 3 Alt + 3

Window Level 4 Window Level 4 Alt + 4

Window Level 5 Window Level 5 Alt + 5

Window Level 6 Window Level 6 Alt + 6

Window Level 7 Window Level 7 Alt + 7

Window Level 8 Window Level 8 Alt + 8

Window Level 9 Window Level 9 Alt + 9

Work Modes Open Work Modes Palette Ctrl + W

Quit Quit Application Alt + Q

Log out Log out and Restart Application Alt + O

Next Series Navigate to the next series Down arrow

Previous Serious Navigate to the previous series Up arrow

Next Image Navigate to the next image Right arrow

Previous Image Navigate to the previous image Left arrow

Start of Series Navigate to the start of the series Home

End of Series Navigate to the end of the series End

2063534-001 Rev 2 217

Chapter 15 Voice Commands and Dictation

Table 15-1: Voice Commands (Continued)

Voice Command Description Shortcut Key

Previous Page Navigate to the previous page of images Page Up

Next Page Navigate to the next page of images Page Down

Section 12: Using the VCD Feature

To use the VCD feature:

Note: Ensure that the SR Engine is activated. If the SR Engine is not activated, you cannot
use voice commands. For information on how to activate and configure the SR
Engine, see Activating Dragon SR Engine with Centricity.

1. From either the Work Modes or the Patient Jacket palette, select the exams with the
images that you want to view.

2. Create an annotation text box on an image, then dictate the text into the text box.

3. In the Filter text box of a worklist, dictate the filter criteria.

4. In the Worklist, dictate the exam that you want to display.

Result: The selected exam displays.

5. Dictate any voice command.

Result: If the SR Engine recognizes the speech command, a confirmation dialog box
displays.

6. You can change the layout of the displayed exam by dictating a command.

Result: You can save and close the displayed exam by dictating a command.

2063534-001 Rev 2 218

Chapter 16 Language Configuration

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Workstation Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Section 2: Configuring International Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Section 3: Configuring Language Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Section 4: Configuring Right-Justified Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Section 1: Workstation Language Support

The workstation supports the following languages:

 English

 French

 German

 Spanish

 Swedish

 Italian

 Danish

 Dutch

 Korean

 Japanese

 Norwegian

 Turkish

 Portuguese

 Chinese

 Simplified Chinese

 Traditional Chinese

 Finnish

 Hebrew

 Arabic

2063534-001 Rev 2 219

Chapter 16 Language Configuration

Section 2: Configuring International Keyboard

This section provides the instructions necessary to configure the appropriate international
keyboard for the workstation for the Administrator user only. International keyboard
settings for the iis user are set during the baseline installation.

Prerequisites:

 Windows operating system software installed

 Configure your language settings in the IMS server. Refer to the Server
documentation for specific procedures.

 Centricity 1.0 Workstation Application PACS Only CD

2-1: Configuring the Keyboard

The English (United States) keyboard is installed automatically as the default keyboard
when the Windows operating system software is installed. To configure the workstation for
an International keyboard, use the following procedure:

1. Add an input locale and keyboard layout according to the instructions in the Windows
online help system.

2. Set the keyboard layout according to Table 16-1: Keyboard Language Parameters.

Table 16-1: Keyboard Language Parameters

Language System Default IIS User (choice Administrator User Input Locale Keyboard Layout/
Locale from cfg_prop.pl) (User Locale) IME

English English (United English (United English (United English (United English (United
States) States) States) States) States)

Danish English (United Danish Danish Danish Danish

States)

Spanish English (United Spanish Spanish (Spain) Spanish (Spain) Spanish

States)

German English (United German German (German) German German

States) (German)

French English (United French French (France) French (France) French

States)

Italian English (United Italian Italian (Italy) Italian (Italy) Italian

States)

Japanese Japanese Japanese Japanese Japanese MS-IME2000

Simplified Chinese (PRC) Simplified Chinese Chinese (PRC) Chinese (PRC) MS-PinYin98
Chinese

2063534-001 Rev 2 220

Chapter 16 Language Configuration

Table 16-1: Keyboard Language Parameters (Continued)

Language System Default IIS User (choice Administrator User Input Locale Keyboard Layout/
Locale from cfg_prop.pl) (User Locale) IME

Traditional Chinese (Taiwan) Traditional Chinese Chinese (Taiwan) Chinese Chang Jie
Chinese (Taiwan)

Korean Korean Korean Korean Korean MS-IME98

Dutch English (United Netherlands Dutch (Netherlands) Dutch Dutch

States) (Netherlands)

Portuguese English (United Portugal Portuguese Portuguese Portuguese

States) (Portugal) (Portugal)

Norwegian English (United Norwegian Norwegian (Bokmal) Norwegian Norwegian

States) (Bokmal)

Swedish English (United Sweden Swedish Swedish Swedish

States)

Turkish Turkish Turkish Turkish Turkish Turkish

Finnish Finnish Finnish Finnish Finnish Finnish

Hebrew Hebrew Hebrew Hebrew Hebrew Hebrew

Arabic Arabic (Egypt) Arabic (Egypt) Arabic (Egypt) Arabic (Egypt) Arabic (Egypt)

Section 3: Configuring Language Settings

This procedure describes how to configure the workstation to support a local language.

Prerequisites:

 Windows operating system software installed.

 The Windows XP or Windows 7 OS image is installed. Refer to the Windows

documentation for installation procedures. Go to http://windows.microsoft.com/en-
US/windows/home

 The workstation application is NOT installed.

 The IIS user is NOT configured.

 Configure your language settings in the IMS server. Refer to the Server
documentation for specific procedures.

 Centricity 1.0 Workstation Application PACS Only CD

2063534-001 Rev 2 221

Chapter 16 Language Configuration

3-1: Setting Languages

Note: You must set the user locale for IIS before locking the desktop.

Use Table 16-2 to configure the workstation for a non-English language setting.

Table 16-2: User Locale Settings

User Setting How to Set

IIS System Default Locale Refer to the Windows online help system.

IIS IIS User Locales and Java Locale %PLAT_HOME%\service\config\cfg_prop.pl

Admin System Default Locale Refer to the Windows online help system.

Admin Java Locale Refer to the Windows online help system.

Admin Adman User Locales Refer to the Windows online help system.

Admin Input Locale Refer to the Windows online help system.

Admin Keyboard Layout/IME Refer to the Windows online help system.

3-2: Setting the System Locale

To set the system locale for Chinese, Japanese, and Korean, start the workstation and log
on as Administrator. The system automatically loads Apache and accept the default
responses to all messages.

1. Open Regional and Language Options on the Control Panel.

2. In the Regional Options tab, select Chinese (Taiwan) from the list box in the
Standard and formats section. Click Apply.

Result: The language software is loaded from the CD.

3. Select the Advanced tab.

a. For non-US/non-European languages, select one of the following:

 Chinese (PRC) - Simplified Chinese

 Chinese (Taiwan) - Traditional Chinese

 Japanese

 Korean

 Turkish

 Hebrew

2063534-001 Rev 2 222

Chapter 16 Language Configuration

 Arabic (Egypt)

b. For US/European languages, select English (United States). Click OK.

4. Click Apply.

You may be prompted to insert the Workstation Tools CD to install drivers.

You will be prompted to restart the system after the Installation of the drivers.

When the language settings are complete, the parameters from Table 16-1: Keyboard
Language Parameters, on page 220 will apply.

Section 4: Configuring Right-Justified Language Support

Some languages, such as Hebrew, require right-justified language support. To change the
workstation display to right-justified language support:

1. Open the platinum.properties file and locate:

## Horizontal alignment of report text area

# right aligned: value = right

# left aligned: value = left

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.report.textHorizontalAlignment=left

2. Copy the property and paste it into the platinum_custom file.

3. Change the value of the property to right.

4. Save the file.

Result: When the application restarts, the text displays right-justified.

2063534-001 Rev 2 223

Chapter 17 Memory Configuration

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Configuring Hardware Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Section 2: Configuring Operating System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Section 3: Configuring Workstation Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Section 1: Configuring Hardware Memory

This section includes procedures for configuring and upgrading memory on hardware
components for the workstation.

1-1: Installing Additional RAM on a Workstation

Use this procedure to upgrade your workstation RAM.

Prerequisites:

Warning: Follow the steps to remove all cables and the AC power cord before removing
the side cover.

 Remove the side cover.

 Read and follow all Warnings and Cautions, and Safety Instructions.

Note: Do not install memory on a machine immediately after turning off the machine. The
motherboard temperature could destroy the memory.

1-1-1: Installing the Memory

Note: Take proper grounding precautions before installing the memory. Static electricity can
damage the chips.

2063534-001 Rev 2 224

Chapter 17 Memory Configuration

Illustration 17-1:Motherboard and Memory Module

Note: Use extreme care when installing memory. Applying too much pressure can damage
the socket. Memory chips are keyed and can be inserted in the socket only one way.

Install two (2) memory chips in the empty slots by following the steps listed below:

1. Power down the workstation.

System Alert: Use the grounding strap provided to eliminate any static charge when handling
any hardware.

2. Disconnect all peripheral cables from the workstation and disconnect the AC power
cord.

3. If the workstation is an A+, A, B+, or B model, then disconnect the VGA service
monitor from the back of the workstation.

4. Holding the memory chip only by its edges, remove it from its antistatic package.

5. Orient the memory chip so that the two notches in the bottom edge of the memory
chip align with the keyed socket.

2063534-001 Rev 2 225

Chapter 17 Memory Configuration

6. Insert the bottom edge of the memory chip into the socket, and press down firmly on
the memory chip until it sits correctly.

7. Gently push the plastic ejector levers on the socket ends to the upright position.

8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to install the other memory chips.

9. Install the side cover.

10. Reconnect all peripheral cables to the ports on the back of the system. Also reconnect
the AC power cord to the workstation.

11. If the workstation is an A+, A, B+ or B model, then connect the VGA service monitor to
the back of the workstation and power it on to monitor the system memory checks.

12. Power On the workstation.

13. Confirm that no memory errors occur during initial bootup and that you get a Windows
log on prompt.

14. If the workstation is an A+, A, B+ or B model, then power off the VGA service monitor
and disconnect it from the back of the workstation.

Section 2: Configuring Operating System Memory

2-1: Configuring Virtual Memory

To configure the Virtual Memory minimum and maximum parameter:

1. Right-click My Computer and select Properties.

2. On the Advanced tab, click Performance Options, and click Settings under
Performance subsection.

Result: The Performance Option dialog box displays.

3. On the Advanced tab, click Change in Virtual Memory subsection.

Result: The Virtual Memory dialog box displays.

4. Set the Initial Size and the Maximum size of the Virtual Memory.

Table 17-1: Virtual Memory Settings

Physical Memory Virtual Memory Min Virtual Memory Max

2 GB 3 GB 4 GB

1 GB 2 GB 4 GB

512 MB 1.5 GB 3 GB

2063534-001 Rev 2 226

Chapter 17 Memory Configuration

Note: By default, the minimum and maximum virtual memory settings are the same.

5. Click Set and click OK.

6. Close the System Properties dialog box.

Note: Click Yes in response to the ‘System Settings Change’ pop-up window for Restart
confirmation.

7. Restart the workstation by selecting Start > Shutdown. Select the Restart the
computer radio button: Click Yes to restart the workstation.

2-2: Configuring Windows to Support 3GB User Address Space

Visit http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/default.aspx and search enabling 3GB for more

details.

2-3: Configuring AWE Image Cache for Windows with >2GB of RAM

This section describes Image Caching using Address Windowing Extension (AWE). AWE
is a feature supported on Windows workstations, where an application can address more
than 2GB of RAM in user space. For more information, refer to the Microsoft Support
website or documentation.

The Centricity Workstation uses AWE to cache images. The workstation can address up
to 6GB of RAM (2 GB normal process user address space + 4GB of AWE for image
caching) in user address space.

2-3-1: Configuring the Workstation to Support Image Caching

Image caching is disabled by default. Use this section to enable image caching. Modify
the Platinum_custom.properties to enable image caching.

To enable Image Caching:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.ImageCache.ImageCachingEnabled=true

To specify the Image Cache size:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.ImageCache.CacheSize=<cache size in bytes>

For example com.ge.med.platinum.work.ImageCache.CacheSize=1000000000

for 1GB image cache

Note: The cache size should be the amount of RAM above 2GB. For example if the
workstation has 3GB of RAM the cache size will be 1GB. For 4GB, the cache size
will be 2GB.

To set the cache type:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.ImageCache.CacheType=MEMORY

2063534-001 Rev 2 227

Chapter 17 Memory Configuration

To set the header block size:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.ImageCache.imageHeaderSize=<header block
size>. Default value is set to 8192 bytes

To set the image block size:

com.ge.med.platinum.work.ImageCache.imageSize=<image block size>.

Default value is set to 131072 bytes (128KB)

2-3-2: Important Considerations

 The AWE image cache supports up to 4GB of RAM for caching images.

 This feature is only supported for Windows XP operating systems.

 The physical memory used for the cache is not available for other processes, during
the execution of the workstation.

 Unique number is sent with proper prefix and suffix configured.

Section 3: Configuring Workstation Memory

Use this section to change the Java Object Heap settings and the Image Buffer settings.

3-1: Changing the Java Object Heap Settings

The Java Object Heap size is determined by the parameters -ms (for initial java heap) and
-mx (max java heap).

You can change these values by setting the appropriate value in the launcher.cfg
configuration file.

By Default the Java Object Heap parameters are determined by the Centricity Launcher.
Any Java Object Heap settings in Launcher.cfg override the default Java Object Heap
Parameters.

Table 17-2 lists the Default Java Object Heap Parameters.

Table 17-2: Java Object Heap Parameters

Workstation RAM Min Max

512 MB 100 MB 600 MB

1 GB 300 MB 600 MB

2 GB 300 MB 600 MB

2063534-001 Rev 2 228

Chapter 17 Memory Configuration

3-1-1: Overriding the default settings

Add the following two lines to the Launcher.cfg, after the launcher command.

‐ms<min java heap>

‐mx<max java heap>

For example, to override the Java Object Heap settings to min.100 MB and max 800 MB:

javaw

# The first line of the file MUST be the "exe" to be executed (either javaw or java)
# The Centricity.exe adds the actual java path to this before creating the process.
# a lot of code assumes this. Do NOT change it.

# Override the default java heap settings

‐ms100m
‐mx800m

# The following four lines must be entered as seperate lines as below. They will be
modified by the "CFG_PROP.PL" file.

‐Dlang=en
‐Dcountry=US
‐Dcharset=
‐DCHARSET_CONVERTER_CLASS=
#‐DCHARSET_CONVERTER_CLASS=com.ge.med.dataserver.SunIoConverter
‐Dmc3adv.library.path="%PLAT_HOME%"\rumbalib\mc3java\mc3adv\mc3lib\mc3adv.dll

# The following can be entered as a single line, or they can be broken up into seperate
lines as above.

‐Dfile.encoding=ISO8859_1 ‐DJINTEGRA_NATIVE_MODE ‐Drelpath="%PLAT_HOME%"\support\ ‐

Dlog=0 ‐Dsun.java2d.noddraw=true ‐DLOG_HOME="%PLAT_HOME%"\service\logs ‐
Dvbroker_javavm=c:\jre\bin\java.exe ‐Dorg.omg.CORBA.ORBClass=com.inprise.vbroker.orb.ORB
‐Dorg.omg.CORBA.ORBSingletonClass=com.inprise.vbroker.orb.ORB ‐DPRISM_HOME=c:\platinum ‐
Djava.security.policy=%PLAT_HOME%\autodiscovery.policy
com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.architecture.Main

2063534-001 Rev 2 229

Chapter 17 Memory Configuration

3-2: Changing Image Buffer Settings

The workstation determines the image buffer size based on the available workstation
RAM.

Table 17-3: Default Image Buffer Settings

Workstation RAM Image Buffer Size

512MB 200MB

1GB 400MB

2GB 600MB

These values are specified in Platinum.properties using the properties described below.

com.ge.med.platinum.work.util.Win32NativeHeap.512MBImageBufferSize=20000
0000

com.ge.med.platinum.work.util.Win32NativeHeap.1GBImageBufferSize=4000000
00

com.ge.med.platinum.work.util.Win32NativeHeap.2GBImageBufferSize=6000000
00

You can override the default settings by configuring the new values in the
Platinum_custom.properties file.

2063534-001 Rev 2 230

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service
Configuration

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Enabling SPINE Authentication on the Workstation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Section 2: Configuring a Persistent Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Section 3: Using TimbuktuPro with a Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Section 1: Enabling SPINE Authentication on the Workstation

The Centricity PACS release for LSP sites includes a new authentication process for
enhanced security. After reviewing the roles and needs of the users, the System
Administrators can determine which users can access and manipulate data for clinical or
service purposes. Access to PACS features can also be controlled using SPINE
authentication.

Use of a smartcard and PIN-based authentication with the SPINE Security server
manages clinical user access to the Workstation, Exam Manager, CAT, and Centricity
Web programs.

Non-LSP sites do not require the SPINE smart card for user access to all PACS programs.
Instead, these sites have a user ID and password based log on mechanism. The
administrators can create and manage user accounts. For information on how to create
and manage PACS user accounts, see the System Administrator Online Help.

Note: You must install and configure the smart card reader before you begin. Refer to
the smart card reader documentation on the Centricity 3.2 Workstation Tools CD
for specific instructions.

1-1: Configuring SPINE Authentication on Workstations

To configure SPINE Authentication on the workstation for LSP sites:

1. Log on to the workstation as Administrator.

2. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file:

3. Enter the following command in the file:

com.ge.med.platinum.profile.ApplicationResourceManager.useSpineForAu
thentication =true

4. Close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

If this property is set to false, the workstation will work as it did for previous releases
without enhanced security log on.

2063534-001 Rev 2 231

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

1-2: Using SPINE Authentication on the Workstation

If the site is using SPINE authentication, the process is as follows:

1. The user must insert the smart card and authenticate it before starting workstation.

2. When the workstation launches.

Result: a Server list displays.

3. The user must select a server (This is the middle tier server to which the WS is
connected).

4. Then a Role List dialog box displays. The roles shown are retrieved from the SPINE
Server. The user has to select a role.

5. The workstation application launches after this and user is logged on to the WS with
the selected role.

Note: If the role selected by the user does not exist in PACS, an error message displays.
The user can select another role.

Other considerations:

 If there is only one role in SPINE, the workstation will not show the role list dialog box,
instead it will proceed with log on.

 It is the responsibility of the PACS administrator to map the roles in the SPINE Server
and in PACS.

 If the user performs any operation on the workstation after removing the smart card
from the client system, the workstation will shut down immediately. If user leaves the
workstation idle, after the removal of card, the workstation automatically shuts down.

The following scenarios can also result in the automatic shutdown of the workstation while
launching:

 No valid Smart card token in the system.

 No role assigned for the user in the SPINE Server.

 Failure in creation of User in PACS.

Note: For the SPINE Server integrated environment, the client machine will not use Ticket
Simulator, instead the Identity Agent will be used. The Identity Agent has to be
manually installed on the client machine.

Section 2: Configuring a Persistent Link

This procedure describes how to add a persistent route to a Windows system

2063534-001 Rev 2 232

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

Prerequisites:

 You must know what kind of connection the hospital has to the ROC. Verify this
information with the network administrator.

2-1: For Frame Relay Connection to the ROC

To connect to ROC using frame relay:

1. Open a Command Prompt.

2. In the DOS window, enter the following command:

Route ‐p add 199.181.103.0 mask 255.255.255.0 <IP Address of router

E0 port> metric 2

Note: <IP Address of router E0 port> - IP address on same subnet as the respective
device.

2-2: For VPN Connection to the ROC

To connect to ROC using VPN:

1. Open a Command Prompt.

2. In the DOS window, enter the following command:

Route ‐p add 150.2.81.0 mask 255.255.255.0 <IP Address of VPN

appliance port> metric 2

Note: <IP Address of VPN appliance port> - IP address on same subnet as the respective
device.

Section 3: Using TimbuktuPro with a Workstation

This section includes information regarding TimbuktuPro: Version 5.1, Build 901. The
recommended connections are either a LAN or a high-speed VPN connection.

Note: The TimbuktuPro build that ships with GE Centricity software was prepared
specifically for GE. It uses site keys and configures communication over a single port.
Therefore, this build will not communicate with other versions of TimbuktuPro
available from retailers.

To check the version and build number of TimbuktuPro, click Help > About
TimbuktuPro…

Note: TimbuktuPro is a licensed 3rd party application. The workstation includes a license for
TimbuktuPro. However, this license is not valid for previous versions of workstation.
Installing TimbuktuPro from the media distribution on any system other than the

2063534-001 Rev 2 233

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

Centricity 2.0, 2.1, or 3.x workstation is not supported and is a violation of the vendor’s
license agreement.

This section includes the following topics:

 “Installing TimbuktuPro” on page 234

 3-1-1: Installing TimbuktuPro with the Ghost CD

 3-1-2: Installing TimbuktuPro with the Workstation Tools CD

 “Configuring TimbuktuPro” on page 235

 “Using TimbuktuPro” on page 235

 3-3-1: Starting and Stopping TimbuktuPro

 3-3-2: Opening and Closing the TimbuktuPro Window

 3-3-3: TimbuktuPro Services

 3-3-4: Connecting to Remote Machines

 “Creating Registered Users” on page 238

 “Pre-configured Settings” on page 240

 “Allowing External Access” on page 241

3-1: Installing TimbuktuPro

Install TimbuktuPro using the Ghost CD (as a baseline install) or from the Tools CD.

3-1-1: Installing TimbuktuPro with the Ghost CD

When you baseline a machine using the Centricity 4.0 Workstation Ghost CD,
TimbuktuPro installs as part of the baseline. If you are reinstalling the software, use the
Workstation Tools CD.

3-1-2: Installing TimbuktuPro with the Workstation Tools CD

To install TimbuktuPro with workstation Tools CD:

1. Insert a Centricity Workstation Tools CD.

2. Navigate to the following file on the CD and double-click it:

COMMON\TimbuktuPro\install\NetInstaller.exe

The installation begins.

When finished, a dialog box displays notifying that TimbuktuPro was installed and
started.

2063534-001 Rev 2 234

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

3. Click OK.

3-2: Configuring TimbuktuPro

TimbuktuPro is automatically configured during installation.

The following registered user account is automatically created during installation:

Username: geservice

Password: 2charGE

To create more user accounts, see Creating Registered Users. For information on the pre-
configured settings, see “Pre-configured Settings” on page 240.

3-3: Using TimbuktuPro

This section explains how to use TimbuktuPro.

3-3-1: Starting and Stopping TimbuktuPro

When TimbuktuPro is running, the TimbuktuPro icon displays in the system tray.

Illustration 18-1:TimbuktuPro Icon

When the Windows OS starts, TimbuktuPro starts. TimbuktuPro does not shut down
unless you manually stop it.

To manually stop TimbuktuPro, right-click on the TimbuktuPro icon in the system tray and
select Exit and Shut Down Timbuktu Pro".

To manually restart TimbuktuPro, click Start > Programs > TimbuktuPro > TimbuktuPro.

3-3-2: Opening and Closing the TimbuktuPro Window

To open the TimbuktuPro window, double-click the TimbuktuPro icon in the system tray.

To close TimbuktuPro window:

 Click the X button in the upper right-hand corner of the window

or

 Select File > Exit.

Opening and closing the TimbuktuPro window does not effect starting or stopping
TimbuktuPro.

2063534-001 Rev 2 235

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

3-3-3: TimbuktuPro Services

TimbuktuPro offers the following services to a remote machine.

Table 18-1: TimbuktuPro Services

Icon Description

Control—allows you to control the desktop of a remote machine with mouse and keyboard.

Observe—allows you to observe the desktop of a remote machine, but not control.

Exchange—similar to FTP, allows you to read, write, and/or delete files on a remote machine. Three
levels of permissions can be configured for reading, writing, and deleting files (See Configuring
TimbuktuPro for more information).

Send—allows you to send an electronic message, called FlashNote, to a remote machine (similar
to e-mail). FlashNotes can contain text and/or file attachments.

Chat—allows you to establish a chat connection with a remote machine.

Intercom—allows you to speak with a remote user through their computer.

Notify—allows you to request notification when a remote machine becomes active. This is a useful
way to find out if a remote user is available.

Refer to the TimbuktuPro online help for more information.

3-3-4: Connecting to Remote Machines

To connect to a remote TimbuktuPro machine:

1. Open the TimbuktuPro window.

2063534-001 Rev 2 236

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

Illustration 18-2:TimbuktuPro TCP/IP Connections

2. Select the TCP/IP tab, and enter either:

 The IP address of the remote machine

 The network name of the remote machine

3. Select the type of service to use. For example, click Control > Observe > Notify.

Refer to Table 18-1: TimbuktuPro Services for information about the types of services.

When TimbuktuPro establishes connection to the remote machine, the Login window
displays.

2063534-001 Rev 2 237

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

Illustration 18-3:TimbuktuPro Login

4. Enter your Name and Password and click OK.

TimbuktuPro asks the host machine for permission. If it is configured for your
username, and if permission is granted, a session window displays representing the
service you requested. For example, for Observe/Control services, the session
window reflects the desktop of the host machine.

5. To end the session, click the X button in the upper right-hand corner of the window.

3-4: Creating Registered Users

The geservice user account is created and configured when TimbuktuPro installs. Use
the following procedure to create additional registered user accounts.

1. Open TimbuktuPro.

TimbuktuPro prompts you for the Master Password. Refer to 3-2: Configuring
TimbuktuPro for information on the master password.

a. Click Setup > Security and click the Registered Users tab.

2063534-001 Rev 2 238

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

Illustration 18-4:Registered Users

b. Click Add Registered Users, and enter a username and password.

c. Check the services to grant using this username and password.

d. Check the Ask Host For Permission, if you want added security. If checked,
TimbuktuPro asks the host machine for permission to access it when a remote
user requests access using this username and password. The host machine has
the option to reject the incoming connection.

e. Click OK to exit the Security window.

TimbuktuPro saves the new user accounts in the following binary file: C:\Program
Files\Timbuktu Pro\tb2.plu on the staging machine.

3-4-1: Creating the Same User on Multiple Machines

You can set up a single user account to access muliple machines. Therefore, users will not
have to create user accounts on each machine individually.

To create the same user on multiple machines:

1. Create the desired user accounts on one machine using the procedure in 3-4:
Creating Registered Users.

You can create the accounts on any machine. However, if you distribute the file using
the Change How you Administer and Implement (CHAI) tool, you should create the
users on the CHAI server.

2063534-001 Rev 2 239

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

Note: Do not delete the geservice account.

2. Copy the file C:\Program Files\Timbuktu Pro\tb2.plu from the staging machine and
overwrite the corresponding C:\Program Files\Timbuktu Pro\tb2.plu file on every
TimbuktuPro machine with this file.

Push the file to the other workstations.

3. Restart TimbuktuPro on every machine for the changes to take effect.

3-5: Pre-configured Settings

The following TimbuktuPro settings come with the TimbuktuPro installation (Version 5.1,
Build 901) shipped with Centricity. You do NOT need to configure these settings.

 Setup > Security.

Illustration 18-5:TimbuktuPro Security Settings

 Setup > Preferences

2063534-001 Rev 2 240

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

Illustration 18-6:TimbuktuPro Preferences

For more information about TimbuktuPro, refer to the TimbuktuPro online help.

3-6: Allowing External Access

A TimbuktuPro machine can communicate with any other TimbuktuPro machine that it can
reach. The following are the most desired forms of remote access:

 Both the initiating and the host machines are on the same network (i.e., intranet).

 The initiating machine is connected to the network of the host machine through the
VPN or other firewall tunneling mechanism.

2063534-001 Rev 2 241

Chapter 18 Enhanced Security and Remote Service Configuration

If you must allow access to machines in a firewalled network and do not have VPN-like
capability, you can go through the firewall by opening up ports in the firewall. The version
of TimbuktuPro that comes with GE Centricity uses the following ports:

TCP/IP, UDP:407

For specific steps in configuring/opening ports, please refer to your firewall reference
manual.

Note: When using remote access through port 407, the following TimbuktuPro services will
be available: Observe, Control, Send, Exchange. The other services use dynamic
ports.

Note: Opening a port allows a computer outside the network to send network packets
through the firewall into the network over that port, and is a potential security hazard.
Please consult your Network Administrator and local site policies before proceeding
with opening ports in the firewall. If you do open ports, it is highly recommended that
the ports are open for the time required and then closed when TimbuktuPro is not
used.

2063534-001 Rev 2 242

Chapter 19 Centricity Exam Manager Configuration

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Patient Merge and Exam Merge Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Section 2: Enabling a Link to Web-Based CEM to Appear in the Utilities Palette. . . . . 243
Section 3: Launching Web-Based CEM from the Utilities Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Section 1: Patient Merge and Exam Merge Features

Users can access the Centricity Exam Manager (CEM) Patient Merge and Exam Merge
features in one of the following ways:

 From the web-based CEM application. This is the default method.

 From the link to the CEM application that has been configured to appear on the
workstation’s Utilities palette. This is the optional method.

Note: Accessing CEM through the workstation’s Utilities palette is disabled by default in
the workstation. To enable a link to CEM to appear in the workstation Utilities palette,
see Enabling a Link to Web-Based CEM to Appear in the Utilities Palette.

For more information on patient merge and exam merge, see “Merging Patients and
Exams in the Reallocate and Merge Window” in the Centricity PACS Workstation and
Exam Manager Operator Manual.

Section 2: Enabling a Link to Web-Based CEM to Appear in the

Utilities Palette

To enable a link to the web-based CEM to appear in the Utilities palette:

1. When the restart is complete, log on as Administrator.

2. Open the Platinum_custom.properties file:

3. Enter the following command in the file:

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.component.utility.delegate.useExamManager=true

4. Close the Platinum_custom.properties file.

5. Enable the privilege in CAT. In the Client Config, set the ExamManager privilege to
Y.

6. Restart the workstation.

Result: The link to web-based CEM is enabled in the Utilities palette.

2063534-001 Rev 2 243

Chapter 19 Centricity Exam Manager Configuration

Section 3: Launching Web-Based CEM from the Utilities Palette

To launch the web-based CEM from the Utilities palette:

1. Launch the workstation and open the Utilities palette.

2. Select the Exam Manager tab.

The first time you access CEM from the Utilities palette, workstation downloads it from
the server and makes files available locally. This can take a minute to download the
application.

3. For sites using SPINE Server and SPINE Security: After the application is
downloaded, CEM either logs in the user to the application, or the Select Role dialog
box displays. If the Select Role dialog box displays, the user should select a valid user
role from the list and click Select.

Result: CEM displays in the Utilities palette.

2063534-001 Rev 2 244

Chapter 20 Workstation Security Configuration

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Configuring Workstation in Secure Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Section 2: Configuring Workstation in Non-Secure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Section 3: Working with Security Patches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Section 1: Configuring Workstation in Secure Mode

Use this procedure to set up the workstation to use Secure Mode (SSL enabled) for
authentication.

Prerequisites:

 RIS Middle-Tier software installation has been completed.

 Workstation software installation has been completed.

1-1: Configuring for SSL Enabled

Note: The factory default setting for workstation is Non-Secure Mode (SSL disabled).

To configure the workstation to use secure mode for authentication:

1. Verify that SSL is disabled:

a. Using Windows Explorer, open the file desktop.properties in the directory

%PLAT_HOME%/support/.

b. Verify that the following property is present in the file and the property value is set
to false.

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.architecture.CpApplicationManager.bypassSSL
=false

c. If this property is not set to false, set it to false.

2. The workstation requires the Middle-Tier Digital Certificate to operate in the Secure
Mode. This certificate is available on the ISU in the following path:

/usr/local/pacs/Orion152/config/X.X.X.X_keystore

where X.X.X.X is the IP Address of the ISU.

3. Retrieve the digital certificate from the ISU:

a. Open a DOS command window and enter the following:

C:\>cd platinum

2063534-001 Rev 2 245

Chapter 20 Workstation Security Configuration

C:\platinum>ftp X.X.X.X

where X.X.X.X is the IP Address of the ISU.

4. Enter the user as root and provide the correct password.

ftp> cd /usr/local/pacs/Orion152/config

ftp> bin

ftp> mget X.X.X.X_keystore

where X.X.X.X is the IP Address of the ISU.

ftp> bye

5. Copy the certificate in the workstation to the directory:

%PLAT_HOME%\keystore

Where %PLAT_HOME% is the directory where the RA1000 software is installed.

If the directory does not exist, create it.

6. After copying the certificate to the correct location, restart the workstation.

Section 2: Configuring Workstation in Non-Secure Mode

Use this section to set up the workstation to use Non-Secure Mode (SSL disabled) for
authentication.

Prerequisites:

 RIS Middle-Tier software installation has been completed.

 Workstation software installation has been completed.

2-1: Configuring for SSL Disabled

Note: The factory default setting for workstation is Non-Secure Mode (SSL disabled).

To configure a workstation to use Non-Secure mode for authentication:

1. Using Windows Explorer, open the file desktop.properties in the

%PLAT_HOME%\support\ directory.

2. Verify that the following property is present in the file and the property value is set to
“true”.

com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.architecture.CpApplicationManager.bypassSSL=true

3. If this property is not “true”, edit the file property and change it to “true”.

2063534-001 Rev 2 246

Chapter 20 Workstation Security Configuration

Section 3: Working with Security Patches

Refer to “Applying OS Patches” on page 269 for information on applying OS patches and
hot fixes for WINXP.

Refer to Windows OS Version and Security Report (2018057-001) for information on using
Security patches for the workstation.

2063534-001 Rev 2 247

g GE Healthcare

Operations and Maintenance

This section contains the following chapter:

 Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Saving System Information to Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Section 2: Restoring System Information Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Section 3: Removing the Centricity Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Section 4: Removing CommServer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Section 5: Configuring Auto-Reboot in Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Section 6: Removing Old Exam Locks from the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Section 7: Using the Default Display Protocol Push Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Section 8: Tools Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Section 9: Configuring the IMS Server Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Section 10: Changing the Desktop Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Section 11: Applying OS Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Section 12: Mammography Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Section 1: Saving System Information to Diskette

This section contains information that ensures a newly installed workstation has its
workstation configuration information saved on a floppy diskette. This configuration floppy
may be used in the event that workstation configuration needs to be reinstalled on the
workstation (for example, after a reinstall or a system crash).

Prerequisites:

 Workstation integration completed.

 Workstation operating system software installed and configured.

 Workstation application software installed and configured.

 Workstation purchasable options installed and configured.

 Customer provided USB drive

1-1: Saving the System Information to Diskette

To save the system information to diskette:

1. Insert a formatted floppy diskette into the drive.

2. Open a Command Prompt and enter:

cd:\platinum\service\config

3. Execute savecfg.pl script.

2063534-001 Rev 2 249

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

4. Select Save (option 1) from the choices given.

5. Remove and label the diskette appropriately, as to site, workstation, date, and FE
name and store the diskette in a safe place.

Section 2: Restoring System Information Data

Newly installed workstation configuration information can be loaded from the saved floppy
created in Saving the System Information to Diskette. This configuration floppy can be
used if the system configuration needs to be reinstalled on the system (for example, after
a reinstall or a system crash).

Prerequisites:

 Workstation integration completed.

 Workstation operating system software installed and configured.

 Workstation application software installed and configured.

 Workstation purchasable options installed and configured.

 Customer provided USB drive

2-1: Restoring Application Configuration Data

To restore application configuration data:

1. Start Service Tools by logging on to the system as geservice or Administrator.

2. Enter the appropriate password for geservice user.

3. Open a Command Prompt.

4. Insert the application configuration media into the drive.

5. Change directory to %PLAT_HOME%\service\config.

6. Execute savecfg.pl script.

7. Select Restore from the choices given.

8. Restore required data.

9. Remove and return the media to a safe place.

Section 3: Removing the Centricity Application Software

Use this section to remove the workstation applications from a workstation.

2063534-001 Rev 2 250

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

Prerequisites:

 OS is loaded.

 Video frame buffer board switch settings are set correctly.

 Video frame buffer boards are properly Installed in the workstation.

 Video frame buffer cables are properly connected.

 Video frame buffer drivers are installed.

3-1: Removing the Application

Note: The Platinum_custom.properties files are saved. They are not deleted when removing
the workstation application.

To remove the Centricity application software:

1. Log on as Administrator.

User: Administrator

Password:CANal1

2. Open the Control Panel and select Change Remove Programs.

3. Click the Centricity Workstation icon.

Result: The Install Shield Wizard begins.

4. Click Yes to remove workstation from your computer.

Result: The Setup Status screen displays.

5. Click OK on the Information screen.

Note: Ignore any warnings about shared programs.

Section 4: Removing CommServer Service

Use this section to remove the CommServer Service.

2063534-001 Rev 2 251

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

Prerequisites:

 OS is loaded.

 Video frame buffer boards switch settings are set correctly.

 Video frame buffer boards are properly installed in the workstation.

 Video frame buffer cables are properly connected.

 Video frame buffer drivers installed.

4-1: Removing the CommServer Service

To remove CommServer service:

1. Stop the CommServer service.

a. Log on as Administrator.

User: Administrator

Password:CANal1

b. Open Administrative Tools > Services from the Control Panel.

c. Locate and select the CommServer Interface.

d. Click Stop.

2. Deactivate the Service.

a. Open a Command Prompt.

b. Execute the following command:

C:\> cotscsinf.exe ‐remove

Section 5: Configuring Auto-Reboot in Workstations

Perform this procedure to prevent unwanted performance degradation due to long-term

memory leaks in the OS, or other similar anomalies that may arise over time. In a
particular viewing scenario, the workstation demonstrated an "out of resources" condition
because it reached its design capability at that point. Following this procedure can reduce
the occurrence and severity of this situation. If your site routinely encounters this situation,
perform this procedure to minimize the impact.

Do not install the Auto-Reboot service without first consulting the customer, to advise them
of the intent of this procedure and to get their input on the best time to schedule the reboot
which would have the least impact on operations. If this procedure cannot be executed,
manual reboots must be implemented on a routine basis to avoid the potential
performance issue.

2063534-001 Rev 2 252

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

At a minimum, the reboot should be scheduled weekly, but daily reboots are
recommended. This reboot action does not save any changes in the workstation
application. Users should be made aware of this potential consequence. When initiated by
the host computer, the reboot cannot be canceled at the client workstation.

Contact the ROC if you have any questions regarding implementation.

At the host workstation where you implement this procedure, log on as Administrator.

Each workstation Administrator user must have the same password. This procedure does
not work if the passwords are different. The "computer name" or "IP Address" can be
found under Control Panel > Networking. Additionally, all workstations should be listed in
the ISU etc/hosts file.

It is also highly recommended to create a Broadcast warning message to provide ample

warning of the scheduled reboot.

The "Schedule Service," which activates the .bat file when it is executed through AT or
WINAT, has only users privileges and cannot reboot the remote workstations. To resolve
this token access error, you must assign "Administrator Privileges" to the Schedule
Service. See the following procedures to configure PACS workstations with Windows XP
OS.

5-1: Configuring Auto-Reboot in Windows

To configure automatic reboot on workstations:

1. Use any text editor, such as Notepad, to create a command file named
c:\auto_reboot_go.bat. Enter the following text in the file.

cd c:\

auto_reboot.bat>>auto_reboot_log.txt

2. Use any text editor, such as Notepad, to create a command file named
c:\auto_reboot.bat. Enter the following text in the file.

Note: There must be a space before each / in the shutdown command “- r -f”.

REM ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐

REM Start shutdown process

date /t

time /t

taskkill /F /FI "IMAGENAME eq centricity.exe"

REM taskkill /F cmd*

sleep 10

taskkill /F /FI "IMAGENAME eq jrew.exe"

2063534-001 Rev 2 253

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

taskkill /F /FI "IMAGENAME eq javaw.exe"

sleep 30

shutdown ‐r ‐f

REM‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐

3. Use any text editor to create a command file named c:\auto_reboot_warning_go.bat.

Enter the following text in the file.

cd c:\

auto_reboot_warning.bat>>auto_reboot_warning_log.txt

4. Use any text editor to create a command file named c:\auto_reboot_warning.bat.

Enter the following text in the file. In the “net send” command, enter the “Computer
Name” of the workstation you want to send the broadcast message to, followed by the
text of the message to be broadcast. The time of the warning is configurable as
shown, and is site-specific depending on customer preference.

net send <Computer Name> "Message to be broadcast"

Example text:

REM‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐

REM Warning of pending Shutdown Process

date /t

time /t

net send plt075 "To improve system performance, this workstation will
reboot at 3:00 AM. Please save any changes so they will not be lost
during the process. Thank you."

date /t

time /t

REM End Shutdown Warning

REM‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐

5. In a Command Window, using the AT command, schedule the command file

(auto_reboot_go.bat) to run when desired. The scheduled task remains active,
including after a reboot, until canceled. The following AT command schedules
auto_reboot.bat to execute at 3 AM every day:

c:\>at 03:00:00 /interactive /every:m,t,w,th,f,s,su

c:\auto_reboot_go.bat

OR

c:\>schtasks /Create /SC weekly /D MON,TUE,WED,THU,FRI,SAT,SUN /TN

AutoReboot /ST 03:00:00 /TR c:\auto_reboot_go.bat

2063534-001 Rev 2 254

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

6. To verify whether the command is properly scheduled, enter the following command:

c:\>schtasks

7. To open Scheduled Tasks, select Start >All Programs > Accessories >System
Tools, and then select Scheduled Tasks.

Result: The Scheduled Tasks window displays.

8. To add a scheduled task, launch Add Scheduled Tasks.

Note: This tool can be used in lieu of the above schtasks command or use the Winat tool.
The Help documentation is available with Winat tool.

9. To modify a scheduled task, open Scheduled Tasks window using Step 7.

10. Right-click the task you want to modify and select Properties.

11. In a Command Window, using the AT command, schedule the command file
(auto_reboot_warning_go.bat) to run when desired. The scheduled task remains
active, including after a reboot, until canceled. The following AT command schedules
auto_reboot_warning.bat to execute at 2:30 AM every day:

Enter the following commands:

c:\>at 02:30:00 /interactive /every:m,t,w,th,f,s,su c:\auto_reboot_warning_go.bat

OR

c:\>schtasks /Create /SC weekly /D MON,TUE,WED,THU,FRI,SAT,SUN /TN AutoRebootwarning /ST

02:30:00 /TR c:\auto_reboot_warning_go.bat

Verify the command is properly scheduled.

c:\>shctasks

A display similar to the following displays:

StatusID Day Time Command Line

________ ____________________ _______ ________________________

10 Each M T W Th F S Su 2:30 AM c:\auto_reboot_warning_go.bat

OR

Use the Winat tool. Help documentation is available with this tool. This tool may be
used in lieu of the above at command.

c:\>winat

2063534-001 Rev 2 255

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

12. Examine the auto_reboot_log.txt file to verify proper operation. Only the Date, Time
and Shutdown:\\<IP Address> information should be returned in this log file.

13. Examine the auto_reboot_warning_log.txt file to verify proper operation. Only the
Date, Time and net send, computer name and message should be returned in this
log file.

The configuration for automatic reboot is complete.

Section 6: Removing Old Exam Locks from the Database

It is possible that the workstation being rebooted will have entries in the exam_locks table
on the database server at the time it is rebooted. If there are any, they must be released
through the following procedure. It is recommended that this procedure be configured to
run shortly after the workstation reboot procedure is performed, for each time the reboot is
performed.

1. Log on to the database server as user Sybase.

2. Log on to the isql as user sa.

3. Enter the following commands:

1> use ims

2> go

1> exec modify_task @task_name=”DelExmLock”,

@sql_task_text=”declare @time smallint select @time = 48

delete from exam_locks where lock_dttm < dateadd(hour,‐

@time,getdate())”, @interval=86400, @type=”ISQL”

2> go

Note: The @time = 48 indicates that the system will delete any entry in the exam_locks
table that is older than 48 hours. This value can be configured to local site
requirements, but it is recommended that it be set to 48.

Note: The @interval= string should be set to a numeric value equal to how often the site
wants to perform this procedure (86400 = daily, 604800 = weekly). It is
recommended that this be set to daily, although it should run at the same interval
as the workstation reboot.

Section 7: Using the Default Display Protocol Push Tool

This section provides information for an authorized user to enable, access, and use the
Default Display Protocol (DDP) Push Tool.

2063534-001 Rev 2 256

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

For LSP sites, users log into the workstation with a smart card (Identity Agent) rather than
logging in with a user name and password. Field Engineers must use a user’s smart card
to configure the user’s access to the DDP Push Tool.

The DDP Push tool provides a graphical user interface to allow an authorized user to
perform the following functions:

 Push DDP(s) and decision trees from one user account to another

 Export a site's DDP(s) and decision trees to a file

 Copy DDP(s) from one user account to one or more other user accounts

 Delete DDP(s) from a selected user account

Prerequisites:

 The Workstation application software installed.

7-1: Verifying the DDPuser Account

DDPuser accounts are automatically created during the installation process. To verify that
the account exists:

1. Log on to CAT as Administrator.

2. Click Administration in the Navigation panel and click Users & Functions.

3. In the UserName field, enter ddpadmin and click Search.

The system lists the ddpadmin user, if it exists in the database.

Note: If the ddpadmin user does not exist, create a new user using the procedure below.

7-1-1: Creating a ddpadmin User

Note: Use this procedure ONLY if the site does not have a ddpadmin user created.

To create a ddpadmin user:

1. Log on to CAT as an administrator user.

2. Click User & Functions.

3. Verify that ddpadmin user does not already exist.

4. Create new ddpadmin user by clicking Create New.

5. Set the following attributes:

 UserName: ddpadmin

 Password: ddpadmin

2063534-001 Rev 2 257

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

 PACSUserGrp: Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Save the settings.

7-2: Creating a Desktop Icon

To create a desktop icon:

1. Right-click on the Desktop and select New > Shortcut.

Result: The Create Shortcut Wizard displays.

2. Locate the /platinum/ddppush.bat file and click Next.

3. Name the shortcut DDPTool and click Finish.

4. Verify that a new DDPTool icon displays on the Desktop.

7-3: User Access

To access DDP functions:

1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the DDPPushTool icon.

2. Enter the Log on Name: ddpadmin and the Password: ddpadmin in the DDP
Administration Login window and click Login.

The login window is removed and the DDP Administration window is blank except for
the File menu name located in the menu bar. Refer to the following section(s) below to
perform the desired function(s) using the DDP tool.

7-4: Push DDP(S)

The Push DDP function allows a user to copy a user account's decision tree into any
number of other decision trees in the system. In addition, there is an option to replace
target account DDPs with either a portion or the entire source account's tree. This feature
is useful for allowing users or groups access DDPs and associated decision trees from
other system user accounts.

To push DDP(s):

1. On the menu bar of the DDP Administration window, click File and then click Push
DDPs.

2. Select a user account displayed in the Select user or group to Push list box, from
which to obtain the decision tree.

3. Click Select Exam(s).

4. In the Monitor tab window, select the appropriate number of monitors.

5. Select the Modality tab and select the desired modalities from the Source list box.

2063534-001 Rev 2 258

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

Multiple individual modalities can be selected by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key
while clicking on each of the desired modalities. A group of modalities can be selected
by clicking on the first modality in the desired group. Then press and hold the <Shift>
key while selecting the last modality in the desired group.

6. Click Add to add the source modalities to the Target list box.

Note: Remove can be used to delete unwanted modalities from the Target list box.

7. Select the Procedure tab and select the desired procedures from the Source list box.

8. Multiple individual procedures can be selected by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key
while clicking on each of the desired procedures. A group of procedures can be
selected by clicking on the first procedure in the desired group. Then press and hold
the <Shift> key while selecting the last procedure in the desired group.

9. Click Add to add the source procedures to the Target list box.

Note: Remove can be used to delete unwanted procedures from the Target list box.

10. Select the Historical tab and select the desired historical parameter(s) to use from the
Source list box.

11. Click Add to add the source historical parameter to the Target list box.

Note: Remove can be used to delete an unwanted historical parameter(s) from the
Target list box.

12. Click Select Target Account(s).

13. Select the desired target accounts from the Available Accounts list box.

The Users and All buttons can be used to display either the User Accounts or All
Accounts in the Available Accounts list box.

Multiple user accounts can be selected by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key while
clicking on each of the desired procedures. A group of user accounts can be selected
by clicking on the first user in the desired group, then press and hold the <Shift> key,
select the last user in the desired group.

14. Click Add Selected to add the selected target accounts to the Selected Accounts list
box.

Note: Remove Selected can be used to delete unwanted target accounts from the
Selected Accounts list box.

15. Click Options to specify how to manage naming conflicts that may occur during the
DDP Push process. The selections available are the following:

 Prompt when conflict is encountered

 Replace when conflict is encountered (default)

 Do NOT replace when conflict is encountered

2063534-001 Rev 2 259

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

Note: The default selection is "Replace when conflict is encountered." This selection
automatically replaces an existing DDP with the new DDP (which has the same
name) when a naming conflict is encountered.

16. Click OK and then click Finish.

17. Click Begin to start the push of the DDP decision tree(s) from the source user account
or group to the target user account(s).

18. If prompted, resolve DDP naming conflicts that occur during the push process by
specifying an alternate name for the DDP.

19. Verify that the Push process is completed by observing the Units Completed (Max)
information, the Overall Progress bar graph and the Unit Progress bar graph.

Note: No message displays when the Push process completes.

20. Select File from the menu bar, and either select a desired function provided by the
DDP Tool or select Exit to quit the tool.

7-5: Export DDP(s)

The Export DDP function allows you to export DDPs and their associated decision tree
segments. Use the DDP Export function when you want to transfer decision trees or DDPs
from the user's account to an external source (e.g. CD-ROM, floppy diskette, etc.). This
feature is useful for creating back-ups of DDPs and associated decision trees.

To export DDP(s):

1. On the menu bar of the DDP Administration window, click File and then click Export
DDPs (parsed).

This option allows you to export a DDP in text format, not in XML format.

2. Select a user account displayed in the Select user or group to Push list box, from
which to Export the DDP(s) and then click Next.

3. Select the desired DDP(s) from the Select DDP(s) for Action list box.

Multiple individual DDP(s) can be selected by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key
while clicking on each of the desired DDP(s). A group of DDP(s) can be selected by
clicking on the first DDP in the desired group. Then press and hold the <Shift> key
while selecting the last DDP in the desired group.

4. (Optional) Select the “Export DDP Tree” option.

5. Click Finish.

The DDP is exported in text format to the following directory:

%PLAT_HOME%/service/ddpinfo

The DDP files will have the .ddp extension. The DDP trees will have the .ddt
extension.

2063534-001 Rev 2 260

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

7-6: Copy DDP(S)

The Copy DDP function allows a user to copy the DDPs from one user account to one or
more other user account(s). This feature is useful when new users of the system need to
use DDPs from other existing user accounts.

To copy DDP(s):

1. On the menu bar of the DDP Administration window. click File and then click Copy
DDPs.

2. Select a user account displayed in the Select user or group to Push list box, from
which to Copy the DDP(s) and click Select DDP(s).

3. Select the desired DDP(s) from the Select DDP(s) for Action list box.

Multiple individual DDP(s) can be selected by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key
while clicking on each of the desired DDP(s). A group of DDP(s) can be selected by
clicking on the first DDP in the desired group. Then press and hold the <Shift> key
while selecting the last DDP in the desired group.

4. Click Select Target Account(s).

5. Select the desired user account(s) from the Available Accounts list box.

The Users and All buttons can be used to display either the User Accounts or All
Accounts in the Available Accounts list box.

Multiple individual users can be selected in the Available Accounts by pressing and
holding the <Ctrl> key while clicking on each of the desired users. A group of users
can be selected by clicking on the first user in the desired group. Then press and hold
the <Shift> key while selecting the last user in the desired group.

Note: Remove can be used to delete unwanted user accounts from the Selected
Accounts list box.

6. Click Options to specify how to manage naming conflicts that may occur during the
DDP Copy process. The selections available are the following:

 Replace when conflict is encountered (default)

 Do NOT replace when conflict is encountered

Note: The default selection is "Replace when conflict is encountered". This selection
automatically replaces an existing DDP with the new DDP (which has the same
name) when a naming conflict is encountered.

7. Click OK and then click Finish Action.

8. Click Begin to start the Copy of the DDP(s) from the source user account to the target
user account(s).

9. If prompted, resolve DDP naming conflicts that occur during the copy process by
specifying an alternate name for the DDP.

2063534-001 Rev 2 261

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

10. Verify that the copy process is completed by observing the Units Completed (Max)
information, the Overall Progress bar graph and the Unit Progress bar graph.

Note: No message displays when the Copy process completes.

11. Click File, and either select a desired function provided by the DDP Tool or select Exit
to quit the tool.

7-7: Delete DDP(S)

The Delete DDP function allows a user to delete one or more selected DDPs from a
specified user account. This feature is useful for removing DDPs that are no longer used.

To delete DDP(s):

1. On the menu bar of the DDP Administration window, click File and then click Delete
DDPs.

2. Select a user account displayed in the Select user or group to Push list box, from
which to Delete the DDP(s).

3. Click Select DDP(s).

4. Select the desired DDP(s) from the Select DDP(s) for Action list box.

Multiple individual DDP(s) can be selected by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key
while clicking on each of the desired DDP(s). A group of DDP(s) can be selected by
clicking on the first DDP in the desired group. Then press and hold the <Shift> key
while selecting the last DDP in the desired group.

5. Click Finish Action.

6. Click Begin to start the Deletion of the DDP(s) from the selected user account.

7. Verify that the delete process is completed by observing the Units Completed (Max)
information, the Overall Progress bar graph, and the Unit Progress bar graph.

Note: No message displays when the Delete process completes.

8. Select File from the menu bar, and either select a desired function provided by the
DDP Tool or select Exit to quit the tool.

7-8: Validate DDP

To validate DDP(s):

1. On the menu bar of the DDP Administration window, click File and then click Validate
DDPs.

2. Select a user account displayed in the Select user or group to Push list box, from
which to Delete the DDP(s) and click Next.

3. Select the desired DDP(s) from the Select DDP(s) for Action list box.

2063534-001 Rev 2 262

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

Multiple individual DDP(s) can be selected by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key
while clicking on each of the desired DDP(s). A group of DDP(s) can be selected by
clicking on the first DDP in the desired group. Then press and hold the <Shift> key
while selecting the last DDP in the desired group.

4. (Optional) Select the “Validate Exam Procedures” toggle button.

5. Click Finish.

Results are sent to the following file:

%PLAT_HOME%/service/logs/DDPAdmin.log

7-9: Clean Database

Use this procedure when upgrading the system from 7.12 or 8.0 to any subsequent
release. After this procedure is done for a 7.x or 8.x system, it does not need to be run if
“point” releases are installed, such as 7.12.2 or 8.0.2.

To clean database:

1. On the menu bar of the DDP Administration window, click File and then click Clean
Database.

2. Click Start Database Clean.

Results are sent to the following directory:

%PLAT_HOME%/service/logs/databaseclean.log

Section 8: Tools Editor

The Tools Editor is a graphical user interface that allows the field engineer to easily and
safely modify customizable properties on the Workstation. This section describes how to
use the Tools Editor to modify properties on the Workstation.

If the site is an LSP site, users log into the Workstation with a smart card (Identity Agent)
rather than logging in with a user name and password. Field engineers must use a user’s
smart card to configure the user’s access to the Tools Editor.

There are four files on the Workstation that the Tools Editor can custom configure to best
suit the Workstation’s primary use or user.

 Platinum.properties file—This file is the generic local file that contains a description
of all configurable items on the Workstation.

 Platinum_custom.properties file—This file allows the administrator to modify certain

parameters on that Workstation.

 SystemProfile.properties file—This file allows the administrator to custom configure

a parameter for the entire site. This file is stored on the ISU.

2063534-001 Rev 2 263

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

 User file—A user can further modify his/her environment with a file stored on the ISU
that modifies any Workstation that the user logs on to for the duration of the session.

The application searches for configurable preferences in the following order:

Table 21-1: Configuration Details

Priority Configuration File Name Level of Configuration Control

1 User User Level Configuration

2 Platinum_custom.properties Workstation Level Configuration

3 SystemProfile.properties System Level Configuration (All Centricity Workstations)

4 Platinum.properties Default Configuration

When the application launches, it searches the properties files in descending order. For
each parameter, the system uses the first instance found from the four files. Thus, for any
given parameter, the settings in the Platinum.properties file will only be used when the
parameter is not configured in a higher file.

This hierarchy of configuration files is used so that the behavior of Workstations can be
modified for individual users, Workstations or across the entire system.

A user cannot and should not modify the Platinum.properties file under any
circumstances. The Tools Editor allows the user to view all of the configurable
Platinum.property fields for all four files and make modifications to any allowed field on the
three configurable files. If a field can be modified, it will have a check mark in the C
column; if it cannot be modified, the box is blank. Fields with a blank box should not be
modified; they are listed so the user can verify the settings and modify if directed by the
Online Center or Technical Support.

8-1: Launching the Tools Editor

Create a desktop icon for the Tools Editor to launch it quickly. To do so, you must be
logged on to the administrator account.

To launch the Tools Editor:

1. Right-click on the desktop and select New > Shortcut.

Result: The Create Shortcut Wizard displays.

2. Locate the /platinum/toolsEditor.bat file and click Next.

3. Name the shortcut Tools Editor and click Finish.

4. Verify that a new Tools Editor icon displays on the desktop.

5. Double-click the Tools Editor icon to launch the application.

2063534-001 Rev 2 264

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

The Tools Editor cannot be launched with the default configuration in the
serverinfo.properties file. To launch the Tools Editor, the property
com.ge.med.platinum.profile.WorkstationProfile.workSourceLocation0 in the file should be
changed from

com.ge.med.platinum.profile.WorkstationProfile.workSourceLocation0=j
dbc:sybase:Tds:x.x.x.x:20000/ims?JCONNECT_VERSION=6

to

com.ge.med.platinum.profile.WorkstationProfile.workSourceLocation0=j
dbc:sybase:Tds:x.x.x.x:20000/ims

Where x.x.x.x is the IP address of the IMS server.

8-2: Using The Tools Editor

Double-click the icon to launch the Tools Editor. The icon is either on the desktop or at
%PLAT_HOME%\toolsEditor.bat.

Result: When the tool launches, the Tools Editor Login screen displays.

8-2-1: Pull-down Menus

There are several pull-down menus.

 Under Program, click Exit Program to terminate the program.

 Under Tools, click Add User to add another User ID column to the properties section
of the user interface. In the Change Current User dialog box, enter the user and click
Submit.

Note: You can also use Add User to display the preferences for multiple users.

 Under Tools, click Refresh Properties to refresh the properties on the screen.

 Under Help, click About Platinum Tools Editor to display the version information for
the tool.

8-2-2: String Search Options

This area consists of an entry field that allows you to enter a search string and a Next and
Previous button. You can enter a data value into the search field and the tool dynamically
searches for a matching value as the data is entered. The first matching field moves to the
top of the properties area. The search is not case sensitive and finds the next instance that
matches the user’s entry. If you enter “CT”, it is possible that the next entry found contains
the word “section”. The Next and Previous buttons are used to move through the other
parameters that also match the entered string.

2063534-001 Rev 2 265

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

8-2-3: Properties Section

The properties section consists of columns titled: C, Property Name, (4) Default, (2)
Custom, (3) System, and (1) User ID. This list reflects their order on the screen from left
to right.

 The C column (“C” for “Configurable”) has two possible entries: a blank box or a
checked box. If the box is checked, it indicates a configurable parameter. The boxes
without check marks should not be modified unless directed to do so by the online
center or technical support. If a value is listed in any column besides the Platinum
column, it should be considered suspect.

 The Property Name field lists the name of the parameter as it is listed in the various
properties files.

 The next columns represent the configuration files, and display the value that is
currently found in each file. A blank indicates no value for the parameter in that file.
The preceding number in each column header indicates the order of priority for the
configuration files. A file with a lower number will always override a file with a higher
number (1 overrides 2, 3, and 4).

 The files represented by the left columns reside on the workstation and the files on the
right reside on the database server (address specified at login).

 The Platinum column cannot be modified and the values there represent the default
configuration as shipped.

Modifying a Property

To modify a field:

Move the mouse pointer over the field (not the property name) and double click. If the field
is empty, a blinking cursor displays in the center of the field. If a value exists in the field, it
is highlighted. If you enter anything, the existing data is erased and replaced with the
typed data. To modify the existing data, click to the side of the field and use the cursor to
change the individual characters while leaving the remaining data intact.

Note: After making changes, you must restart the application to allow the changes to take
effect.

8-2-4: Setting a Site-wide Property

To set a site-wide property:

1. Open the Tools Editor.

2. In the Search Name box, enter the property and click Find.

3. Double-click the System Column.

Result: The field opens and displays a cursor for editing.

2063534-001 Rev 2 266

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

4. In the System Column, enter the necessary value and press Enter.

Result: The property is now enabled for the entire site.

Note: Some properties cannot be set globally via the Tools Editor. For those properties, the
desired values need to be set at each workstation.

8-2-5: Help

Tooltips pop up anywhere in the properties window if the cursor remains over the location
for a few seconds. They work with the headers and the data fields and describe what the
field represents or what the user can do in this field or column.

Section 9: Configuring the IMS Server Data

Use this section to change the IP Address setting on the workstation for the Local/Remote
IMS database server(s). This procedure is required when the IP address of an IMS server
is changed.

To configure the IMS server data:

Note: The application software must be installed before you begin.

1. Log on as administrator.

User: Administrator

Password:CANal1

2. Open a command prompt.

3. Enter:

cd \platinum\service\config.

4. Execute the ServerInfo.pl script.

Note: The ServerInfo.pl script specifies the hostname and IP address of the IMS server,
from which the workstation accesses exam data. If the workstation is used to
access exam data from more than one IMS server, both the local and remote IMS
servers must be specified using the applicable menu selections provided by the
ServerInfo.pl script.

5. Enter (1) Update Local Server Info from ServerInfo.pl menu.

6. Enter the Name of the IMS/middle tier server.

7. Enter the IP address of the IMS server.

8. Enter the IP address of the middle tier server.

9. Press Enter to continue.

2063534-001 Rev 2 267

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

10. If the workstation is part of a system configuration that consists of more than one IMS
database, enter (2) Add New Remote Server Info from the ServerInfo.pl menu.
Otherwise, skip to step 11.

a. Enter the name of the IMS/middle tier server.

b. Enter the IP address of the IMS server.

c. Enter the IP address of the middle tier server.

d. Press Enter to continue.

11. Repeat step 10 for each remote IMS server, from which the workstation accesses
exam data.

12. Enter (5) to Display the configured server information.

13. Verify the information displayed is correct and press Enter to continue.

14. Select (0) Save changes and quit.

15. Enter Y to save changes before exiting and press Enter to continue.

Section 10: Changing the Desktop Appearance

You can change the workstation’s desktop appearance for items such as font styles, font
sizes, and palette appearance. Use the Display Settings icon to change the appearance.
Since the IIS user account is a restricted account, you must change the desktop
appearance with the Administrator account.

To change the Desktop appearance:

1. Log on as Administrator.

2. Double-click the C:\platinum\service\config\AddDisplayPanelToIIS.bat file.

3. Log out as Administrator and log on to the IIS account.

4. On the Start Menu, click Programs and then click the Display Settings icon.

Result: The Display Properties dialog box displays.

5. Click the Appearance tab and modify the Active Title Bar settings to the customer’s
preferences and click OK.

6. Log out of the IIS account and log on as Administrator.

7. Double click the C:\platinum\service\config\RemoveDisplayPanelFromIIS.bat file.

8. Log off the administrator user and log on as IIS.

9. Verify that the Display Setting icon is removed from the Start Menu.

The customer should not need to access these Display Settings again.

2063534-001 Rev 2 268

Chapter 21 Operations and Maintenance

Section 11: Applying OS Patches

For details, refer to http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/default.aspx or the Microsoft

documentation.

Restart the system and test run the Centricity workstation. Any regular check should be
successfully run.eg:opening an exam and checking that images are displayed properly.

Section 12: Mammography Maintenance

Users (Operators) should perform display monitor calibration on a regular basis. The
Workstation Quality Control (QC) Manual contains specific procedures for cleaning and
calibrating monitors.

2063534-001 Rev 2 269

g GE Healthcare

Troubleshooting

This section contains the following chapters:

 Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

 Chapter 23 Functional Checks

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Troubleshooting Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Section 2: Network Transfer Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Section 3: Setting the Detail Level of the Log Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Section 4: Applications Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Section 5: Display Commserver Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Section 6: Error Starting CommServer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Section 7: Displaying Workstation Application Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Section 8: Displaying Application Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Section 9: Third-Party Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Section 10: AW Server Integration Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

The troubleshooting procedures are described in a series of sections about the different
steps, problems encountered with their corrective actions and useful procedures, when
installing and using the workstation.

Note: Corrective actions should be made by authorized and qualified personnel only.

Section 1: Troubleshooting Network Problems

Use this section to verify connectivity of the Ethernet network connection.

1-1: Monitoring Commands

Log on as administrator to use the following commands:

 Ping: connection test

# ping 192.28.75.100 [Enter](IP address)

192.28.75.100 is alive

# ping 192.28.75.132 [Enter](one’s own address)

192.28.75.132 is alive(Ethernet port test including transceiver.)

 Telnet: open a session on remote machine

Note: Telnet applies only to the Solaris operating system.

(e.g): get the date from OC console through the network - Job id = 13)

# telnet 192.28.75.133 13 [Enter]

2063534-001 Rev 2 271

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

Trying 192.28.75.133

Connected to mr01‐oc0

Escape character is ’^]’.

Date ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐

Connection closed by foreign host.

IP numbers in text are used for example ONLY. Use IP numbers for your specific
network.

 Arp: get current IP-to-ethernet address translation of connected machines

# arp ‐a [Enter] (Use arp ‐all for more information.)

Net to Media Table

DeviceIP AddressMask FlagsPhys Addr

‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐

le0192.28.75.xxx 255.255.255.25208:00:20:00:37:24

le0192.28.75.xxx 255.255.255.25208:00:20:1d:a4:27

...........

 netstat -rn

 ipconfig /all

 For troubleshooting isolation steps, run new CAT 5 or fiber cable to eliminate possible
cable problems.

Section 2: Network Transfer Rate

This section describes the options that affect the data transfer rate over the network.

Data transfer rate is affected by the hardware used, the switches set, and the network
configuration.

To achieve a faster transfer rate, set the Link Speed network configuration to one of the
following values: (1) Auto Detect, (2) 100 Mbps / Full Duplex. The best performance is
based on the site configurations. Test both settings and select the one that yields higher
transfer rates.

To set data transfer rates:

1. On the workstation, open the System folder on the Control Panel.

Result: The System Properties window opens.

2063534-001 Rev 2 272

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

2. Click the Hardware tab and then click Device Manager.

3. Open the Network Adapters list and right-click on your network adapter and click
Properties.

Note: Most Network Adapters are Intel products.

4. Click the Advanced tab. In the Property listbox, select Link Speed & Duplex.

5. Set the value to Auto Detect or 100 Mpbs / Full Duplex, whichever yields higher
transfer rates at your site and click OK.

Section 3: Setting the Detail Level of the Log Files

The workstation provides multiple levels of detail for the standard and commserver
(CSINF) log files. There are three additional levels that the log files can be set to. These
levels can be used to see various levels of detail to accurately determine how the
workstation is performing. This section refers to the log.txt and the CSINF.log files located
in the %PLAT_HOME%\ and %PLAT_HOME%\service\logs directory.

Setting the logging level to a verbose mode will cause the log files to be larger and use
more disk space in the process. It is recommended that the log files be kept at the
“default” level during normal operation of the workstation.

3-1: Setting the Level of Message Output to the Log File

To set the level of message output to the log file:

1. Open the %PLAT_HOME%\support\desktop.properties file.

2. Search for the system.debugging.level property.

3. Set to one of three values: essential, partial (medium), all (all debugging).

Section 4: Applications Troubleshooting

This section details troubleshooting applications.

2063534-001 Rev 2 273

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

4-1: System Files

Table 22-1: Application Troubleshooting

Normal Operation Malfunction T/S Action Suspect Useful Tools,

Module Diagnostics,
etc.

Power applied to the

workstation &
monitor.

At Applications Start, Java not installed, Verify that the java directory is entered jre q.3
error message or not in path. into the Path.
indicating that JAVA Verify that java.exe is installed on the
cannot be found. system. It is located in the directory where
the workstation application is installed.

At Applications Start, Classpath set Compare to the example at the end of this
error message incorrectly. section using the set command.
indicating that the Verify that the classpath is set correctly.
com.med.ge cannot
be located.

Application starts but  Misconfiguration  Verify that the correct User name and Bad serverinfo.pl
cannot log on to the or Ethernet password were typed in at the Ethernet
IMS server. communication Applications Login Screen. (Note this port on
s error. is a request for a PACS account login, system
 System appears not a windows login) board.
to lock up.  Verify that the Caps lock is not
 Application changing the case on the username /
login screen is password.
split between  Verify that the IMS can be seen on the
two monitors. network via the ping command.
 Verify that the correct IMS IP address
is configured on the workstation.
 Verify that the Username / Password
that you are using to log on to the
workstations is valid at the PACS
database.
 Verify cfg_prop.pl has executed
correctly.

Application starts.  CommServer  Remove and reinstall application

Patient list displayed software software.
but no image(s) problem.  Commserver service.
come back  Check the workstation table to verify
the workstation hostname.

Application starts.  Database  Verify dbcc’s have not returned errors.  IMS
Patient lists/folders Problem.  Call the GE Online Center. Database
displayed but no
worklists are shown.

2063534-001 Rev 2 274

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

Table 22-1: Application Troubleshooting (Continued)

Normal Operation Malfunction T/S Action Suspect Useful Tools,

Module Diagnostics,
etc.

No diagnostic video  Misconfiguration  Install service monitor and verify that  Video Diagnostic
on any monitor. or bad video proper configuration settings are set. Board use of service
Distorted images. board or Be sure cfg_prop.pl has run  Hardware monitor.
Horizontal monitor. successfully. Info.prop DPI reference
deflection blanking  Monitor DPI  Verify DPI set correctly. erties file given in
incorrectly set  Remove & replace video board. Chapter 6
 Remove and replace monitor. frame buffer
driver
installation
sections for
both Dome
and Matrox.

One monitor failure  Defective part. Replace the least used of the monitor  Bad Revisit
 Incorrect driver positions for degraded operations. monitor chapter 10.
config. Note: If a 1B monitor is at fault, a 2B
monitor can be operated as a 1B monitor
until spare parts are received from back
order.
To do this modify the parameters for
number of heads and columns in the
“Display Head Properties” section of the
workstation properties file in the path
C:\HardwareInfo.properties file to the
new degraded mode number.

Monitors OK, but one  Possible bad Attempt to isolate a bad video board or  Video Calibration
has no video. PCI slot. slot by swapping board to a new unused board. procedure
PCI slot.  PCI slot.

 Password or
Log on Invalid Correct Password or Username.
  Possible Must not rely
Username
Use Ping, Telnet and fbrtest to verify
 defective on Ping
incorrect.
network. network command
 Verify valid user log on using ISQL cables, alone.
 No connection session into Sybase. Cat 5 or Ethernet could
to the IMS
 Check worksource location value in fiber. be down, but
database.
ServerInfo.properties file. It should be: Ping could
jdbc:sybase:Tds:<ip address of function over
 Application bug. server>:20000/ims fiber network.
 Perform clean disk install.

2063534-001 Rev 2 275

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

Table 22-1: Application Troubleshooting (Continued)

Normal Operation Malfunction T/S Action Suspect Useful Tools,

Module Diagnostics,
etc.

QC SMPTE Test  Invalid IMS  Verify IMS database content includes  IMS fbrtest.bat
pattern will not load. database test image and modality is not set to Database fbrtest.bat
Examination information. invalid DICOM Object such as DF.  Comm-
information can be  Commserver Can change to RF in IMS. server
seen in worklist and service not  Check commserver service. Service
image is online. running.  Verify fiber connectivity.  Fiber
 Defective fiber optic
link, if non- cable
COTS system.

QC SMPTE Test  Invalid IMS  Load QC SMPTE 2C examination  IMS Revisit

pattern can not be database from CD Monitor QC Images Database Installation
loaded. Examination information. #4354069. and Initial
information can not Examination is  Insert CD in HSA terminal CD drive. Configuration
be seen in worklist. not present. (HSA must have LiteBox application Section
loaded for maintenance purposes.)
 In LiteBox application select File >
Display Local Worklist.
 Select QC SMPTE 2C examination.
Then select Exams > Restore, click
NO, and confirm overwrite dialog if
displayed by clicking on Continue.

Section 5: Display Commserver Logs

This section explains how to display the commserver service logs. This csinf.log log file is
an ASCII based log file located in the %PLAT_HOME%\service\logs directory.

5-1: GUI-Based Procedure

Any ASCII text view program in windows can be used to display the csinf.log file, such as
notepad, wordpad, etc.

5-2: Command Line-Based Procedure

To display Commserver logs using command line:

1. The file can be viewed using the type and more commands.

2. Change directory to the log file location (cd %PLAT_HOME%\service\logs).

2063534-001 Rev 2 276

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

3. Display the log file (enter csinf.log | more).

09.15.1998 21:37:08 CSInf ‐ INFO: Starting CommServer Interface Service (CSInf).

09.15.1998 21:37:09 CSInf ‐ INFO: TCP/IP protocol started.

09.15.1998 21:37:09 CSInf ‐ INFO: Attempting connection to ISU.

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: ISU Connection Established.

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: ISU Booted Message Performed.

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: ISU Login Performed.

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: Fiber Successfully Performed. Fiber Exists:1, Link
Status:1, Need Reboot:0

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: Configuration Parameters:

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: CSINF version: 2.0.0

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: Our IP Address: 192.28.75.132.

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: ISU IP network address: 192.28.73.230

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: Maximum transfer size per request: 20971520

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: Maximum write transfer size (CSINF‐‐>ISU ‐ CBlock
alignment): 4194304

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: Number of network retries to attempt: 3

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: Network timeout: 3 sec

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: Compression: on

09.15.1998 21:37:16 CSInf ‐ INFO: Write Slop: 524288

09.15.1998 21:37:17 CSInf ‐ INFO: Messages logged to: C:\platinum\service\logs\csinf.log

09.15.1998 21:37:17 CSInf ‐ INFO: Logging threshold: Informational

09.15.1998 21:37:17 CSInf ‐ INFO: Reboot count: 3

09.15.1998 21:37:17 CSInf ‐ INFO: FTP search directory: C:\platinum\service\logs

09.15.1998 21:37:17 CSInf ‐ INFO: CSInf initialization complete.

5-3: Web-Based Procedure

To display Commserver logs using web:

2063534-001 Rev 2 277

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

1. Select the workstation containing the logs and enter its IP address in the URL field of
the browser. If the browser is on the same machine enter [localhost].

2. Log on as user: geservice.

3. Enter password: 2charGE.

4. Select the display log files.

5. Choose the appropriate log file from the drop box, and any other sort criteria.

6. Click submit to display the results.

Section 6: Error Starting CommServer Service

An issue could occur with the CommServer Service not starting on certain workstations
and logging a Dr. Watson error. While the root cause is not confirmed, resetting the
firmware to the default values solves the problem.

6-1: Resetting Firmware to Defaults

To reset firmware to defaults:

Note: The computer unit may need to be replaced if a power interruption is encountered
during startup after the firmware has been reset.

1. Turn off the machine.

2. Disconnect the power cord from the machine.

3. Open the side-cover and locate the lithium battery. Take out the lithium battery for 1
minute.

4. Replace the battery back into the machine and connect the power cord.

5. Restart the machine and allow it to reset its firmware to default. If the machine
prompts to press F1 to continue or F2 to go to setup, press F2 and set the BIOS info
(e.g., system date and time) to the correct values.

Section 7: Displaying Workstation Application Logs

This section explains how to display the workstation application logs. The workstation log
files are ASCII-based log files located in the %PLAT_HOME%\service\logs directory.

Use any ASCII text view program in Windows, such as Notepad or WordPad, to display
the log file.

The following logs are available:

2063534-001 Rev 2 278

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

 csinf.log—Log file that indicates status of current commserver process. If there are
any errors with the commserver application, this log will report it.

 platinum.log—General log file that includes error messages, application status, etc.
of the Workstation application.

Section 8: Displaying Application Software Version

This section explains how to display the current software version running on the
workstation.

8-1: GUI Based Procedure

To view application software version on the workstation GUI:

1. Open the Workstation application. Select Start > Centricity, or click the Workstation
icon on the desktop.

2. In the Workstation application, open the Utilities palette and click the About tab.

8-2: Command Line Based Procedure

To view the software version using command prompt:

1. Start a command prompt.

2. Change directory to %PLAT_HOME%\support.

3. Open platinum.properties.

4. Search for com.ge.med.platinum.build= for the workstation build number.

8-3: Workstation Version Check

Workstations that are running version 3.1.1 or higher will have their build version number
displayed. The build version number displays in the new column in the workstation table
called software_version.

GE Service Representatives can now query the workstation table to identify the version
number of each Workstation for a site.

The default value for the software_version field is NULL. A NULL value indicates one of
the following:

 The Workstation has a pre-3.1.1 version loaded on it.

 The Workstation has a 3.1.1 or higher version loaded on it, but no one has logged into
the Workstation since it was upgraded. You need to log into the Workstation after the

2063534-001 Rev 2 279

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

installation is complete to populate the software_version field with the correct build
version.

Section 9: Third-Party Troubleshooting

9-1: Cerner

Issue

Cerner is unable to launch from the Workstation application. The cause of this issue is a
new dll library in RA1000 (TicketAPIDll.dll) that is incompatible with versions of Cerner
that are earlier than Cerner release 2007.16.

Workaround

There are 2 workarounds.

 Upgrade Cerner to version 2007.16 or later. This is the recommended option.

Note: UK LSP sites running Cerner must use this option.

 Rename or delete the dll TicketApiDll.dll on each Workstation. The location of this file
is:

C:\<WIN-FOLDER>\system32

where <WIN-FOLDER> is the folder where Windows is installed, which is usually

WINNT or WINDOWS.

This option needs to be done every time a site upgrades the Workstation.

9-2: RA1000.exe Does Not Create geservice/iis User Accounts

This section describes the workaround for situations where RA1000.exe does not create
geservice/iis user account on an HP6200 Workstation.

Note: The following steps are only applicable to the sites running the RA1000.exe on an
HP6200 Workstation.

Note: The manual steps must be carried out only after executing the ghost software for
Windows, and well before running RA1000_DOD.exe or RA1000_OSH.exe.

1. Log on as administrator.

2. In a Windows Explorer window, right-click My Computer, then click Manage.

Result: The Computer Management window is displayed.

2063534-001 Rev 2 280

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

3. Open System Tools > Local Users and Groups.

4. Right-click Users, then click New User.

Result: The New User dialog box is displayed.

5. To create the geservice account, enter the following information, then click Create.

Table 22-2: Inputs for geservice User Account

Field Name Input

User name geservice

Full name Service Account

Description Service Account

Password 2charGE

User must change password at next Clear the check box (Uncheck)
logon

Account is disabled Clear the check box (Uncheck)

User cannot change password Select the check box

Password never expires Select the check box

Result: The geservice account is successfully created.

6. In the Users folder, right-click the geservice user account, then click Properties.

Result: The geservice Properties dialog box is displayed.

7. Click the Member Of tab, then click Add.

Result: The Select Groups dialog box is displayed.

8. Select Administrators, and the following buttons in order Add, Ok, Apply, and Ok.

9. Repeat Steps 1 to 8 to create iis user with the following inputs:

Table 22-3: Inputs for iis User Account

Field Name Input

User name iis

Full name IIS User Account

Description IIS User Account

Password iis

2063534-001 Rev 2 281

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

Table 22-3: Inputs for iis User Account (Continued)

Field Name Input

User must change password at next Clear the check box (Uncheck)
logon

Account is disabled Clear the check box (Uncheck)

User cannot change password Select the check box

Password never expires Select the check box

9-3: Dragon Naturally Speaking Troubleshooting

9-3-1: Dragon Shifting the Workstation Application to the Right

On installing the Dragon software, make sure to run it in the System Tray mode. To set it,
in the options.ini file set:

DragonBar Mode=3

This will make Dragon to always initialize in tray-icon mode. This option should go into the
file options.ini (under '[Options]') located under the "\\Current" directory.

9-3-2: Dragon Buffer Filling up While Voice Uttering Continues in the Background

In order to use PACS workstation's voice command functionality, the Dragon application
must be run in command mode. This can be set using the voice command "Start
Command Mode".

If users want to use Dragon for Dictation, they can switch it to Dictation Mode. The voice
command to switch to Dictation Mode is: "Start Dictation Mode".

If users will need to use the command mode, that should switch to the Command Mode.
Note that the command mode will only accept commands, no dictation will be accepted.
The same applies for Dictation mode. Dictation Mode will only accept dictation, no
commands will be accepted.

Users are strongly advised to SWITCH OFF the mic or TEMPORARY SUSPEND the mic
on Dragon whenever they are not using the microphone for dictation or voice command.
This can be done by using the "go to sleep" voice command to make Dragon temporary
suspend accepting voice input, and use "wake up" to resume. The reason is that if the
user does not switch off the mic, the voice buffer on Dragon will continuously build up and
may cause Dragon/Centricity workstation to crash (this is caused by CPU and/or memory
being heavily used for processing unintended speech/surrounding noise). So turning off
the mic on Dragon when users are not using it for voice input/voice command is very
important.

Note: Use the Dictation mode for dictation only when it is necessary.

2063534-001 Rev 2 282

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

9-3-3: Dictation Tool not Recognizing Voice Commands

If the dictation tool is not recognizing a user’s voice commands, the logged in user should
make sure that their voice commands are on the machine they are using. When you
import voice commands for Dragon, it is on a user basis. The RA1000 workstation
supports bulk loading of voice commands for all users on a per-machine basis, instead of
per-user.

The VoiceCommands.dat file should be used for bulk loading the Centricity workstation
voice commands (VoiceCommands.xml) per machine.

To bulk load the VoiceCommands.dat file per machine, do the following:

1. Launch the nsadmin tool (Start > Program > Dragon Tool > NSAdmin)

2. Run the following command:

# nsadmin /commands %PLAT_HOME% VoiceCommands.dat

Where %PLAT_HOME% is the path (example: c:\platinum) where you installed the
Centricity RA1000 workstation.

Section 10: AW Server Integration Troubleshooting

Table 22-4: AW Server Client error messages seen by RA1000 users

Error Message Cause Solution

Invalid Certificate window Site has not purchased a signed certificate. Click OK or install signed certificate.
displays on AWS client See “Troubleshooting AWS Client
launch Installation” on page 301.

Local display could not be Client was shut down and restarted in quick In the Windows Task Manager, look for a
initialized succession. process called XWinGEAWE, click End
process, and try to launch the client again.

Display mode not System has a monitor configuration not Use a supported monitor configuration.
supported supported by AWS client. Refer to the AWS installation and service
manuals for details.

Note: In many cases, there is no effect

other than performance of the AWS client.

10-1: AWS Client Log Files

AWS client log files can be found at the following location:

<user directory>\Application Data\Solo\<long identifier>\

 The user directory is something like <c>:\Documents And Settings\<your user

name>.

2063534-001 Rev 2 283

Chapter 22 Troubleshooting

 The long identifier matches the content of file client_instance_id.txt in

c:\Program Files\GE\AWS_2.0\solo. This identifier will change if the client is
reinstalled or upgraded to a later version.

The directory includes three sub-directories:

 integration_ini

This directory contains the integration.ini file.

 integration_logs

This directory contains the integration.log and solo.log files.

 logs

Within the logs directory, log files are named with the convention:

<long identifier>_<client hostname>_<yyyy.mm.dd>_

<hh.mm.ss.##[#]>_<log type>.log

The log type is either global or performance. More information is in the global log.

2063534-001 Rev 2 284

Chapter 23 Functional Checks

This chapter includes:

Section 1: Auditing the Workstation Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Section 2: Verifying/Modifying Additional Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Section 1: Auditing the Workstation Software Upgrade

This section describes the items to audit after a clean install or upgrade to the workstation.
Audits ensure the installation is successful and clean.

For later releases of software, for detailed information on current audit details, see the FMI
upgrade documentation (third-party tool documentation).

1-1: Workstation Version

The current version of workstation can be found in two ways.

 Open the Utilities palette in workstation and click the About tab.

 Navigate to the %PLAT_HOME%\support folder. Open the Platinum.Properties file in

Notepad or Wordpad. Search for the string "com.ge.med.platinum.version=".

1-2: Workstation Software Elements

Check the following elements for correctness:

1. Open the %PLAT_HOME% folder.

2. Check to see the file size in Windows Explorer (If you don’t have file size on the
Explorer window, choose details from the view pull down menu.

You should see newman.jar details as follows: size=xxxxKB, date=YY/YY/YY.

Where xxxxKB is the size of the file and YY/YY/YY is the date of the current file.

Note: These file sizes change with subsequent releases and/or patches.

1-3: Workstation Support Software Elements

Check the following support elements for correctness:

1. Open %PLAT_HOME%\lib.

2. Check to see the following file sizes in Windows Explorer. If you don’t have file size on
the Windows Explorer window, choose View > Details.

2063534-001 Rev 2 285

Chapter 23 Functional Checks

 You should see dicomdimpl.dll details as follows:

size = xxxKB, date =YY/YY/YY

Where xxxKB is the size of the file and YY/YY/YY is the date of the current file.

 You should see dimpl8.dll details as follows:

size = xxxKB, date =YY/YY/YY

Where xxxKB is the size of the file and YY/YY/YY is the date of the current file.

Note: These file sizes change with subsequent releases and/or patches.

1-4: Workstation High Resolution Display Drivers

Based on the configuration of the system, you should check to see if correct version of
DOME/Matrox display drivers. To check the version:

1. Open the Control Panel and double-click Display and click the Settings tab.

2. In the Display Properties dialog box, click Advanced.

The driver information portion of the resulting screen displays the current driver name
and the version. Check to see the following:

Manufacturer: DOME imaging systems (Matrox Graphics Inc. for C

monitors)

Version #:4.3.2. (4.00, 4.0.79 for C monitors with Matrox Millennium

card)

Current files: md5pcx.sys; md5pcx.dll (If you are running A+

monitors)

md4pci.sys; md4pci.dll (If you are running A monitors)

md2pci.sys; md2pci.dll (If you are running B monitors)

mga64.sys; mga64.dll (If you are running C monitors)

with Matrox G200 cards

1-5: Image Buffer Size

To view image buffer size:

1. Add physical memory.

2. Open the %PLAT_HOME%\support folder.

3. Open the file Platinum.properties in Notepad/Wordpad. Find the following entry and
verify the settings.

2063534-001 Rev 2 286

Chapter 23 Functional Checks

########################################################

The following properties are used to configure the image buffer.

com.ge.med.platinum.work.util.Win32NativeHeap.findPhysicalMemory=true

com.ge.med.platinum.work.util.Win32NativeHeap.512MBImageBufferSize=20000
0000

com.ge.med.platinum.work.util.Win32NativeHeap.1GBImageBufferSize=4000000
00

com.ge.med.platinum.work.util.Win32NativeHeap.2GBImageBufferSize=6000000
00

#######################################################

Section 2: Verifying/Modifying Additional Configuration Parameters

This section provides the procedure to verify or modify additional workstation configuration
parameters.

Note: You must log on as an Administrator to perform these procedures.

2-1: Verifying if the "JAVAW" Program Priority is Set to High

Follow the given procedure to set the "JAVAW" program priority to High:

1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to display the task manager.

2. Select centricity.exe or javaw process, and right-click the mouse button.

3. Set the priority to high.

2-2: Verifying Virtual Memory

To verify the Virtual Memory minimum and maximum parameters, see “Configuring Virtual
Memory” on page 226.

2063534-001 Rev 2 287

g GE Healthcare

Appendices

This section contains the following appendices:

 Appendix A Advanced Security Configuration

 Appendix B Enabling NTP on the Workstation

 Appendix C Extends Installation

 Appendix D Configuring a Performance Monitoring Workstation

 Appendix E Windows 7 Support

 Appendix F Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0

Appendix A Advanced Security Configuration

This appendix includes:

Section 1: Enabling OS Hardening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Section 2: Providing Folder Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Section 3: User Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Workstation provides many security features. The procedures in this section are for
advanced security features.

Section 1: Enabling OS Hardening

OS Hardening includes an optional script ra1000_OSH.exe that is available on the Tools

CD. The script alters the following functionality:

 The IIS user account will have only Power User privileges instead of Administrator
privileges.

 The built in Administrator account is renamed to xAdministrator.

To log on with administrator rights, you must use the xAdministrator account. The
geservice account is the only other user account that has Administrator privileges.

 It prevents the installation of non-approved application(s) by user IIS account. This

means that an IIS user cannot install an application that can alter the system.

Note: Non-approved applications are software applications that can modify operating
system files or services.

Note: Since the "IIS" users will have only "Power User" privileges, these users cannot install
applications that can modify system files or system services.

 It provides the Baseline Security Analyzer tool for the audits of the installed patches
on the system. Only xAdministrator or geservice having administrator rights can use
this tool.

The Baseline Security Analyzer tool can be executed from the network through a
different machine using Timbuktu or RealVNC.

 Exam Manager and Flamingo require Java 2 Runtime, and by default it is not installed
after Workstation installation or ghosting the system. Therefore, when Exam Manager
or Flamingo is launched from the Workstation system, the Java 2 Runtime is
automatically installed on the Workstation machine. Since the IIS user does not have
full rights to install this software, the software must be installed by a user with
Administrative privileges, such as a geservice or xAdministrator user.

2063534-001 Rev 2 289

Appendix A Advanced Security Configuration

Section 2: Providing Folder Permissions

A power user account or a restricted user account can be set up to allow the user the
functionality of the workstation, without granting the full privileges of a system
administrator.

To create a power user/restricted user:

1. Verify that all rights are passed on to all the inheritable objects under C:/platinum
directory by:

a. In Windows Explorer: right click on C:/platinum > Properties > Security.

b. Select Power Users/Restricted User from the Name list. If Power Users/
Restricted User is not listed, add it.

c. Verify that the Power Users/Restricted User have Full Control by:

d. Click Advanced.

e. Check the "Reset permissions on all child objects and enabled propagation
of inheritable permissions" check box. Press Apply.

f. Click OK.

g. Click OK.

2. Verify that all rights are passed on to all the inheritable objects under the C:/mc3adv
directory by:

a. In Windows Explorer, right click on C:/mc3adv > Properties > Security.

b. Select Power Users/Restricted User from the Name list. If Power Users/
Restricted User is not listed, add it.

c. Verify that the Power Users/Restricted Users have Full Control.

d. Press Advanced.

e. Check the "Reset permissions on all child objects and enabled propagation
of inheritable permissions" check box.

f. Click Apply.

g. Click OK.

h. Click OK.

3. Verify that all rights are passed on to all the inheritable objects under the C:/jre
directory by:

a. In Windows Explorer, right click C:/jre > Properties > Security.

b. Select Power Users/Restricted User from the Name list. If Power Users/
Restricted User is not listed, add it.

2063534-001 Rev 2 290

Appendix A Advanced Security Configuration

c. Verify that the Power Users/Restricted Users have Full Control.

d. Press Advanced.

e. Check the "Reset permissions on all child objects and enabled propagation
of inheritable permissions" check box.

f. Click Apply.

g. Click OK.

h. Click OK.

Section 3: User Security Settings

Additionally, to run Centricity on Windows with Power Users/Restricted Users, user

security must be set.

To set security for the user:

1. Navigate to Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy > Local
Policies > Security Options.

2. Update the setting: Network Access: Sharing and security model for local accounts to
Classic - local users authenticate as themselves.

2063534-001 Rev 2 291

Appendix B Enabling NTP on the Workstation

This appendix includes:

Section 1: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Section 2: Enabling NTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Section 1: Overview

Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol built on top of TCP that assures accurate local
time-keeping. The workstation uses NTP to synchronize the workstation clocks with the
time server on the ISU.

Section 2: Enabling NTP

Before you begin, ensure that the following conditions are met and actions are taken:

 This implementation assumes that the time server is maintained on the ISU.

 This implementation assumes that the network is maintained by GE.

 Only Administrators and GE Field personnel should use the sntp.exe file.

 Disable any other time services running on the client system.

 Check the system time, if it is offset (with differences between PC time and ISU server
time) by more than 12 hours, then change the system time manually to below 12
hours.

2-1: Installation

The NTP script is an optional script that has to be executed from the Centricity
Workstation Tools CD.

Note: Before executing the sntp.exe script, if the offset of time between the workstation
and the ISU is more than 12 hours, change the system time manually.

To enable NTP, open the Workstation Tools CD, and double-click the sntp.exe script.

Example: CD://sntp.ext

After starting the script, the following changes will happen:

 If workstation software was installed, the ISU IP address from the workstation will be
used. If the workstation software is not installed then the script will prompt you for IP
address. Enter a valid ISU IP address and the ISU must behave like NTP Time server.

 The script will use the Windows Time Service. (By default it is there for Windows XP.)

2063534-001 Rev 2 292

Appendix B Enabling NTP on the Workstation

 The script will set the windows time service ntpserver parameter to the ISU IP.

 Windows Time service will synchronize the time with server for each log on and it will
synchronize once every 45 minutes until it is successful three times, then once every
eight hours (three times per day).

 Internally the Windows Time service takes care of synchronization.

 While executing sntp.exe (before the installation). If the target time (ISU time) is ahead
of PC's time, the time is immediately changed to target time. If the Target Time (ISU
time) is behind the PC's time, the local clock is slowed (gradually it will increase) over
next 20 minutes.

 After executing sntp.exe a message in displays in the Event viewer. Open the Control
Panel > Administrative Tools > Event Viewer and search for systemlog and find
the type.

 If the Type is “information” then w32time is executed successfully.

 If the Type is “warning” then w32time is not successfully executed.

2063534-001 Rev 2 293

Appendix C Extends Installation

This appendix includes:

Section 1: AW Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Section 2: AW Server Client Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Section 3: Extends IDX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Section 4: Extends Cerner Radnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Section 5: Extends OrthoView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Section 6: Extends PowerScribe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Section 7: Extend Talk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Section 8: Extends IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Section 9: General Extends Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Note: Any time the Centricity Workstation application is removed or re-installed, the
appropriate modules of Centricity Extend must be selected for re-installation.

Note: For multiple Extend products, the software should be installed, uninstalled, configured
and verified at the same time. For detailed instructions relating to the Extend products,
refer to their specific manual as needed.

The purpose of this appendix is to guide you through the installation and initial
configuration of the Extends products selected during the Workstation installation process.
For more information on the selected Extends, refer to the individual Extends manual.

Section 1: AW Suite

1-1: Installing the Extend AW Suite Application

Note: For multiple Extends, the software should be installed, uninstalled, configured, and
verified at the same time. For detailed instructions relating to the other Extends
products, refer to their specific manual as needed.

1-1-1: Loading the Extend AW Suite Software

If you selected the AW Suite box on the Workstation Installation menu, the following
prompts display after the Workstation software installation has completed.

From the AW Suite Installation Screen:

1. Enter the IP address associated with the DAS that will accept Centricity AW Suite
images.

2. Enter the AE Title information associated with the DAS that will accept Centricity AW
Suite images.

 DAS format can be anything but will commonly be either DxxxAWSuite, like the
DAS, or GEPACS. Verify the DAS AE Title through the DAS Command Center.

2063534-001 Rev 2 294

Appendix C Extends Installation

3. Enter the Port Number of the DAS (default 4100).

1-2: Installing the Volume Viewer Plus Application

This section gives instructions for installing the Volume Viewer Plus application. Prior to
installation, you must know if you will be installing a local (seat) or concurrent (floating)
license. See License Information for an explanation of these different licenses. To
complete the Volume Viewer Plus installation a license key must be supplied. Obtaining
the license key is explained in Generating Licenses.

Note: Quit all applications before installing the software. If multiple Workstations are going to
be loaded, the best methodology may be to preform the remote install. For
instructions, see “Installing AW Suite Software Remotely” on page 295.

1-2-1: Loading Volume Viewer Plus Software

To load volume viewer plus software:

1. Insert the Centricity AW Suite Application CD into the Workstation CD-ROM drive.

2. Double-click on setup.exe.

The Centricity AW Suite (Volume Viewer Plus) Installation Wizard opens and will lead
you through the rest of the setup. The more obvious steps are not listed below,
however further information may be needed on some steps which is noted below.

3. Select Typical for the setup type.

4. Choose the appropriate license configuration:

 Add local license.

 Concurrent floating license. For more information on licenses, see License

Information.

5. Click [Next] and enter the information when prompted.

 If adding a local license, the license key is needed.

 If adding a floating license, the IP address of the ISU is needed.

6. Select the desired language to display the GUI and operator manuals.

7. Click Finish to exit and reboot the computer.

1-3: Installing AW Suite Software Remotely

To install AW suite software remotely, see the AW Suite Service Manual.

2063534-001 Rev 2 295

Appendix C Extends Installation

1-4: Installing the License Server

When concurrent (floating) licenses have been purchased a License Server must be
installed on the ISU, on which the concurrent license will be installed. Skip this section if
concurrent (floating) licenses are not being installed. In addition to the installation of the
concurrent license, you will need to install the CoLA license for the License Server itself.
The steps below describe how to install the License Server, the license for that Server, as
well as the installation of the concurrent license.

1. Insert the Centricity AW Suite Application CD into the ISU’s CD-ROM drive.

2. Log on as the root user by entering:

# su ‐ root

3. Start a log file by entering:

# script /installAWLicenseServer.log

4. Navigate to the following directory of the CD-ROM by entering:

# cd /cdrom/cdrom0

5. Run the install script to install the License Server by entering:

# ./inst_lic.ksh

6. Install the license for the License Server by entering:

# /local/aw_license/addLicense CoLA_License_Server <license key ID>

Note: For the copy in brackets, do not enter the brackets in the command line, only
insert the required information described.

7. Navigate to the root directory by entering:

# cd /

8. Press Ctrl - D to stop the script mode, this ends the log.

9. Eject the CD by entering:

# volcheck

# eject

10. Start the License Server by entering:

# /local/aw_license/startServer

11. Install the concurrent (floating) license by entering:

# /local/aw_license/addLicense Volume_Viewer <license key ID>

Note: For the copy in brackets, do not enter the brackets in the command line, only
insert the required information described.

2063534-001 Rev 2 296

Appendix C Extends Installation

Note: A message will appear on the screen indicating the number of systems that will be
able to use the concurrent (floating) license. Confirm that this is the same as what
you generated.

1-5: Installing License Servers on Multiple IMSs

If the site has multiple IMS database servers, a clone of the license server and licenses
will need to be built for the additional servers. Contact ROC/Modality Lead (license
administrator) to generate licenses for the additional server(s) and necessary concurrent
(floating) licenses.

Communicating and sharing licenses between multiple servers is not a supported

configuration, therefore you need to follow the steps below to disable the License Server
from starting automatically on the additional IMSs.

1. Install the License Server on the secondary IMS per the steps in Installing the License
Server.

2. Stop the server from automatically starting by entering:

./local/aw_license/stopServer

3. Stop the server from auto starting on reboot by entering:

mv /local/aw_license/startServer /local/aw_license/xstartServer

1-6: Changing Optional Configurations

All configuration values are stored in the extend.properties file located under
\platinum\support directory. Before attempting to change any of these configurations verify
that the Volume Viewer Plus and Centricity applications are not running. Refer to the AW
Suite Service Manual for details.

1-7: Running Functional Tests

Note: Any test that involves modifying an exam or series in a production system should be
done only on test exams.

1-7-1: Functional Tests

Following is a list of test cases for determining if the integration was successfully installed
and configured. Perform these test after the installation of the Extend and Volume Viewer
Plus applications.

Displaying Images in Volume Viewer Plus

Ensure that images can be displayed for the Volume Viewer Plus installation before
displaying the images. To display images in Volume Viewer Plus:

2063534-001 Rev 2 297

Appendix C Extends Installation

1. On the Centricity Workstation, click Work Modes.

2. Double click on a PT, CT, XA, or MR series that has more than five equally spaced
slices.

3. Select AW > Volume Viewer.

4. Select a protocol category.

The protocol category selection may or may not display depending on the images
being loaded.

5. Select a protocol.

6. Verify that the images look reasonable on the color monitor.

Saving Images from Volume Viewer Plus to PACS

Ensure that an image can be saved from Volume Viewer Plus before saving the image. To
save images on PACS from Volume Viewer Plus:

1. On the Centricity Workstation, click Work Modes.

2. Select a PT, CT, XA, or MR series that has more than five equally spaced slices.

3. Note the number of images in the exam.

4. Double click on the exam name.

5. Select AW > Volume Viewer.

6. Place unique annotation on an image:

a. Click on the Display Tools menu.

b. Click the A menu item.

c. Click on the image to display the annotation.

d. In the Annotation Text Entry box enter some unique text such as your name and
time.

7. Right-click and hold the cursor on the image and select Save Image.

8. Enter a series name.

9. Choose Yes in the image confirmation dialog box.

10. Wait 10 seconds to verify that no error messages occur.

Either nothing will display or an error message associated with the status of the DAS
will display. If an error displays refer to the sections on the configuration of the DAS
located in Configuring PACS DICOM Gateways of the AW Suite Installation Manual.

2063534-001 Rev 2 298

Appendix C Extends Installation

11. Close the Volume Viewer Plus application and return to the Centricity Workstation
application.

12. Close the exam and refresh the worklist.

13. Verify the new series name is displayed and that the number of images for the test
exam has increased by one.

14. Re-load the images and verify the existence of the image you annotated in the Volume
Viewer Plus application.

1-8: Running Configuration Tests

Perform the following tests on a single machine for either or both of the optional
configurations (Changing Optional Configurations) installed. Test cases are listed by
configuration.

1-8-1: Testing Image Subset Selection

To test image subset selection:

1. On the Centricity Workstation click Work Modes.

2. Select a CT exam with 200 - 300 images.

3. In the Centricity Viewer, select 50 continuous images.

Click on the first image, shift click on the last image to select all images in between.

4. Note the image numbers being selected.

5. Select AW > Reformat.

6. Scroll to the first and last image, noting the image numbers of each.

The displayed images will equal 50 and will contain the same image numbers of those
selected in Centricity Viewer.

1-8-2: Testing Unverify Exam State with DAS

To test unverify exam state with DAS:

1. On the Centricity Workstation click Work Modes.

2. Display a CT, MR, or PT exam.

Note: This exam should be in the post verified state and the user should have privileges
to unverify the exam.

3. Select AW > Reformat.

4. Perform a screen capture.

2063534-001 Rev 2 299

Appendix C Extends Installation

5. Return to Centricity Worklist.

6. Close the exam.

7. Re-open the exam.

8. Verify that image count has increased and the exam is now in the "Arrived" state.

For more information refer to Centricity AW Suite - Extend Service Manual.

Section 2: AW Server Client Installation

Prerequisites: To install the AW Server client application on the workstation, you

need:

 Administrative permissions on the workstation

 The IP address of the AW Server

To install the AWS client on a workstation:

1. Open a browser window on the workstation.

2. Enter the AW Server’s IP address in the address bar of the browser.

Result: The AW Server main page displays.

3. Select the site’s language from the drop-down list.

4. In the Download section of the page, click the Download button for the Windows
Client.

Result: A window opens and asks what you want to do with the file.

5. Save the file to the workstation desktop.

6. Once the download is complete, double-click the msi installer icon to run the installer.

Result: The installer Welcome message displays.

7. Click Next.

Result: The Select Installation Folder page displays.

8. Select the folder where you want the ASW client to be installed. The default folder is
C:\Program Files\GE\AWS_2.0\.

9. Click Next.

Result: The Ready to Install page displays.

10. Click Install.

Result: The Installing AWS_2.0-4.0 page displays the software installation status.

2063534-001 Rev 2 300

Appendix C Extends Installation

11. Click Finish.

Result: The AWS client software install is complete. When you start the workstation, the
AWS splash screen will display.

Next: Refer to the AW Distributed Applications - Enterprise Server Installation Manual for
information on AWS client installation and testing.

2-1: Troubleshooting AWS Client Installation

2-1-1: Invalid Certificate window

The first time the RA1000 workstation opens, an Invalid Certificate window displays. This
is because the system uses a self-signed certificate that is generated at installation time. If
the site’s IT policy requires a trusted third-party certificate, one can be installed on the AW
Server Apache web server. Purchase of a trusted third party certificate is the responsibility
of the customer and should be driven by the site IT Admin, or designate.

If requested by the customer, this is the general process to install a third party certificate.

 Copy the certificate to a portable memory device such as a flash drive.

 Plug the drive into one of the USB ports on the server.

 The device should auto-mount under /media/usbstick. You can check that with the
command:

ls ‐al /media/usbstick

 Certificate file(s) should list (if not detach and re-attach the USB stick).

 Refer to the instructions from the certificate provider, or reference the link below for
further details.

Note: This process will re-start the apache web services and will disrupt any connected
clients.

Additional information regarding this process can be accessed at the following link:

http://www.csctrustedsecure.com/support/certificate/cert_mod_ssl.shtml

2-1-2: Display Error message

If a Display Error window opens with the message “Local display could not be initialized”:

 Verify that the monitor’s color depth is at least 24 bits: On the Windows desktop, right-
click and select Properties. When the Display Properties window opens, go to the
Settings tab and verify the Color quality is sufficient.

2063534-001 Rev 2 301

Appendix C Extends Installation

Section 3: Extends IDX

From the IDX installation screen:

1. Enter the IDX URL and click Next to continue.

2. Enter the IDX Database Source Name (DSN) and click Next to continue.

3-1: Installing IDX Integration Vendor Software

The IDX field engineer is responsible for installing and configuring their server.

The server installation procedure does not install the client application. The IDX field
engineer is responsible for installing and registering the client application. The
IDXGEPathSpeedInterface.exe file installs the IDX client application separately.

3-2: IDX Software Version

Refer to the extendversionmetrics.txt on the Workstation media for the latest version.

3-3: HIPAA Password Considerations

Special characters required for compliancy may be used in Extend (third-party software)
passwords. If Extend software is being installed on a Centricity RA1000 workstation, then
passwords may contain these special characters.

Example: The following characters are considered “special” and may be used in
passwords: ! @ # $ % ^ & *.

3-4: Password Synchronization

All PACS and third-party application user names and passwords must be manually
synchronized. It is recommended you use upper case text on the PACS and third-party
server.

Silent remote login to the third-party application is not possible if the Centricity Workstation
user name and password are different than the same user’s name and password on the
third-party application server. If the user name and password are not synchronized, the
third-party application will function on the Centricity Workstation, but the user will need to
manually log on. All other integrated features will work as long as the user name and
password are synchronized between Centricity and the third-party application.

For more information, refer to Centricity Extends IDX Service Manual.

2063534-001 Rev 2 302

Appendix C Extends Installation

Section 4: Extends Cerner Radnet

The Extends Cerner Radnet is an auto-installation. You are not prompted for any
information.

For more information, refer to Centricity Extend RadNet Service Manual.

Section 5: Extends OrthoView

5-1: Installing Extend OrthoView

The Extends OrthoView is an auto-installation. You are not prompted for any information.

For more information, refer to Centricity Extend OrthoView Service Manual.

5-2: Installing OrthoView Application

To install OrthoView Application:

1. Insert the OrthoView application CD.

2. Click I Agree to accept the licence agreement.

3. Review the displayed installation instructions and click Next to continue.

4. Leave the default registration directory path, click Continue > Next.

Result: You receive confirmation when the installation is successfully completed.

5. Click Finish to complete the installation.

5-3: Registering OrthoView

All versions of OrthoView, other than the Demonstration version, require the user to enter
their name and registration code on first use.

To register OrthoView:

1. Start the OrthoView application by clicking: Start > Programs > OrthoView >
OrthoView.

2. On the Registration Details dialog box, enter the Registration Name and Registration
Number, as supplied by MTL via the Host Application vendor.

3. Click OK to continue and to start the OrthoView application.

2063534-001 Rev 2 303

Appendix C Extends Installation

The registration code constitutes proof of ownership and identity and will be required
by MTL support. In addition, e-Templates will only be supplied to users who correctly
quote their registration code.

5-4: E-Templates

For information on E-templates, refer to Centricity Extend OrthoView Service Manual.

Section 6: Extends PowerScribe

For Extends PowerScribe V3.0, you are not prompted for any information.

For Extends PowerScribe V4.6 or later, you are prompted for the IP address of the
PowerScribe server.

Note: Extend PowerScribe requires that if the autologoff functionality on the

PowerScribe side is enabled, the timeout interval for PowerScribe must be set to
a greater value than the timeout interval used for Centricity.

For more information, refer to Centricity Extend PowerScribe Service Manual.

Section 7: Extend Talk

Note: All installation work to be performed by Administrator account.

From the Talk installation screen:

1. You are prompted to select if you are running a dual machine.

If you select yes:

 You are prompted for the IP address of the Talk client machine.

2. You are then prompted for the IP address of the Talk server.

7-1: Talk Technology Integration Vendor Software Installation

Refer to the extendversionmetrics.txt on the Workstation media for the latest version.

7-2: HIPAA Password Considerations

Special characters required for compliancy may be used in Extend (third-party software)
passwords. If Extend software is being installed on a Centricity RA1000 workstation, then
passwords may contain these special characters.

2063534-001 Rev 2 304

Appendix C Extends Installation

Example: The following characters are considered “special” and may be used in
passwords: ! @ # $ % ^ & *.

Synchronizing Password

It is required to manually sync all PACS and third-party application users/passwords. User
names that are different also need to be synchronized. Site preferences dictates which
user name to keep as is. It is recommended to maintain the UPPER CASE convention on
the PACS and therefore adopt that same style on the third-party server. This is not
required, however. Either way requires additional efforts to complete the new user
configuration and setup on both the PACS and third-party server.

User Name and Password Synchronization Consequences

The silent remote log on to the third-party application will not be possible if the GE
Centricity Talk Workstation user name and password are different than the same user’s
name and password on the third-party application server. However, if the user name and
password are not synchronized, the third-party application still functions on the Centricity
Workstation, but the user must manually log on. All other integrated features remain the
same.

Creating IIS User on TalkStation Server

This user creation step requires assistance of Hospital Information System (HIS)/
Radiology Information System (RIS) or Talk Technology personnel.

 Create an Win2K IIS log on the TalkStation server, this is required to allow Centricity
Workstation Win2K IIS user connectivity with the TalkStation server.

Creating TALKTECH User on TalkStation Server

This user creation step requires assistance of HIS/RIS or Talk Technology personnel.

Create an applications user TALKTECH that will be useful in testing the integration.
Therefore, it is required to create this same user/password on PACS.

Creating LMHOSTS file

Depending on site network requirements, adding the TalkStation server host and IP
address to the LMHOSTS file may be required to maintain network connectivity between
the Centricity Workstation and the TalkStation server.

To create LMHOSTS file:

1. Copy the default sample file, LMHOSTS.SAM to LMHOSTS in the

c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory.

2. Delete all comments and insert only the following line, with site particulars substituted:

192.168.3.250<Tab>talkserver<Tab>#PRE<Space>#DOM:chhc

2063534-001 Rev 2 305

Appendix C Extends Installation

Read the comments in the LMHOSTS.SAM sample file for more details.

 192.168.3.250=TalkStation server IP address

 talkserver=TalkStation server name (our example name)

 #PRE=Name Cache Preload

 #DOM=Domain

 chhc=Network domain/group to which TalkStation server belongs

Installing Microsoft Explorer 4.0 SP2 or Later

Explorer 4.0 SP2 or later is required to support the TalkStation installation. It can be found
on the TalkStation server. Please consult with Talk Technology personnel for any help
required including directory information where the installation files are located. It should be
available to install from the server.

To install Microsoft Explorer 4.0 SP2 or later version:

1. Navigate to the proper directory on the server and double-click the setup.exe install file.

2. Do not install the desktop icon.

Installing the TalkStation Application

The TalkStation 2.1 application should also be installed from the TalkStation server. Please
consult with Talk Technology personnel for any help required including directory
information where the installation files are located. It should be available to install from the
server. For example, at CHH, the server is \\MEDSPEAK, the directory to locate the
installation files is X:\TS 2.1 Install\.

To install the TalkStation Application:

1. From the TalkStation installation screen respond to the following prompts:

a. Setup Type=Client.

b. MS Access Database.

c. Install Dragon Naturally Speaking - Click Yes.

d. Do not select Dragon: Best Match Acoustic - Click No.

e. Select Send Reports to RIS.

f. Click Yes to select Dragon Default Speech.

2. Select Restart and then click Finish.

3. Turn off the Internet Explorer Welcome screen after Win2K restarts.

2063534-001 Rev 2 306

Appendix C Extends Installation

4. Install the latest patch. Double-click on the patch installation executable file.The file
may be named TSRP2022.exe for example.

Test Philips SpeechMike

The mouse and buttons can be tested from in Windows, Mouse Control Panel.

Refer to product documentation for further information.

7-2-1: Configuring Desktop Fonts For Talk Technology TalkStation User Interface

The installation will have automatically updated the iis user permissions to allow for
Display Properties changes.

Windows XP

To configure desktop fonts in Windows XP:

1. Right-click the mouse with the pointer centered on the main screen. Be sure there are
no icons beneath the main screen.

2. Select Properties from the pull down menu.

3. Select the Appearance tab from the Display Properties window.

4. Click Advanced.

5. Click Active Window which designates "Active Title Bar" in the Item drop down list.

6. Select MS Sans Serif font size 14.

7. Repeat this process for the "Message Box" dialog pop-up windows. Click on Item pull
down list to find "Message Box".

8. Click OK.

Talk Technology

To configure fonts for the TalkStation user interface:

From the TalkStation/Radiology Dictation Window:

1. Select Edit > User Preferences > Dictation Tab.

2. Verify the Resize font based on desktop settings check box is checked.

7-2-2: Creating geservice User on TalkStation Server

This user creation step requires assistance of HIS/RIS or Talk Technology personnel.

2063534-001 Rev 2 307

Appendix C Extends Installation

Create an Win2K login geservice on the TalkStation server, which is required to allow
Centricity Workstation Win2K user geservice connectivity with the TalkStation server. This
is necessary to allow for TalkStation "stand-alone" operation.

a. Run TalkStation application in "stand-alone" mode on the Centricity Workstation

without the integration to the Centricity Workstation application. (Double-click the
TS_Radiology icon on the geservice desktop, or alternatively, from the start
menu.)

b. Verify proper operation in "stand-alone" mode prior to running the integrated mode
with the Centricity Workstation application.

7-2-3: “C” Workstation Configuration

To prevent color distortion on “C” monitor workstations, execute the following steps:

Note: Please disregard the Centricity Workstation service manual settings for Centricity Talk
installations.

1. Launch MATROX MGA Display Properties.

2. Select the Monitor icon on the Task Bar (next to the Clock icon).

3. Select Monitor Display Properties from the pop-up menu. Adjust the settings as
indicated below.

a. Color Palette: True Color (32 bit)

b. Refresh Frequency: 75Hz

For more information refer to Centricity Extend Talk Service Manual.

Section 8: Extends IDR

8-1: Overview

Centricity PACS supports Integrated Desktop Reporting (IDR) for integrating the RA1000
Workstation with supported dictation systems, such as Precision Reporting.

The IDR enhanced API provides an improved integrated reporting workflow between
RA1000 Workstation exams and supported dictation systems. IDR allows users to launch
exams from the RA1000 Workstation that are synchronized with a report that is generated
from a supported dictation system.

Note: Centricity PACS supports the integration of Precision Reporting with the Workstation.
This PACS release does not include the installation and configuration of Precision
Reporting.

If you plan to integrate Precision Reporting with the Workstation, keep in mind that
Precision Reporting must be installed and configured at your site before you can

2063534-001 Rev 2 308

Appendix C Extends Installation

integrate it with the Workstation. This process involves considerable setup time.
Contact your GE Service Representative for more information.

8-2: Completing the IDR Installation

During the installation of the IDR software, the Integrated Desktop Reporting Installation
dialog box prompts you for the dictation system URL.

Illustration C-1:IDR Installation Prompt for Dictation System

1. Do one of the following:

 If Precision Reporting is your dictation system, and it is already installed and

configured at your site, then proceed to step 2.

 If PowerScribe is your dictation system, then proceed to step 3.

2. Complete the Precision Reporting installation:

a. In the URL text box, enter the complete path for the Precision Reporting software:

C:\\platinum\\GE.Centricity.Reporting\\GE.Centricity.Reporting.exe:
//<RIS‐IC Web Server>/Imagecast/Integration/ModuleLaunch/
LaunchEnter.asp?DSN=<RIS‐IC Data Source
Name>&Mode=IDXrad&ReportingTool=Y /logging:true

where:

 <RIS‐IC Web Server> is the URL to your Precision Reporting server that is
running the RIS-IC application.

2063534-001 Rev 2 309

Appendix C Extends Installation

 <RIS‐IC Data Source Name> is the name of the RIS database, or RISDB.

Example: C:\\platinum\\GE.Centricity.Reporting\\GE.Centricity.Reporting.exe ://

bvtsaqaint.eng.med.ge.com/imagecast/Integration/ModuleLaunch/
LaunchEnter.asp?DSN=RISDB&Mode=IDXrad&ReportingTool=Y /logging:true

b. Proceed to step 4.

3. Complete the PowerScribe installation.

a. Contact the PowerScribe vendor Nuance and request the PACSbridge software.

b. Install the PACSbridge software on the Workstation.

c. After the installation is complete, locate the file PACSbridge.exe and copy the path
for the file. You will enter this path as the dictation system URL for the IDR
installation.

d. Return to the Integrated Desktop Reporting Installation dialog box and enter the
path for the PACSbridge.exe file from step c into the URL text box. Use double
slash marks when entering the path.

Example: C:\\Program Files\\Dictaphone\\PACSBridge\\PACSbridge.exe

4. Click Next.

The installation prompts you to confirm if the workstation currently being installed will
be used with Centricity Precision Reporting.

5. If the site is currently running Precision Reporting, click Yes. If the site is not running
Precision Reporting, click No.

The IDR software installation is complete.

Note: For information on configuring the IDR report integration settings, see the “Utilities
Palette” chapter in the Centricity PACS RA1000 Workstation and Exam Manager
Operator Manual.

Section 9: General Extends Interface

This section describes the installation and configuration of the Centricity General Extends
Interface software.

Note: Centricity PACS Workstation and any other Extends packages must be installed
before installing the General Extends Interface.

Note: The procedures in this appendix must be followed in the order presented.

9-1: Requirements

You need the following before beginning the installation:

2063534-001 Rev 2 310

Appendix C Extends Installation

 Centricity General Extends Interface 1.0 software, located on the Centricity

Workstation Application CD—00:15 hours per WS

 Sanity / Testing—00:15 hours per WS

 The OS of the workstation must be Windows SP SP2 or later

Note: The Centricity PACS 2.1 or higher version using InstallShield setup is supported.

Note: The Centricity General Extends Interface Setup supports multiple Extends on the
same workstation (also known as "Double Extend" capability). Already installed
Extends is recognized and General Extends Interface appends itself.

Centricity PACS and any third-party vendor software must be installed and fully
operational before the installation of Centricity General Extends Interface. Refer to
“Multiple Extends” on page 311.

9-2: Pre-installation

9-2-1: Unbound Installation

The Centricity General Extends Interface setup is an "unbound" installation. This means
that it does not install third-party specific adaptations and is to be used "as-is".

9-2-2: Multiple Extends

If there are additional extends on your workstations, the General Extends Interface must
be installed last. No other extends can be installed after General Extends.

The General Extends Interface setup appends to already installed Extends packages. If
other Extends are installed after that, General Extends Interface will not be recognized.

9-3: Installation

To setup the General Extends Interface for Centricity PACS workstations:

1. Log on to the workstation using a local Administrator account.

2. Verify that the workstation application is fully operational.

3. Install the third-party vendor software and verify that it is also working properly.

4. Quit any running applications; workstation and the third-party product.

5. Execute the GeneralExtendInterface.bat from the General Extends Interface folder on

the installation CD.

Note: The OS of the workstation must be Windows XP SP2 or later.

2063534-001 Rev 2 311

Appendix C Extends Installation

Note: If using Windows 7, ensure that the User Account Control Settings have been
changed. Refer to “Changing the User Account Control Settings (Windows 7)” on
page 52

The installation begins in silent mode and completes in a few minutes.

6. From the GenralExtendInterface folder of the workstation media, run the following
script:

Replace_extend_jar.bat

Note: Running the above bat file automatically removes an incorrect jar file and
renames the correct extend.jar.[install date time] file back to extend.jar

7. If the site is using RA1000 and General Extends with other extends, go to step 9.

If the site is using RA1000 and General Extends with no other extends (i.e., no other
extends were installed when the workstation was installed), then do the following
substeps:

a. Open the c:\platinum\support\Extend_Common.properties file.

b. Copy the second comment / property block from the top (including the comments
and properties for the refreshFrequency, waitCycles and initialWaitTime
properties), for a total of 12 lines (lines 9 through 20).

c. Close the c:\platinum\support\Extend_Common.properties without saving it.

d. Open c:\platinum\support\Extend.properties and paste the 12 lines just copied to

just below the fifth line of the file, to just after the line:

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.numberOfThirdPartyApplications=1

e. Save and close the c:\platinum\support\Extend.properties file.

8. For LSP sites only:

Run the following script from the GeneralExtendInterface\LSP folder on the

Workstation Application CD:

UpdateGenExtendsForLSP.bat

9. For sites using General Extends with the workstation, it is recommended that to
ensure the exam close event completes, that the following exam close options be
deselected in the Utilities palette in the Workstation:

Prompt to Save Image Before Closing

Prompt user if all series have not been displayed before closing exam:

These prompts should be unchecked / deselected for display for sites using
General Extends with the Workstation, so the user cannot cancel a close event after it
has already begun to have been processed.

2063534-001 Rev 2 312

Appendix C Extends Installation

If these prompts are checked / selected for display for sites using General Extends
with the Workstation, the user would be able to cancel a close event after it has
already begun to have been processed, which is not desired behavior.

10. Verify that the integration was successful and execute General Extends Interface for
verification purposes.

9-4: Maintenance

9-4-1: Removing General Extends Interface

When the InstallShield setup is launched a second time (from CD or through "Add/
Remove Software" in control panel) it removes the General Extends Interface software.

9-4-2: Updating General Extends Interface

An update of General Extends Interface requires uninstalling the old version first.
Afterwards the new version can be installed using the Centricity General Extends Interface
setup.

9-5: Troubleshooting

9-5-1: EITestClient.exe

The installation of General Extends Interface places the PS/Centricity API test tool into the
%PLAT_HOME%". folder. This tool simulates a third-party application and can be used to
test the Extend COM API of Centricity General Extends Interface as follows:

1. Launch Centricity PACS and log on.

2. Launch %PLAT_HOME%\EITestClient.exe and click COM Connect.

The tool attempts to connect to PACS and displays a status message of success or
failure.

3. Click any of the buttons and provide the appropriate parameters where applicable.

Note: Each button corresponds to an interface function.

4. Centricity PACS executes the corresponding operation. The return value of the
operation displays in the status bar of the tool. Each function call is written in
%PLAT_HOME%\service\logs\platinum.log. View this log by clicking View
platinum.log.

5. When closing the tool or clicking COM Disconnect the connection to PACS is released.

2063534-001 Rev 2 313

Appendix C Extends Installation

9-5-2: isExtendPresent

The General Extends Interface setup sets the

property:com.ge.med.platinum.extend.isExtendPresent to true in
%PLAT_HOME%\support\platinum_custom.properties. This instructs Centricity to load the
Extend(s) at startup.

The Centricity PACS application is very strict in checking the Extend properties
(%PLAT_HOME%\support\Extend.properties and
%PLAT_HOME%\support\Extend_string_<PT_LANG>.properties) at startup. This can
result in the inability to launch the Centricity PACS application when errors or
inconsistencies are found in the Extend properties. Typically, this causes Centricity PACS
to hang at startup. Javaw.exe is still running.

To see if an issue is related to Extends, temporarily set

com.ge.med.platinum.extend.isExtendPresent to false.

9-5-3: Centricity Application Updates

Any update of the Centricity workstation application software will not only remove
Centricity, but also parts of the Extends without further notice. This means that the
Extends must be installed again after an update of the Centricity application.

9-5-4: Multiple Extends

The Installation of General Extends Interface appends itself to the already installed
Extends on the workstation and will run smoothly besides the other Extends. Refer to
“Multiple Extends” on page 311.

However, if one of the installed Extends or workstation is being removed, it is

recommended to uninstall all Extends because they share common properties files that
are likely to get corrupted by the removal through Extends setups. Afterwards only the
Extends that need to stay on the workstation have to be installed again.

9-5-5: "Unknown Error" Occurred During Setup Installation

All files copied into the target destination or modified during setup routine have been
saved at the beginning of the installation process. You will find them in the same directory
with the extension "_Save" or "_INSTALLDATE_TIME", so you are able to restore the files
to the point before the setup ran.

2063534-001 Rev 2 314

Appendix D Configuring a Performance Monitoring Workstation

This appendix includes:

Section 1: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Section 2: Using Performance Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Section 3: Performance Monitoring Solution for LSP Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Section 1: Overview

The Performance Monitoring Solution (PMS) monitors the performance of Workstations. It

is installed on one Workstation in a cluster and collects data while running against the
Information Management System (IMS). The Workstation that collects the data is called
the Performance Monitoring Workstation.

For data security, the Performance Monitoring Workstation is located with the local PACS
servers.

The site can use the data collected by the Performance Monitoring Workstation to
compare the performance and reliability between software builds. It also helps for studying
and surveying the Workstation's behavior at customer sites.

The PMS defines a method that the Workstation will carry out actions and log the results
for analysis. The utility captures the time taken for any transaction that will happen on a
Workstation and reports the information in a log file. The following actions are monitored:

 Worklist-related operations

 Select Exam

 Refresh worklist

 Filter worklist

 Sort worklist

 Switch exams from opened exam hotzone

 Add more rows to the worklist

 Open exam

 Exam-related operations

 Cine (auto and manual cine)

 Show Image (show previous/next image, show previous/next page)

 Load next series

 Load previous series

2063534-001 Rev 2 315

Appendix D Configuring a Performance Monitoring Workstation

 Load next comparison exam

 Load previous comparison exam

The Performance Monitoring Workstation continuously monitors the performance of a

Workstation that can be collected. The performance is monitored for different transactions,
such as retrieving records for a query, displaying images, and so on. Each transaction is
recorded to provide different types of data.

Section 2: Using Performance Monitoring

To ensure patient data security, run Performance Monitoring tests on test data that is
located in a special manual folder and created for this purpose. The Performance
Monitoring user should belong to a pre-defined user group called "Performance," which
does not have access to worklists (i.e., All Exams). The user group should be given
"Open" and "Display" privileges to the folder containing the test data to ensure that no one
can access real patient data while logged in as this user.

The Performance Monitoring Solution program is installed in the plat_home folder on the
Workstation. The script file specifies actions to be performed on the Workstation, such as:

 Log on information

 Listing of all open exams

 Opening exams

 Opening images

 Logging out of Workstation

It also contains a Document Type Definition (DTD) automation.dtd file. This file provides
the structure/rules to prepare the input xml file. The xml file contains all the actions to be
performed on the Workstation, and also holds information about the structure of the XML
file.

A master file (master.txt) is used to run the script in plat_home directory. The sample
contents of the master file are as follows:

xyz:a.xml:

Where: xyz is the name of the output in xml format, which contains the report, and a.xml is
the file that contains the actions defined. These actions specified in the .xml file (a.xml) are
run on the Workstation.

To run the master file and start monitoring:

1. On the machine that is specifically set up as the Performance Monitoring, launch the
Workstation application.

2. Open the master file:

2063534-001 Rev 2 316

Appendix D Configuring a Performance Monitoring Workstation

%PLAT_HOME%>centricity -BM:<filename.txt>

Example: c:\platinum>centricity -BM:master.txt

Where BM refers to the Benchmarking mode.

The output of the script is stored in the plat_home/Service/logs directory with the name
specified in the master file with pref_xyz.month.day.year.time.xml and
xyz.month.day.year.time.xml.

Example: Perf_xyz.07.04.2010.11.18.xml

Example: xyz.07.04.2010.11.20.xml

The Perf_xyz.month.day.year.time.xml file contains the steps that have been performed
along with the time taken for each interaction, such as:

 Version

 Start time

 Host name

 Windows setting

The xyz.month.day.year.time.xml contains the memory utilization by each interaction.

Section 3: Performance Monitoring Solution for LSP Sites

3-1: System Configuration

The Performance Monitoring Solution consists of a pre-defined user group called

"Performance" to which the Performance Monitoring user belongs. By default, this user
group has no privileges. The FE on site must add the appropriate privileges. At a
minimum, to enable the Performance Monitoring user to display images, the user group
Performance needs the "Display" privilege.

The FE must create a manual folder in the CAT tool, which holds the Performance
Monitoring test data. This data must consist of test patients that have been registered with
SPINE and have valid NHS Patient IDs. The data contains studies from the Local trust and
Foreign trusts. For studies from Foreign trusts, the patient consent has to be configured to
be permitted to sharing data across trusts.

The FE must grant the "Open" and "Display" privileges to the test folder should be granted
to the Performance user group in the CAT tool.

3-2: Performance Monitoring User Login

You can configure the Performance Monitoring Software (PMS) in several ways
depending upon whether or not the user is a test user.

2063534-001 Rev 2 317

Appendix D Configuring a Performance Monitoring Workstation

PMS tests can only be run using test users. When running the test, then you have the
default option (for access check statuses to be ignored) or the optional configuration. The
Credentials XML element all applies to the test user.

To configure the Performance Monitoring Solution software for user login:

1. Open the .xml script files defined in the Master file. These files contain the actions to
be performed by the Workstation in an automated fashion.

2. The Credentials XML element of the files needs to be modified to contain the following
child XML elements:

<UserName>Formal Name</UserName>

<User>User ID</User>

<UserRole>Job Role</UserRole>

<UrpId>URP ID</UrpId>

 Formal Name—The user’s name. Usually this is the last name and first name.

 User ID—The unique string registering the user in IMS.

 Job Role—The full name of the NHS Job Role assigned to the user. The Job Role
has to be selected such that SPINE LRS establishes a legitimate relationship
between this user and the patient data.

 URP ID—The User Role Profile ID on the Spine.

If the User ID corresponds to a test user on the Spine, you have two options:

 In the default configuration, the system will perform all exam access checks
(Legitimate Relationship and Patient Consent), however, it will permit access
regardless of the status returned by the Spine.

 In the optional configuration, the system honors the access restrictions imposed
by the Spine. To set up the PMS in this test configuration, do the following:

i. Add the following lines to the Platinum_custom.properties file:

com.ge.med.platinum.dataaccess.spine.SpineDataAccessController.statu
sIn BenchmarkingMode.0=

com.ge.med.platinum.dataaccess.spine.SpineDataAccessController.statu
sIn BenchmarkingMode.1=

These lines define two new empty properties. For more information on the
Platinum_custiom.properties file, see “Tools Editor” on page 263.

ii. Set up the Legitimate Relationship and Patient Consent values in the patient
test data on the spine and set up these values for the test User ID on the
Spine.

The User ID and URP ID for the PMS must match the corresponding values on
the Spine for the test user.

2063534-001 Rev 2 318

Appendix D Configuring a Performance Monitoring Workstation

3. The Workstation can now be run as it is described in Section 2: Using Performance

Monitoring.

3-3: Transaction Types Logged

Transaction types are logged and taken from the moment a user requests data until the
required response is received. They are also logged the moment a user requests
information that involves transaction with a non-GE system component. The time taken for
interaction with external systems or the external network is subtracted from the time taken
from the moment a user requests for data till the required response is received.

Examples of such non-GE system components could be integration components with

SPINE, SPINE itself, and other network components.

The following transaction types are logged:

 Transaction Type A—a PACS Workstation displaying the first 20 search results of
any query of the PACS database. Display time is measured from the time the End
User completes the selection of the query (i.e., worklist selection) until the 20th result
is visible on the display device.

 Transaction Type B1—the display of the first image in any study containing up to 100
images from the following category on all diagnostic and clinical review Workstations.
The SPINE interaction time has been subtracted.

 A 16-bit CT image up to 512-KB, and

 The image resides on the Entity storage

 Any image which has been captured or viewed within the last 3 weeks;

 Any image acquired and stored at the Entity on a patient for whom activity is
scheduled for one day’s time or less (activity may be inpatient, outpatient, A&E
clinic, waiting list or A&E attendance);

 Any image acquired and stored on-line on a patient for whom unscheduled activity
has occurred which shall be retrievable within 10 minutes of a request being made
(activity may be inpatient, outpatient, A&E clinic, waiting list or A&E attendance).

 Transaction Type B2—the display of the first image in any study containing greater
than 100 images, but less than 1000 images from the following category on all
diagnostic and clinical review Workstations. The SPINE interaction time has been
subtracted.

 A Single-frame 16-bit CT image up to 512-KB, using a Standard sheet mode DDP

with 12-on-1 display, with no historicals, and no linking or cross-referencing, and
the image resides on the Entity storage.

 Any image which has been captured or viewed within the last 3 weeks;

 Any image acquired and stored at the Entity on a patient for whom activity is
scheduled for one day’s time or less (activity may be inpatient, outpatient, A&E
clinic, waiting list or A&E attendance);

2063534-001 Rev 2 319

Appendix D Configuring a Performance Monitoring Workstation

 Any image acquired and stored on-line on a patient for whom unscheduled activity
has occurred which shall be retrievable within 10 minutes of a request being made
(activity may be inpatient, outpatient, A&E clinic, waiting list or A&E attendance).

 Transaction Type C—the display of the first image in any study not listed above in
Transaction Type B containing up to 1000 images, on all diagnostic and clinical review
Workstations subjected to. The SPINE interaction time has been subtracted.

 The image resides on the Entity storage

 A 16-bit CT image up to 512-KB

 Transaction Type D—the supply of a single uncompressed CR =<10MB in size (2000

column x 2500 row) (as defined in module 115 of Schedule 1.1 (Authority’s
Requirements) such that:

 The image resides on the Entity storage of the PACS

 Transaction Type E—the SPINE LRS query time. SPINE LRS query time is the time
measured between: (1) issuing a request to the SPINE LRS service to establish a
legitimate relationship (LR) between a PACS user and a patient and; (2) receiving a
response from the SPINE LRS service. This Transaction is performed every time a
study is displayed in Transactions B1, B2, and C, if the study contains a valid NHS
Patient ID.

 Transaction Type F—the SPINE PDS query time. SPINE PDS query time is the time
measured between: (1) issuing a request to the SPINE PDS service to establish
patient consent for sharing a patient's data across LSP trusts and; (2) receiving a
response from the SPINE PDS service. This Transaction is performed every time a
study is displayed in Transactions B1, B2, and C, if the study contains a valid NHS
Patient ID and the study came from a Foreign trust.

3-4: Data Collection

The local Remote Operations Center facility (ROC) retrieves the information from each
Performance Monitoring Workstation and generates a report for the entire cluster. The
ROC transfers the report to the authority for further processing and historical data
collection.

In case of any failure in data collection, the site will be investigated to determine if the
failure was due to the software being out of specification, network delays, SPINE
communications, or advanced or complex features beyond schedule being utilized by the
site, and so on.

2063534-001 Rev 2 320

Appendix E Windows 7 Support

This appendix includes:

Section 1: Hardware and Software Requirements for Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Section 2: Overview: Converting from Windows XP to Windows 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Section 3: Windows and RA1000 Upgrade, During Servers Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Section 4: Windows Upgrade and RA1000 Workstation Upgrade, if Servers are not
PACS 4.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Section 5: Windows Upgrade and RA1000 Workstation Upgrade, if Servers are PACS 4.0
324
Section 6: Windows Upgrade for RA1000 4.0, if Servers are not PACS 4.0. . . . . . . . . 325
Section 7: Windows Upgrade, if RA1000 Workstation and Servers are PACS 4.0 . . . . 326

Section 1: Hardware and Software Requirements for Windows 7

Windows 7 support requires the following:

 Compatible graphics card to drive two high-res displays

 Compatible graphics card to drive one low-res display

 Microsoft OS Windows 7 Ultimate installation media

If a site needs to convert its existing RA1000 workstations from Windows XP to

Windows 7, they must purchase compatible video cards for workstations that do not have
them.

All other Barco software, including calibration software and BMSE (Barco Med Self Exam),
remain the same.

Section 2: Overview: Converting from Windows XP to Windows 7

The general process for converting an RA1000 workstation to Windows 7 differs based on
whether or not the RA1000 software needs to be upgraded at the same time.

This chapter covers RA1000 workstations and servers that are moving from PACS 3.2.x to
PACS 4.0. This chapter does not cover workstations that are using RA1000 versions
earlier than 3.2.0.0. For converting a pre-3.2.0.0 workstation to Windows 7, see the most
recent PACS 3.2<.x> RA1000 Workstation Installation and Service Manual.

2063534-001 Rev 2 321

Appendix E Windows 7 Support

Table E-1: Windows 7 Upgrade Scenarios

Starting Status Ending Status Information

RA1000 IMS/Servers RA1000 IMS/Servers

Version Version Version Upg? Version Upg?

3.2.x 3.2.x 4.0 Yes 4.0 Yes See Section 3: Windows and RA1000
Upgrade, During Servers Upgrade.

3.2.x 3.2.x 4.0 Yes 3.2.x No See Section 4: Windows Upgrade and
RA1000 Workstation Upgrade, if Servers are
not PACS 4.0.

3.2.x 3.2.x 3.2.x No 4.0 Yes This configuration is not supported for
PACS 4.0.

3.2.x 4.0 4.0 Yes 4.0 Not RA1000 software upgrade is necessary for
needed RA1000 compatibility with IMS and servers.
See Section 5: Windows Upgrade and
RA1000 Workstation Upgrade, if Servers are
PACS 4.0

4.0 3.2.x 4.0 Not 3.2.x No See Section 6: Windows Upgrade for RA1000
needed 4.0, if Servers are not PACS 4.0

4.0 4.0 4.0 Not 4.0 Not If the only change on the system is
needed needed Windows 7, see Section 7: Windows
Upgrade, if RA1000 Workstation and Servers
are PACS 4.0.

Section 3: Windows and RA1000 Upgrade, During Servers Upgrade

Order of upgrades:
RA1000 and Windows 7 and PACS servers (concurrent)

During the PACS servers upgrade’s downtime window, the RA1000 workstations can be
upgraded to Windows 7 and RA1000 4.0. This option does not allow workflow testing with
the RA1000 4.0 software to be done independently of the Windows 7 software. This may
complicate troubleshooting if workflow issues are discovered during post-upgrade testing.

1. Purchase new video cards and drivers, as necessary.

2. Back up platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations to

customer-provided media.

3. Rebaseline workstation operating system to Windows 7.

4. Shut down workstation hardware.

2063534-001 Rev 2 322

Appendix E Windows 7 Support

Warning: All equipment must be powered off.

System Alert: The components used in the workstation are static sensitive; observe static
precautions when performing this procedure.

5. Install new video cards according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Start workstation hardware.

7. Install video card display drivers according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Reboot workstation.

9. Install RA1000 software.

10. Restore platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations.

11. Test new RA1000 version.

12. Adjust platinum properties as needed for user workflow.

Section 4: Windows Upgrade and RA1000 Workstation Upgrade, if

Servers are not PACS 4.0

Order of upgrade:
Windows 7 and RA1000.
PACS servers (planned for future)

An overview of a conversion from Windows XP to Windows 7, if the RA1000 software is

being upgraded before a PACS 4.0 upgrade:

1. Purchase new video cards and drivers, as necessary.

2. Install new version of RA1000 software on Windows XP system.

3. Test new RA1000 version and platinum custom properties and workstation
customizations.

4. Adjust platinum properties and customizations as needed for user workflow.

5. Back up platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations to

customer-provided media.

6. Rebaseline workstation operating system to Windows 7.

7. Shut down workstation hardware.

Warning: All equipment must be powered off.

System Alert: The components used in the workstation are static sensitive; observe static
precautions when performing this procedure.

2063534-001 Rev 2 323

Appendix E Windows 7 Support

8. Install new video cards according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

9. Start workstation hardware.

10. Install video card display drivers according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

11. Reboot workstation.

12. Install new version of RA1000 software.

13. Restore platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations.

14. Test new RA1000 version and platinum custom properties and workstation
customizations.

15. Adjust platinum properties and customizations as needed for user workflow.

The workstation can then run on Windows 7 with the RA1000 4.0 version until the IMS and
server upgrade.

Section 5: Windows Upgrade and RA1000 Workstation Upgrade, if

Servers are PACS 4.0

Order of upgrades:
PACS servers (already completed)
RA1000 and Windows 7

If the IMS database and the servers are at PACS 4.0, but the RA1000 version is an earlier
version, the RA1000 workstation must be upgraded to PACS 4.0. Otherwise, the system
will be running in an non-validated configuration, and compatibility with IMS and servers is
not guaranteed.

An overview of a conversion from Windows XP to Windows 7, if the RA1000 software is

being upgraded:

1. Purchase new video cards and drivers, as necessary.

2. Install new version of RA1000 software on Windows XP system.

3. Test new RA1000 version and platinum custom properties and workstation
customizations.

4. Adjust platinum properties and customizations as needed for user workflow.

5. Back up platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations to

customer-provided media.

6. Rebaseline workstation operating system to Windows 7.

7. Shut down workstation hardware.

Warning: All equipment must be powered off.

2063534-001 Rev 2 324

Appendix E Windows 7 Support

System Alert: The components used in the workstation are static sensitive; observe static
precautions when performing this procedure.

8. Install new video cards according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

9. Start workstation hardware.

10. Install video card display drivers according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

11. Reboot workstation.

12. Install RA1000 software.

13. Restore platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations.

14. Test new RA1000 version and platinum custom properties and workstation
customizations.

15. Adjust platinum properties and customizations as needed for user workflow.

Section 6: Windows Upgrade for RA1000 4.0, if Servers are not

PACS 4.0

Order of upgrades:
RA1000 (already completed)
Windows 7
PACS servers (planned for future)

An overview of a conversion from Windows XP to Windows 7, if the RA1000 software was

previously upgraded, but the servers are not yet at PACS 4.0:

Prerequisites:

 RA1000 4.0 has been installed on the Windows XP system.

 New RA1000 version and platinum custom properties and workstation

customizations have been tested.

 Platinum properties and customizations have been adjusted as needed for user
workflow.

1. Purchase new video cards and drivers, as necessary.

2. Back up platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations to

customer-provided media.

3. Rebaseline workstation operating system to Windows 7.

4. Shut down workstation hardware.

Warning: All equipment must be powered off.

2063534-001 Rev 2 325

Appendix E Windows 7 Support

System Alert: The components used in the workstation are static sensitive; observe static
precautions when performing this procedure.

5. Install new video cards according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Start workstation hardware.

7. Install video card display drivers according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Reboot workstation.

9. Reinstall RA1000 4.0 software.

10. Restore platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations.

11. Test new RA1000 version and platinum custom properties and workstation
customizations.

12. Adjust platinum properties and customizations as needed for user workflow.

The workstation can then run on Windows 7 with the RA1000 4.0 version until the IMS and
server upgrade.

Section 7: Windows Upgrade, if RA1000 Workstation and Servers are

PACS 4.0

Order of upgrades:
RA1000 and PACS servers (already completed)
Windows 7

An overview of a conversion from Windows XP to Windows 7, if both the RA1000 and

PACS servers are already at version 4.0:

1. Purchase new video cards and drivers, as necessary.

2. Back up platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations to

customer-provided media.

3. Rebaseline workstation operating system to Windows 7.

4. Shut down workstation hardware.

Warning: All equipment must be powered off.

System Alert: The components used in the workstation are static sensitive; observe static
precautions when performing this procedure.

5. Install the new video cards according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Start workstation hardware.

7. Install video card display drivers according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

2063534-001 Rev 2 326

Appendix E Windows 7 Support

8. Reboot the workstation.

9. Reinstall RA1000.

10. Restore platinum custom properties and other workstation customizations.

11. Test new RA1000 version and platinum custom properties and workstation
customizations.

12. Adjust platinum properties as needed for user workflow.

2063534-001 Rev 2 327

Appendix F Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0

This appendix includes:

Section 1: Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Section 1: Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0

Table F-1 lists the platinum properties released with Centricity PACS 4.0. The properties
are grouped according to feature or enhancement.

Table F-1: PACS 4.0 Platinum Properties

High-Level Property Description Platinum Property Default Setting

MAMMO TILE
com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.Syst
This property is to be changed only if there is a
emOverlayConfigFactory.MG‐ESSENTIAL‐TOPCENTER‐
need to resolve a conflict on the MG
3=108|NOLABEL|HEADER
ESSENTIAL overlay.

For details, see Section 37-1-2 on page 131.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.Syst
This property is to be changed only if there is a
emOverlayConfigFactory.MG‐FULL‐TOPCENTER‐
need to resolve a conflict on the MG FULL
3=108|NOLABEL|HEADER
overlay.

For details, see Section 37-1-3 on page 132.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.MGSy
The amount, in percent, to move the image
stemOverlayMVC.imageCountIndicatorAdjust=65
count indicator away from the center when in
Essential overlay mode.

For details, see Section 37-1-1 on page 130.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.MGSy
Number of points to increase the font size for
stemOverlayMVC.imageCountIndicatorFontAdjust=2
the image count indicator.

For details, see Section 37-1-4 on page 132.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.MammoPreferencePa
This property controls the default value for the
nel.enableMammoTileStep=false
user preference.

For details, see Section 37 on page 130.

2063534-001 Rev 2 328

Appendix F Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0

Table F-1: PACS 4.0 Platinum Properties (Continued)

High-Level Property Description Platinum Property Default Setting

CANCELLED EXAMS FILTERING FROM THE PATIENT JACKET FEATURE

com.ge.med.platinum.work.isu.WorklistTransaction.
This property controls whether a site is
removeCancelledExamsSiteUserConfiguration=2
configured to use the Cancelled Exam Filtering
feature. When enabled, this feature allows sites
to filter out of the Patient Jacket palette
cancelled exams with no associated images or
reports. If a site is enabled, this property also
indicates if a user can disable or enable this
feature.

For details, see Section 10 on page 86.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.WorkstationPrefer
This property controls the default value for the
encePanel.RemoveCancelledExams=true
user preference.

For details, see Section 10-2 on page 86.

MG IMAGE OUT OF DATE INDICATOR

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.Syst
This property enables and disables the
emOverlayMVC.showOutdatedImageIndicator=false
outdated image indicator.

For details, see Section 65-1 on page 183.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.Syst
This property sets the threshold days for image
emOverlayMVC.outdatedImageThresholdDays=180
validity to show the image out of date overlay.

For details, see Section 65-1 on page 183.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.Syst
This property is to be changed only if there is a
emOverlayConfigFactory.MG‐ESSENTIAL‐BOTTOMCENTER‐
need to resolve a conflict on the MG
0=210|NOLABEL|HEADER
ESSENTIAL overlay.

For details, see Section 65-1-4 on page 184.

This property is to be changed only if there is a com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.Syst

need to resolve a conflict on the MG FULL emOverlayConfigFactory.MG‐FULL‐BOTTOMCENTER‐
overlay. 0=210|NOLABEL|HEADER

For details, see Section 65-1-5 on page 184.

This property sets the overall mode for com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.outdatedima

displaying outdated mammo image information geinfo.popup.OutdatedImageInfoController.Outdated
pop-ups. ImageInfoPopupMode=1

For details, see Section 65-1-1 on page 183.

2063534-001 Rev 2 329

Appendix F Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0

Table F-1: PACS 4.0 Platinum Properties (Continued)

High-Level Property Description Platinum Property Default Setting

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.outdatedima
The delay, in milliseconds, after mouse hover
geinfo.popup.OutdatedImageInfoPopupHandler.outdat
over the "Image out of date" overlay display
edImageInfoPopupDelayMilliSecs=1000
before image out of date information pop-up
displays.

For details, see Section 65-1-2 on page 183.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.MGSy
The amount, in percent, to move the image
stemOverlayMVC.outdatedImageIndicatorAdjust=65
count indicator away from the center.

For details, see Section 65-1-3 on page 184.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.overlay.system.MGSy
The number of points to increase the font size
stemOverlayMVC.outdatedImageIndicatorFontAdjust=2
for the image count indicator.

For details, see Section 65-1-3 on page 184.

NAVIGATOR
com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnai
This property sets the width of the timeline.
lDialog.defaultTimelineWidth=250
For details, see Section 66-4 on page 187.
com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnai
The values for these properties are calibrated
lDialog.defaultThumbStripHeightC=160
to calculate the height of the Navigator for both
clinical and diagnostic monitors.
com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnai
lDialog.defaultThumbStripHeightD=144
For details, see Section 66-4 on page 187.
com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnai
lDialog.defaultButtonPanelHeightC=98

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnai
lDialog.defaultButtonPanelHeightD=85

This property determines how far down from com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnai

the top of the screen the Navigator appears lDialog.defaultNavYOffset=45
when displaying it using the Navigator hover
button or the shortcut key. The default value
places the Navigator just under the hover
button so it does not cover up the button.

For details, see Section 66-3 on page 187.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnai
This property controls whether the default
lDialog.defaultLaunchOn1stPinnedMonitor=true
monitor for automatically displaying the
Navigator on exam open is the first monitor that
has a pinned Navigator.

For details, see Section 66-1-1 on page 185.

2063534-001 Rev 2 330

Appendix F Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0

Table F-1: PACS 4.0 Platinum Properties (Continued)

High-Level Property Description Platinum Property Default Setting

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.SeriesThumbnai
This property controls whether the default
lDialog.defaultLaunchOnCMonitor=false
monitor for automatically displaying the
Navigator on exam open is the clinical monitor
or the first diagnostic monitor.

For details, see Section 66-1-2 on page 186.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferen
This property sets the default for the Navigator
cePanel.SnapToolZoomPreference=100
width user preference.

For details, see Section 66-5 on page 188.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferen
This property sets the default for the Navigator
cePanel.DisplayedExamStrips=1
height user preference as the number of
thumbnail strips.

For details, see Section 66-5 on page 188.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferen
This property sets the default for the Navigator
cePanel.snapToolAutoHide=false
auto hide user preference.

For details, see Section 66-5 on page 188.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferen
This property sets the default for the Navigator
cePanel.SnapToolTimeToHide=10
user preference auto hide time.

For details, see Section 66-5 on page 188.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferen
This property sets the default for the Navigator
cePanel.snapToolMinimize=false
minimize user preference.

For details, see Section 66-5 on page 188.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.ViewPreferencePan
This property sets the default for the Navigator
el.autoDisplaySeriesNavigator=false
auto display user preference.

For details, see Section 66-5 on page 188.

This property sets the default monitor region com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.ImageNavigator

type, either stack mode (4) or sheet mode (2), Thumbnail.newLayouts‐default=4
for new regions that are created when changing
the monitor layout using the Navigator.

This property applies to all modalities except

CR and MG.

For details, see Section 66-6 on page 189.

2063534-001 Rev 2 331

Appendix F Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0

Table F-1: PACS 4.0 Platinum Properties (Continued)

High-Level Property Description Platinum Property Default Setting

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.ImageNavigator
This property sets the default monitor region
Thumbnail.newLayouts‐CR=2
type, either stack mode (4) or sheet mode (2),
for new regions that are created when changing
the monitor layout using the Navigator.

This property applies to the CR modality only.

For details, see Section 66-6 on page 189.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.ImageNavigator
This property sets the default monitor region
Thumbnail.newLayouts‐MG=2
type, either stack mode (4) or sheet mode (2),
for new regions that are created when changing
the monitor layout using the Navigator.

This property applies to the MG modality only.

For details, see Section 66-6 on page 189.

com.ge.med.newman.gui.userprefs.NavigatorPreferen
This property enables or disables the ability to
cePanel.enableRightDblClickLaunch=true
double-right-click in a monitor region (empty or
filled) to display the Navigator.

For details, see Section 66-2 on page 187.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.controller.NINContr
This property helps control whether the
oller.NIN_Navigator=true
Navigator receives new image notifications
from the NINController thread.

For details, see Section 66-8 on page 190.

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.view.NavigatorExamP
This property controls if the dynamic image
anel.enableDynamicImageGrouping=true
grouping button appears in the Navigator.

For details, see Section 66-7 on page 190.

HK.Ctrl+N=SERIES_NAVIGATOR
This property is the shortcut key for the
Navigator.

For details, see Section 54-1 on page 157.

QUICK SAVE PRESENTATION STATE

This property enables or disables the quick CompatibilityChecker.canQuickSaveGSPS=true

save feature and the Alt+G functionality.

For details, see Section 38-1 on page 133.

This property adds the prefix Q- to the com.ge.med.newman.gui.view.controller.ExamStatusC

presentation state label. ontroller.QSLabel=Q‐{0}

For details, see Section 38-1 on page 133.

2063534-001 Rev 2 332

Appendix F Platinum Properties Released with PACS 4.0

Table F-1: PACS 4.0 Platinum Properties (Continued)

High-Level Property Description Platinum Property Default Setting

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.functionbar.FunctionBarIc
This property displays or hides the Quick Save
onPanel.showQuickSaveButton=false
Presentation State button on the function bar.

For details, see Section 38-1 on page 133.

HK.Alt+G=QS_GSPS
This property is the shortcut key for Quick Save
Presentation State.

For details, see Section 54-1 on page 157.

ERMF PIXEL SPACING

com.ge.med.platinum.gui.image.notare.user.ERMFAdj
This property controls the “ERMF Adjusted” text
ustedOverlayOn=true
overlay that indicates when ERMF Adjusted
Pixel Spacing is used for measurement for
mammography images.

For details, see Section 37-2 on page 132.

com.ge.med.platinum.ERMFAdjusted.RULES‐
This property specifies the number of
NUMELEMENTS=2
preconfigured rules that can be customized for
using ERMF adjusted imager pixel spacing for
measurements on MG images.

For details, see Section 40-1 on page 136.

com.ge.med.platinum.ERMFAdjusted.RULES‐
For MG MagView images acquired by GE
0=(0008,0070).EQ."GE Medical
mammography systems, this default rule
Systems"&&(0018,1114).GT.1.10&&(0018,1164).GT.(00
determines when to apply ERMF Adjusted
18,7022)/1.10&&(0018,1164).LE.(0018,7022)
measurements.

For details, see Section 40-2 on page 136.

For MG images acquired by non-GE com.ge.med.platinum.ERMFAdjusted.RULES‐

mammography systems, this default rule 1=(0008,0070).NE."GE Medical
applies ERMF Adjusted measurements only on Systems"&&(0018,1114).GT.1.0
images with an ERMF value greater than 1.0.

For details, see Section 40-3 on page 137.

IDR and Precision Reporting

Property for IDR Simplified Design com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.extends.ICAPI.IDRSimplif

iedDesign=false
(informational only)

For details, see page 191.

Property for ICAPI Worklist Selection com.ge.med.rumba.desktop.extends.ICAPI.WorklistSe

lection=true
(informational only)

For details, see page 191.

2063534-001 Rev 2 333

Rx Only

0459

GE Healthcare

gehealthcare.com

Corporate Headquarters Authorized European Representative Asia Headquarters

GE Healthcare GE Medical Systems SCS GE Healthcare
540 W Northwest Highway 283 rue de la Minière 1 BLD-3F
Barrington, IL 60010 USA 78530 BUC, France No. 1 Hua Tuo Road, Zhang Jiang Hi-Tech Park
Tel: +1 847 277-5000 Shanghai 201203 China
Fax: +1 847 277-5240 Tel: 8621-38777888
Fax: 8621-38777499

2063534-001 Rev 2 334